Motorola Edge 40 Smartphone manual
Smartphones · 9 Q&As

Motorola Edge 40 Smartphone

Ask AI

— answers from the official manual

Answers from the official manual.

Common questions

Common Questions

9 total
1

How do I insert or remove a SIM card?

To insert or remove the SIM card, use the SIM tool to gently push out the tray from its hole, then put in (gold contacts up) or remove the card. If your phone supports eSIM, download and set it up via Settings > Network & internet > SIM preferences. (Page 6)

2

How do I turn off my phone?

To turn off your Motorola Edge 40, use quick settings by swiping down from the top of the screen twice, tap on Power off and confirm. Alternatively, you can press and hold the Power button until the 'Power off' option appears and select it.

3

How do I take a screenshot?

To take a screenshot, either touch the screen with three fingers and lift your finger (if enabled); drag from the bottom of the screen to access recent apps and tap Screenshot; or hold down both Power and Volume Down buttons until the screen capture is complete. (Page 40)

4

How do I record my phone's screen?

Open quick settings, tap on Screen record, position your frame over the video and begin recording by tapping Start button. The timer appears both in the status bar and within the recorder; swipe down from the top of the screen to stop the recording.

5

How do I personalize my home screen with widgets and shortcuts?

To add a widget or shortcut, touch and hold an empty space on your home screen, then select Widgets from the menu that appears. Pick from various pre-installed options to customize your phone’s appearance and functionality.

6

How do I set up Bluetooth connectivity with my Motorola Edge 40?

To connect a new Bluetooth device, go into Settings > Connections > Bluetooth, turn it on by toggling the switch to ‘On’ and then tap 'Scan'. Select the device you wish to pair from the list that appears.

Show 3 more questions

Full Manual

370 pages
Page 1

User Guide

© 2025 Motorola Mobility LLC. All rights reserved. MOTOROLA, the stylized M logo, MOTO, and the MOTO family of marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC. LENOVO is a trademark of Lenovo. Google, Android, Google Play and other marks are trademarks of Google LLC. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. This product supports digital video coding under certain versions of HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding) standard and is covered by patents at patentlist.accessadvance.com.

![image 1](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1.png)

Certain features, services and applications are network dependent and may not be available in all areas; additional terms, conditions and/or charges may apply. Contact your service provider for details.

All features, functionality, and other product specifications, as well as the information contained in this help content, are based upon the latest available information and believed to be accurate at the time of release. Motorola reserves the right to change or modify any information or specifications without notice or obligation.

Some images in help content are examples only.

To use the latest version of this content, go to Settings > Help on your phone.

#### motorola edge 40 iii

Contents

Set up phone 1 About your hardware 1 Insert or remove SIM card 4 Copy data from old phone 6 Manage dual SIMs 9 Set up voicemail 10 Set up email 11 Make it yours 13

Learn the basics 14 About your home screen 14 About your lock screen 16 New to Android? 17

If this is your first smartphone 17 If you had an iPhone 19 About your Google account 20 Status bar icons 21 Phone terms you should know 25

Get around on your phone 27 Learn gestures 27 Move between apps and screens 29 Use quick settings 31 Turn screen off and on 36 Turn off phone 37

Capture your screen 38 Take screenshots 38 Record your screen 40 Create GIFs from video 42

Discover useful tools 43 Turn flashlight on and off 43 Scan QR codes 44 Record audio notes 45 Control phone with your voice 48 Get directions to a location 49 Use clock and weather widget 50 Set up family safe space 52 Manage how you spend time on your phone 54

Work with text 57 Use onscreen keyboard 57 Cut, copy, paste text 59 Use voice typing 60

#### motorola edge 40 iv

Page 2

Fill in forms automatically 61 Personalize your phone 62

Home screen 62 Personalize with your style 62 Change wallpaper 64 Customize your Favorites tray 65 Use widgets, shortcuts, or folders 66 Arrange apps and control icon's look 70 Home screen rotation lock 72 Remove Google feed 73 Remake your home screen with launchers 74

Lock screen 75 Use a screen saver 75

Use apps 76 Open, close, switch apps 76 See two apps at the same time 78 View notifications 80 About preloaded apps 82 About the Moto app 86 Focus on gaming 88 Get, delete, manage apps 91

Install or update apps 91 Manage app permissions 94 Delete or disable apps 96 Find problem apps with safe mode 97 Protect against harmful apps 98

Search and browse 99 Search the web 99 Search your phone 101 Browse websites 102

Text messaging 104 About text and multimedia messages 104 Read, send messages 105 Manage, delete messages 108 Change default messaging app 110 Change text message reply to incoming calls 111 Get text messages on your computer 112

Email 113 Read, send, manage emails 113 View email attachments 115 Preview inboxes from home screen 116

#### motorola edge 40 v

Add email signature 117 Control email notifications 118

Calendar app 119 About the calendar 119 Find calendar events 120 Create and manage events 121 Control notifications for calendar events 122

Clock app 123 Set alarms 123 Use timer or stopwatch 124 Set date and time 126

Photos app 128 Share photos and videos 128 Upload photos and videos 129

##### Contacts, calls, voicemail 131

Contacts 131 Add contacts 131 Edit or delete contacts 132 Star your favorite contacts 134 Sort contacts 135 Share contacts 136

Phone calls 137 Answer calls 137 Make calls 139 During a call 141 Make video calls 143 Make conference calls 144 Make calls over Wi-Fi 145 Use caller ID 147 Turn call waiting on and off 149 Block calls and texts 150 View and delete call history 152 Make emergency call from locked phone 154

Voicemail 155 Use voicemail 155

Page 3

Music 157 Listen to music 157 Transfer music files 159 Connect a MIDI device 160

Settings 161

#### motorola edge 40 vi

Network and internet 161 Connect to Wi‑Fi networks 161 Connect with Wi-Fi Direct 163 Use Airplane mode 164 Control data usage 165 Share your internet connection 167 Connect to VPNs 171 Add a Private DNS service 172

Connected devices 173 Connect with Bluetooth 173 Make contactless payments 176 Share or receive with NFC 177 Share files and links with nearby devices 178 Transfer files between phone and computer (USB) 180 Change USB preferences 182 Cast screen or media to TV 184 Print from your phone 186 About wireless sharing 187

Display 190 Adjust screen brightness 190 Use Dark theme 191 Choose color mode 192 Change text and icon size 193 Adjust refresh rate 194 Show apps full screen 195 Stop automatic rotation 196 Adjust Edge Lights 197 Stop screen flicker in dark environments 198 Adjust colors at night 199 See Peek Display notifications 200 Change screen timeout 202 Set screen recording options 203 Change lock screen features 204

Sound & vibration 206 Adjust volumes 206 Set ringtones 208 Change vibration settings 210 Enhance sound 212 Silence calls & notifications 213 Stop phone from speaking 216 Silence “Hello Moto” during power up 217 Turn off charging sounds 218 Turn touch sounds on/off 219

#### motorola edge 40 vii

Hear other notification sounds 220

Notifications 221 Turn notifications on/off 221 Choose how notifications look and open 222 Control notification sound 224 Manage notification privacy 226 See previously viewed notifications 228

Gestures 229 Change System navigation 229 Set up sidebar for easy multitasking 231 Use one-handed mode 232 Adjust screenshot settings 234 Customize Power button gesture 235 Double-tap back for shortcut 236 Turn flashlight on and off 237 Twist phone to open camera 238

Battery 239 Charge phone 239 Extend battery life 241 Prevent overcharging 243 Use Battery saver 244 Show battery percentage in status bar 245

Storage 246 About storage options 246 Manage phone storage 247 Find downloaded files 248 Recover recently deleted files 249 Upload music to cloud 250 Upload photos and videos 251 Scan documents and make copies 253

Location 254 Use location services 254

Accessibility 257 Visual assistance 257 Hearing assistance 262 Dexterity assistance 265 Use accessibility shortcuts 267 Find accessible apps and devices 270

Apps 271 Set or change default apps 271 Adjust special app access 272

#### motorola edge 40 viii

Page 4

Passwords & accounts 273 Add or remove accounts 273 Change name & info in your Google account 275 Sync apps with your Google account 276 Control what info Google collects 278

Security & privacy 279 About security 279 Protect against harmful apps 280 Make sure your phone can be found 281 Lock and unlock phone 282

Set a screen lock 282 Quickly tighten lock screen security 284 Set advanced lock options 285 Use fingerprint security 287 Auto lock when you leave or disconnect 290 Prevent repetitive unlocking 291 Unlock with your face 292

More security settings 294 Pin an app screen 294 Protect apps in a secure folder 295 Lock SIM card 299

Privacy 300 Review or change permissions 300 Control access to your mic and camera 301 Hide passwords 302

Keep Wi-Fi and mobile networks secure 303 Safety & emergency 304

Prepare for emergencies 304 System 306

Languages & input 306 Customize the keyboard 306 Change keyboard apps 308 Use multiple languages 309

Open apps faster 310 Back up phone 311 Users and guests 312

Share your phone 312 Add, modify, remove users 314 Add or delete guest 316

About phone 317

#### motorola edge 40 ix

Record your IMEI number 317 Find legal and product information 318

##### Fix issues 319

Hardware issues 319 Phone is slow or unstable 319 Phone feels warm or hot 320 Phone won't turn on 321 Phone restarts or crashes 322 Screen is frozen or won't respond 323 Screen displays wrong colors 324 Screen brightness automatically too dim or bright 325

Call and SIM issues 326 Troubleshoot issues with calls 326 Can't make calls 327 Can't answer or phone doesn't ring 329 Issues during calls 331

Battery issues 334 Charging issues 334 Battery drains too fast 336

Page 5

Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, USB issues 337 Bluetooth issues 337 Wi-Fi issues 340 Can't transfer files or connect USB to computer 342

Account and sign-in issues 343 Forgot unlock code 343 Can't sign in to Google 344 Account sync issues 345

App issues 347 App or widget issues 347 Camera issues 349 Messaging issues 351 Gmail issues 353 Play Store issues 354

Maintenance procedures 355 Update Android software 355 Reset connections, settings, or apps 356 Reset phone 358 Get more help 360

Send feedback to Motorola 361

About your hardware

Hardware diagram

![image 2](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile2.png)

  • 1. Edge lights
  • 2. Front camera (learn more in Camera help)
  • 3. Proximity sensor
  • 4. Speaker
  • 5. Microphone
  • 6. Volume button
  • 7. Power button
  • 8. Fingerprint sensor
  • ![image 3](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile3.png)

  • 1. Ultra-wide and macro camera
  • 2. Main camera
  • 3. Ambient light sensor
  • 4. Flash
  • 5. NFC touchpoint for sharing content or paying with your phone
  • 6. Microphone
  • Page 6

  • 7. Wireless charging area; also, double-tap here if you set up the Quick Launch shortcut
  • 8. Tray for SIM card
  • 9. USB-C port to charge phone, transfer files, and share data connection with tethered devices.
  • 10. Speaker
  • Protect your phone

    Find cases and other accessories designed for your phone at motorola.com

    Care for your phone

    To clean the screen:

  • • While this does not disinfect your phone, the best way to keep your phone clean is to wipe it thoroughly with a dry soft cloth. Avoid abrasive cloths, including paper towels and other materials with rough surfaces.
  • • If the screen gets drops of liquid on it, wipe it with a clean, dry cloth. To disinfect your phone:
  • • It is okay to use wipes or cloths moistened with 70% isopropyl alcohol to gently wipe your screen.
  • • When disinfecting or cleaning your phone, turn it off and avoid getting any moisture in its openings, including the charging port, headphone jack, microphones and speakers.
  • • Don't submerge your phone in any cleaning agents, avoid using any cleaners with bleach or abrasives, and avoid spraying cleaners directly on the screen.
  • About water, splash, and dust resistance

    Tested under controlled laboratory conditions, the phone is water, splash, and dust resistant to a rating of IP68 (IEC 60529). The phone can be submerged up to 1.5 meters in still, fresh water for up to 30 minutes. Exposure to conditions beyond this rating is not covered by warranty. Resistance will decrease as a result of normal wear. Not designed to work while submerged underwater. Do not expose to pressurized water, or liquids other than fresh water. Do not attempt to charge a wet phone. Designed to provide protection against the ingress of solid foreign objects of any size. Not waterproof.

    To prevent water damage to your phone:

  • • Do not expose your phone to pressurized water, salt water or liquids other than fresh water
  • • Avoid prolonged exposure to water, and do not intentionally submerge in water
  • • Dry your phone and ports thoroughly with a soft, clean cloth
  • • Don’t try to charge your phone when it’s wet
  • • Don't drop, puncture, or scratch your phone, as this could damage the water repellent features
  • Page 7

    About Qualcomm aptX audio technology

    Your phone features Qualcomm aptX HD audio for 24-bit music quality over Bluetooth.

    ![image 4](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile4.png)

    Qualcomm aptX is a product of Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries. Qualcomm is a trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated, registered in the United States and other countries. aptX is a trademark of Qualcomm Technologies International, Ltd., registered in the United States and other countries.

    Insert or remove SIM card

    Your phone might support using an eSIM (embedded SIM card), in addition to the physical SIM card. Contact your carrier for details.

    Set up eSIM

    If your carrier provided you with an eSIM:

  • 1. If you don't have a network connection, connect to Wi-Fi.
  • 2. Go to Settings > Network & internet > SIM preferences.
  • 3. Tap the option to download and set up an eSIM, then follow onscreen instructions.
  • Insert or remove physical card

  • 1. Insert the SIM tool into the tray hole and gently push to pop it out.
  • ![image 5](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile5.png)

  • 2. Insert (gold contacts up) or remove the card.
  • ![image 6](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile6.png)

  • 2. Insert or remove the cards as needed. Or, to use two physical SIM cards (not available on all models):
  • Page 8

    ![image 7](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile7.png)

    To see if your phone supports two physical SIM cards, go to Settings > About phone > SIM status. If you see SIM Slot 1 and SIM Slot 2, then you can use two physical SIMs in your phone.

  • 3. Push the tray back into the phone.
  • ![image 8](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile8.png)

    Note: If you need to activate or resize a SIM, contact your carrier.

    Erase eSIM

    You may need to erase your eSIM:

  • • When you transfer the eSIM number to another phone
  • • If you're giving the phone to someone else or trading it in
  • Note: Only erase your eSIM when instructed to do so by a support technician.

    When you erase an eSIM, you remove the following capabilities from the phone:

  • • Calling
  • • Mobile data usage
  • • Messaging Erasing the eSIM does not cancel your mobile data services. To cancel your services, contact your carrier. To erase an eSIM:
  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Reset options.
  • 2. Tap Erase eSIMs > Erase. To restore an eSIM you erased, contact your carrier.
  • Fix an issue

    Page 9

    If you’re having problems, try these troubleshooting steps.

    Copy data from old phone

    Copy data from iPhone

    You’ll use Google Drive to copy files from your iPhone and iCloud account to your new phone and Google account:

  • • Photos will back up to Photos.
  • ![image 9](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile9.png)

  • • Contacts will back up to Contacts.
  • ![image 10](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile10.png)

  • • Calendar will back up to Calendar.
  • ![image 11](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile11.png)

  • 1. Charge both phones and connect them to a Wi-Fi network.
  • 2. To ensure you don’t miss any messages or calls, on your iPhone:
  • a. Turn off iMessage. (Settings > Messages off. Or, if your SIM has been removed, deregister your phone.)
  • b. Turn off FaceTime. (Settings > FaceTime > off.)
  • ![image 12](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile12.png)

  • 3. Download the Google Drive app on your iPhone.
  • 4. On your iPhone, open Drive and then:
  • Page 10

  • a. Sign in with your Google account. If you don’t have one, you can create it now.
  • b. Tap > Settings > Backup & reset and start the backup.
  • ![image 13](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile13.png)

  • 5. Wait for the backup to complete.
  • 6. When complete, on your new phone, sign in with the same Google account (Settings > Passwords & accounts > Add account).
  • Copy data from Android phone

    During setup, you can copy your apps, music, contacts, messages, and more. Learn what does and doesn't get copied.

    If you no longer have your old phone or can’t turn it on, you can copy files using a backup from the cloud with your Google account.

    ##### Copy data

  • 1. Charge both phones and turn them on.
  • 2. On your new phone:
  • a. If this is the first time you’ve turned it on, select your language on the setup screen.
  • b. If you skipped copying files during setup, swipe down from the top of the screen and tap the Android Setup notification to finish setting up your phone.
  • 3. Tap Start.
  • 4. Insert your SIM to connect to the mobile network, or tap Skip.
  • 5. Connect to a Wi-Fi network and tap Next.
  • 6. Follow the onscreen instructions to select the old phone or backup associated with your Google account, and to choose which apps and data to copy.
  • Tip: Be sure to leave Back up to Google Drive turned on. After migration, merge any duplicate contacts. What gets copied Here's what gets copied from the old phone:

    Page 11

  • • Apps and app data
  • • Music, photos, and videos
  • • Google accounts
  • • Contacts stored on your phone or SIM card
  • • Text messages
  • • Multimedia attachments in messages
  • • Most phone settings
  • • Wallpaper
  • • Call history You’ll see these when you sign in to your Google account on your new phone.
  • What doesn't get copied These items aren't transferred from your old phone:

  • • Downloads, like PDF files
  • • Apps that aren’t from Play Store
  • • Accounts other than Google accounts
  • • Contacts and calendars for services other than Google (such as WhatsApp)
  • • Ringtones
  • Import contacts from SIM

    If you have a SIM card with contacts saved on it, you can import them into your Google account.

  • 1. Insert the SIM in your phone. Or, if your old phone is an Android phone and can connect to Wi-Fi, turn it on.
  • 2. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 14](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile14.png)

  • 3. At the bottom, tap Organize > Manage SIM.
  • ![image 15](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile15.png)

    ![image 16](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile16.png)

    Page 12

  • 4. If your phone has two SIMs, select the SIM.
  • ######## 5. Select where to save the contacts:

  • • If you have multiple Google accounts, tap and choose the account where you want to save them.
  • ![image 17](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile17.png)

  • • To save them to your phone, tap Device.
  • ######## 6. Select the contacts to import and tap Import.

    Manage dual SIMs

    About dual SIMs

    If you're using a physical SIM and an eSIM:

  • • You see at the top of the home screen. If you see , troubleshoot the issue.
  • ![image 18](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile18.png)

    ![image 19](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile19.png)

  • • Both SIMs can make and receive calls and text messages.
  • • Only the owner of the phone (not additional users or guests) can access dual SIM settings. Use SIM profiles
  • Set up SIM profile Set options based on how you expect to use the SIMs:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > SIM preferences.
  • Page 13

  • 2. Select the option that best meets your needs:
  • • Smart SIM: Automatically select SIM for voice calls based on your call history. In Brazil, selection is also based on your contact's carrier.
  • • Personal and Work: Use one SIM for personal and the other for work-related voice calls.
  • • Manual: Choose which SIM to use for voice calls, for data, and for SMS.
  • 3. Follow onscreen instructions to complete setup.
  • ##### Change SIM profile

    This information applies only if your carrier supports eSIMs and you've set one up as well as inserting a physical SIM card.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > SIM preferences.
  • 2. Touch Dual SIM usage profile.
  • 3. Select a different profile and touch CHANGE PROFILE.
  • 4. Select a new profile.
  • 5. Follow onscreen instructions to complete setup. To keep the same profile but adjust options for data, SMS, voice calls, video calls, or contacts:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > SIM preferences.
  • 2. Touch each preferred SIM and contact option to change.
  • Set up voicemail

    Set voicemail password

    Contact your carrier for help setting or recovering your password/PIN for voicemail.

    Set mailbox greeting Your carrier provides and manages your voicemail. To set your greeting:

  • 1. Touch > .
  • Page 14

    ![image 20](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile20.png)

    ![image 21](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile21.png)

  • 2. Touch & hold to dial into your mailbox.
  • ![image 22](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile22.png)

  • 3. Follow your carrier’s system prompts. If your voicemail is not set up, contact your carrier for instructions.
  • Change voicemail options

  • 1. Touch > > Settings. (If you don't see , swipe down on the screen.)
  • ![image 23](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile23.png)

    ![image 24](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile24.png)

    ![image 25](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile25.png)

  • 2. Touch Voicemail.
  • 3. If you have two SIMs, touch the SIM for the account to change.
  • 4. Change any of the options:
  • • To change voicemail service from your carrier to a different service or app, touch Advanced Settings > Service.
  • • To change the number dialed to access voicemail, touch Advanced Settings > Setup.
  • • Your carrier might include additional options here, like notification and visual voicemail settings. Contact your carrier for help.
  • Set up email

    Page 15

    Set up personal email

    You can add multiple accounts of the following types:

  • • Gmail
  • • Personal email from other providers (IMAP/POP) If you added a Google account on your phone:
  • • When you open the Gmail app for the first time, you'll see your email for that account. You're already set up.
  • • To set up additional accounts, open Gmail, touch your profile icon , then touch Add another account.
  • ![image 26](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile26.png)

    If you didn’t add a Google account to your phone and want to set up email for an IMAP/POP provider (an address that's not Gmail):

  • 1. Open the Gmail app.
  • 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to enter your email address, password, and account options. If you have problems setting up the account, read Google's help for Gmail.
  • Set up corporate email

    If you use Microsoft Office Outlook on your work computer, your phone can synchronize emails, calendar events, and contacts with the Microsoft Exchange server. Before you start, you'll need the following information from your company's IT department:

  • • Email address
  • • Email password
  • • Domain name
  • • Username
  • • Server name
  • • Security type/SSL settings
  • • Client certificate requirement To set up corporate email:
  • 1. Open the Gmail app.
  • 2. Do one of the following:
  • Page 16

  • • If this is your first time opening the Gmail app, touch Add another email address.
  • • If you have been using Gmail with another account, touch your profile icon , then touch Add another account.
  • ![image 27](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile27.png)

  • 3. Touch Exchange and Office 365.
  • 4. Follow the onscreen instructions to enter your email address, password, and other information from your company's IT department.
  • Switch account views In the Gmail app, touch your profile icon , then select an account. To open each inbox with one touch from your home screen, add task shortcuts:

    ![image 28](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile28.png)

  • 1. Touch & hold .
  • ![image 29](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile29.png)

  • 2. Drag for each account to a blank space on your home screen.
  • ![image 30](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile30.png)

    Make it yours

    This topic lists things that most people want to do with their new phone, with links to instructions on how to do them.

    Change its look and sound

  • • Personalize your phone with wallpapers, themes, fonts, and more.
  • • Add apps to your home screen.
  • • You can use either the buttons or gestures to move between apps and screens. Choose which System navigation to use.
  • Page 17

    ![image 31](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile31.png)

    ![image 32](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile32.png)

    ![image 33](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile33.png)

  • • Assign ringtones or photos to friends you call.
  • • Set your schedule for Do Not Disturb, to automatically silence your phone when you don't want to be interrupted. Protect your phone
  • • Set up a screen lock.
  • • Set up fingerprint security to unlock your screen safely and quickly with a touch.
  • • In case you lose your phone, set up Find My Device and record your IMEI number. Other common set up tasks
  • • Connect with your Bluetooth devices and Wi-Fi networks.
  • • If you use multiple languages, set them up so they appear on your keyboard.
  • About your home screen

    You see the home screen when you turn on and unlock your phone or swipe up from the bottom of the screen.

    Swipe right or left to move between home screens.

    What’s on the screen

    ![image 34](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile34.png)

  • 1. Status bar: Displays the time and icons that tell you about your phone's battery and network connections. Swipe down to see your notifications and quick settings and to turn your phone off .
  • ![image 35](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile35.png)

  • 2. Widget: You can add widgets to your home screen for quick access to information or frequent tasks.
  • 3. Shortcut: You can add shortcuts to open apps or web pages you use frequently.
  • 4. Favorites tray: Provides one touch access to your most-used apps from any home screen page. You can customize which apps appear here.
  • 5. Navigation bar: Use gestures to move between apps and screens. You can use gestures but hide the bar. Or, you can replace the bar with the navigation icons instead.
  • Page 18

    ![image 36](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile36.png)

    ![image 37](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile37.png)

    ![image 38](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile38.png)

  • 6. Folder: Add folders to organize app shortcuts.
  • Add/remove screens

    You can add more home screens to the right. To add a page, drag an app shortcut or widget to the edge of an existing page and place it on the new screen.

    To remove a home screen, drag all apps, shortcuts, widgets, and folders off the screen. After you remove the last item, the home screen will be removed.

    Customize your home screen

    ####### Organize it:

  • • Touch & hold an item you want to move, then drag it to the new location.
  • • Group icons into folders.
  • • Choose where to find your list of all apps: in the app tray or directly on the home screen. Change how you get around: You can replace the navigation bar with the navigation icons. Change how it looks:
  • ![image 39](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile39.png)

    ![image 40](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile40.png)

    ![image 41](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile41.png)

  • • To see options for customizing wallpaper, widgets, and other home settings, touch & hold a blank space on the home screen.
  • • For an entirely new look and feel for your home screen, you can install a different launcher.
  • Page 19

    About your lock screen

    The lock screen appears when you're using a screen lock and you power on your phone or turn on the screen.

    ![image 42](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile42.png)

    Tip: If you're using Peek Display, you'll see that screen before you get to your lock screen.

    ##### What you can do from the lock screen

  • • Make an emergency call. Swipe up from the bottom of the screen.
  • • View and respond to notifications. Double touch one to open it.
  • • Open quick settings. Swipe down from top of the screen for your top four settings and notifications, then swipe again to see the rest.
  • • Start a voice command. Swipe up diagonally from either bottom corner.
  • • Go into Lockdown. Temporarily turn off notifications and fingerprint unlocking. You can customize your lock screen to add a message and control what content and features appear.
  • If this is your first smartphone

    Learn the basics

    To get around your phone, here are the key concepts.

  • • You can choose how you move between apps and screens: gestures or icons.
  • ![image 43](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile43.png)

    ![image 44](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile44.png)

    ![image 45](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile45.png)

  • • In addition to tapping the screen to select items, you can use other gestures, such as pinch to zoom.
  • • The icons at the top of your home screen tell you important stuff at a glance, like your phone’s battery level and network connection, and whether you’ve missed a call.
  • • Your phone and apps send you notifications for things like new messages, calendar events, and upcoming alarms. You’ll find notifications in several places, and can do a lot with them. To learn about these common tasks, tap one below:
  • Page 20

  • • Answer a call
  • • Make a call
  • • Set an alarm
  • • Turn the flashlight on/off
  • • Listen to music
  • Get apps

    Your phone comes with many fun and useful apps, but you can really unlock its power by installing apps that suit your lifestyle. Go to Play Store to explore free and paid apps that help you be more productive, organized, informed, in touch, and entertained.

    ![image 46](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile46.png)

    Protect your phone

    You carry your phone around with you, and accidents happen; phones get lost sometimes. So set up some security and prevent heartache if you and your phone become separated.

    Set up a screen lock. This is your first line of defense in keeping your sensitive information safe. Prefer numbers, shapes, words? Set up a PIN, pattern, or password required to unlock your phone. Learn how. A screen lock doesn't prevent you from immediately answering a call or accessing your camera. Display your owner info. On your lock screen, you can discreetly display a “please return” message with some of your contact info so that, if your phone is lost, someone can return it to you. Learn how. Enable lost phone features. For peace of mind, check out Find My Device, in case you ever need to remotely locate and lock or erase your phone.

    Personalize your phone

    While changing your wallpaper is probably your first customization, don't stop there. Go to Settings > Personalize to customize colors, fonts, ringtones. And check out your other Settings where you can set your keyboard preferences, pair with devices, and much more. It's a great way to learn many of your phone's capabilities while customizing it to suit your needs.

    In most apps you can tap , , or your profile icon for app-specific settings. Be sure to see what options are available to you there, too.

    ![image 47](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile47.png)

    ![image 48](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile48.png)

    ![image 49](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile49.png)

    Manage cellular data

    Understand your data usage. Keep an eye on your data usage and learn how to make the most of it. See which apps use large amounts of data and adjust their settings. If your phone is using too much data, you can also stop accounts from auto-syncing.

    Page 21

    Use Wi-Fi to conserve cellular data. When you connect to a Wi-Fi network, your data will use that network connection instead of your carrier's network, saving your cellular data for when you need it. Learn how to connect to Wi-Fi networks.

    Useful to know

    Find phone info. To find your phone number, device name, and other information, go to Settings > About phone.

    Tell your phone what to do. Use your phone hands-free with voice commands. Tell it to navigate you, and listen to it speak the directions to you as you drive--it'll even reroute you if you've gone off course. Tell it to set alarms, find information on the web, make calls.

    Never miss a photo opportunity. Automatically open the camera right from your lock screen. Just twist your phone twice. You can automatically back up your photos and videos with your Google account or with other photo sharing apps available from Play Store.

    Wi-Fi hotspot. You can use your phone as a Wi-Fi hotspot to share your internet connection with your other devices that need internet access (for example, a laptop or tablet).

    Reboot phone. In the unlikely event that your phone becomes unresponsive, frozen, shows a blank or black screen, or doesn't respond to the Power button, you can reboot it. Press & hold the Power button for 7 - 10 seconds. The phone will restart normally.

    Certain features, services, and applications are network or carrier dependent and may not be available in all areas.

    If you had an iPhone Welcome to Android! Here are some differences between your old iPhone and your new phone. Your assistant: You've retired Siri. Now, find info and get things done with Google Assistant. Just set up “Hey, Google”. Then ask for info or help with everyday tasks. Apps:

  • • Goodbye Apple App Store, hello Google Play Store. Play Store is now your default app store. Apps aren't compatible between iPhone and Android. However, many developers make iPhone and Android versions of their apps; if the app stores your data online, then you can switch with little effort. Just download the Android version from Play Store and log in.
  • • Continue listening to podcasts. There are lots of podcast apps on Play Store - search for “podcast” in Play Store and download one of your choice.
  • • Install apps remotely. On a computer, visit play.google.com. Browse apps on the bigger screen and then install them on your phone from your computer.
  • Your home screen: Your old phone defaulted to show all apps on your home screen. With your new phone, you can put shortcuts to your most important apps on your customizable home screen for easy access. This frees up room on your home screen for widgets, making your new home much more lively.

    Privacy indicator: On Android, a green indicator means either your camera or mic are being used by an app. On iPhone, an orange indicator means the mic is being used and a green indicator means the camera is being used.

    In the cloud: Your Google account is your key to cloud storage with Google. If you migrated your contacts to your phone, then you can see them from any device or computer by logging into Gmail. Your Google account includes apps like Calendar and Drive that let you work well with others. And it has apps that let you play too - access your photos, videos, music from any device when you log in with your Google account. Use YT Music to upload your iTunes library. For help signing in to your account, read Google's support information.

    File sharing: If you used AirDrop on your iPhone, now you'll use Quick Share to easily share files or links with friends.

    About your Google account

    Page 22

    Benefits of your account

    When you set up your phone, you added a Google account. If you haven't had a Google account before, this is more than just a password you set up for your phone.

    A Google account lets you organize and access your personal information and files from any computer or mobile device:

  • • Synchronize everything. Never lose your contacts. Associate them with your Google account if you create contacts on your phone, and view them from Gmail on any computer or by signing into your Google account on any phone. Create emails or calendar events on your phone and view them on any computer. Access your browser bookmarks from any device.
  • • Store in the cloud. Upload your photos, videos, and music to the cloud; get to all of it without taking up space on your phone.
  • • Keep your stuff secure. Your account password secures it all and lets you access it from anywhere.
  • Maintaining your account

    Other than remembering your password, you don’t need to do much maintenance on your Google account just enjoy the benefits of your secure, synchronized information. However, you can:

  • • Control how frequently your phone syncs your information.
  • • Review and manage the information Google collects from you, such as search and browsing history.
  • Learn about Google apps

    Many Google apps, like Gmail, Chrome, Photos, and Maps are preloaded on your phone. To learn about and download additional Google apps, read Google’s help.

    Can't sign in to Google account

    If you’re having problems signing in to your account, read Google's support information.

    Status bar icons

    About status icons

    The status bar at the top of the home screen contains icons that help you monitor your phone.

  • • On the left, icons tell you about apps, such as new messages or downloads. If you don't know what one of these icons means, swipe the status bar down for details.
  • • On the right, icons tell you about your phone's battery level and network connections. A dot means there are more icons to view. Drag down from the top of the screen to see all icons.
  • Page 23

    What status icons mean

    These are the icons from apps that came on your phone and the phone status icons.

    Icon Meaning

    CALLS

    ![image 50](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile50.png)

    Active call.

    ![image 51](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile51.png)

    Missed call.

    ![image 52](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile52.png)

    Speakerphone on.

    ![image 53](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile53.png)

    Microphone muted.

    ####### NETWORK

    ![image 54](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile54.png)

    Connected to cellular/mobile network (full signal). Speed of your network connection is also shown. Possible speeds, from slowest to fastest, are 3G, H, H+, 4G, 5G. Available speeds depend on your carrier and your location.

    ![image 55](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile55.png)

    Page 24

    Connected to different cellular/mobile network (roaming).

    ![image 56](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile56.png)

    Data Saver is on, preventing apps from using background data.

    ![image 57](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile57.png)

    Wi‑Fi network within range.

    Connected to Wi‑Fi network.

    ![image 58](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile58.png)

    ![image 59](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile59.png)

    No SIM card.

    ![image 60](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile60.png)

    Location services are in use.

    ![image 61](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile61.png)

    Airplane mode on.

    ####### CONNECTIVITY

    ![image 62](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile62.png)

    Trusted device connected.

    Your phone is a Wi‑Fi hotspot. Devices can connect to share your data connection.

    Page 25

    ![image 63](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile63.png)

    ![image 64](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile64.png)

    Wireless display or adaptor connected.

    ![image 65](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile65.png)

    Connected by USB cable.

    ![image 66](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile66.png)

    USB tethering enabled.

    ![image 67](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile67.png)

    NFC enabled. Only some versions of this phone, sold in certain countries, support this feature.

    ####### SYNC AND UPDATES

    ![image 68](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile68.png)

    App updates are available for download from Play Store.

    ![image 69](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile69.png)

    Email and calendar sync in progress.

    ![image 70](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile70.png)

    Upload complete.

    ![image 71](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile71.png)

    Page 26

    Download complete.

    ![image 72](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile72.png)

    Google backup in progress.

    ![image 73](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile73.png)

    Google backup complete.

    ####### SOUND

    ![image 74](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile74.png)

    Vibrate.

    ####### DO NOT DISTURB

    ![image 75](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile75.png)

    Do Not Disturb is on.

    ####### BATTERY

    ![image 76](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile76.png)

    Battery fully charged.

    ![image 77](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile77.png)

    Battery charging.

    ![image 78](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile78.png)

    Page 27

    Battery low.

    ![image 79](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile79.png)

    Overcharge protection is limiting battery to 80%.

    ![image 80](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile80.png)

    Phone is in Battery saver mode.

    ####### ALARM AND CALENDAR

    ![image 81](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile81.png)

    Alarm set.

    ![image 82](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile82.png)

    Upcoming calendar event.

    ####### EMAIL AND MESSAGING

    ![image 83](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile83.png)

    New Gmail message.

    ![image 84](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile84.png)

    New text message.

    ![image 85](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile85.png)

    New voicemail.

    Page 28

    ![image 86](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile86.png)

    Important alert.

    ####### OTHER ICONS

    ![image 87](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile87.png)

    Privacy indicator. An app is using your microphone or camera.

    ![image 88](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile88.png)

    Animated GIF is available.

    ![image 89](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile89.png)

    Screen recording in process.

    ![image 90](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile90.png)

    Focus mode is on.

    Apps that you download might show other icons to alert you about their status.

    Certain features, services, and applications are network or carrier dependent and may not be available in all areas.

    Phone terms you should know

    Airplane mode This mode allows you to use your phone's non-wireless functions (music, games, etc.), while disabling its wireless radio functions that are banned on airplanes during flight.

    app Software that you can download for added functionality, such as games, email apps, bar code scanners and more. Some apps are already on your phone, and more can be downloaded from your phone's app store.

    Bluetooth™ A short-range wireless technology you can use to connect a device to other nearby Bluetooth-capable devices and accessories, such as headsets, speakers, printers, etc. Use Bluetooth to make handsfree calls on a headset or in your car, listen to music on wireless speakers, use a wireless mouse or keyboard, or print a document in another room. Set up Bluetooth.

    Page 29

    cellular network or mobile network A network of radio-transmitting towers. You make calls on your phone using radio waves sent between the phone and the network towers. You also send data and access the Internet on this network. Carriers use different technologies to handle these radio transmissions (GSM, CDMA, Edge, 3G, 4G, LTE, HSPA, iDEN).

    data Information sent or received from your phone other than calls and text messages. You may use data when you access the internet, check your email, play games, use apps and more. Background tasks, such as syncing or location services, may also use data.

    data usage The amount of data your phone uploads or downloads over a network in a given period. Your phone uses your carrier's cellular network or over a Wi-Fi network. Depending on your plan with your carrier, you may be charged additional fees when your data usage exceeds your plan's monthly limits.

    GPS Global Positioning System. A global satellite-based system for determining precise locations on Earth.With GPS, your phone becomes your navigator when you're driving and your concierge when you're looking for a nearby meal, movie, or cup of coffee.

    mobile hotspot A device or app that lets you share your mobile data connection with multiple devices via Wi‑Fi. You can connect different devices to your hotspot, including notebooks, netbooks, MP3 players, cameras, Smartphones, and portable gaming systems. The number of devices that can connect at one time depends on your carrier and connection speed.

    NFC Near-field communication. A wireless technology that transfers information between two compatible devices. Tap the devices together to share web addresses, contact info, apps, GPS locations and more.

    ####### notification

    An alert from your phone or an app on your phone. Your phone displays icons in the status bar to notify you of new messages, calendar events and alarms. Icons can also indicate ongoing status, such as connection to a Wi‑Fi network.

    Play Store Google's store where you can download apps, books, movies, and music. Choose from an assortment of free books or apps; purchase from an even larger selection.

    shortcut An icon you can add to your home screen that lets you quickly open an app. Create shortcuts for apps you use frequently.

    SIM card Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card. A card that securely stores information your carrier uses to authenticate your phone on the cellular network.

    software update An update to your phone's operating system that typically includes new features and fixes reported problems. The update is wirelessly downloaded to your phone at no additional cost to you.

    status bar Thin bar at the top of your home screen that displays the time and icons that tell you about your phone's battery and network connections. Apps display icons in the status bar to alert you of events, such as new messages.

    sync The process of sharing the same information across multiple devices and websites. Contacts, calendars and email are often synced through cloud services, so you can enter information on one device and access it through another.

    widget An element you can add to your home screen that gives you quick access to information or frequent tasks. For example, widgets can provide weather updates, upcoming calendar events. Many are preinstalled on your phone. Apps you download may also include widgets.

    Wi‑Fi A short-range wireless technology that provides a high-speed internet connection to wireless data devices. Many locations offer Wi-Fi connections, including airports, hotels, restaurants and more. Using a Wi-Fi connection instead of your cellular network can help reduce your cellular data usage. Some public Wi-Fi connections may not be secure. You should only connect to those you trust and use some form of internet security on your devices. Set up Wi-Fi.

    Certain features, services, and applications are network or carrier dependent and may not be available in all areas.

    Page 30

    Learn gestures You can use gestures on your screen to move between apps and choose or manipulate items. There are also gestures, which you can turn on/off, to perform everyday tasks like screenshots or turning on the flashlight.

    Tap, drag, swipe, zoom

    ####### Gesture Description

    Tap

    Press briefly with one finger and lift. Result: Open something (app or email) or choose something (checkbox, icon).

    Touch & hold

    Press and wait before lifting one finger. Result: Select something (app icon, text on a page) and see possible actions. Try it: Touch & hold text on this page to see the copy feature.

    Drag

    Touch & hold an item and then, without lifting, slide your finger until you reach the target position.

    Result: Move elements on the screen; for example, change a toggle from on to off

    ![image 91](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile91.png)

    . Try it: Drag an app shortcut from one spot on your home screen to another.

    ![image 92](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile92.png)

    Swipe

    Quickly move one finger across the screen, without pausing when you first touch (so you don’t drag instead).

    Result: Switch between home screens or between tabs in an app. Or, move quickly through a list. You can swipe different directions (up, down, left/right) for different results. Learn more.

    Try it: Open the Phone app and swipe left/right to switch between tabs. Or, swipe up from the bottom of this screen to go home.

    Page 31

    Pinch out to zoom Put two fingers on the screen and then drag them apart.

    Result: Zoom in to see larger version of photos and maps. Or, open expandable notifications.

    Try it: Open a photo and pinch out to zoom in on an area.

    Tip: If you have visual impairments, you can enable additional magnification gestures.

    Pinch in to zoom

    Put two fingers on the screen, far apart, and then drag them together. Result: Zoom out to see smaller version of photos or maps. Or, close expandable notifications.

    Use gestures with Power button

    Press Lock and unlock the phone. You'll enter your PIN, pattern or password to unlock. To turn off the phone, press the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously.

    Press twice Open the camera. If this doesn’t work, check that the setting is turned on.

    Press & hold Start a voice command.

    Move between apps and screens

    Choose how to get around

    If you see the navigation bar at the bottom of the screen, or you see no icons at all, you are using Gesture navigation.

    ![image 93](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile93.png)

    ![image 94](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile94.png)

    If you see at the bottom of the screen, you are using 3-button navigation. You can change how you move between apps and screens: Settings > Gestures > System navigation.

    ![image 95](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile95.png)

    Page 32

    ![image 96](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile96.png)

    ![image 97](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile97.png)

    Use gesture navigation

    Use these gestures to move between screens and apps if you chose Gesture navigation and you don't see the icons at the bottom of your screen.

    ![image 98](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile98.png)

    ![image 99](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile99.png)

    ![image 100](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile100.png)

    ####### Action Gesture to use

    Switch between apps At the very bottom of the screen, swipe left or right.

    See all recent apps Drag up from the bottom, hold, then let go.

    See all apps Swipe up from the bottom of the home screen.

    Go back Swipe towards the middle from the left or right edge of any screen.

    Go home Swipe up from the bottom of any screen.

    Open Google Assistant Swipe diagonally from either lower corner of the screen.

    Tip: For even more gestures, turn on One-handed mode.

    Use 3-button navigation

    Use these icons to move between screens and apps if you chose 3-button navigation. takes you back one screen.

    Page 33

    ![image 101](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile101.png)

    returns you to the home screen from any app. lets you switch between recent apps.

    ![image 102](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile102.png)

    ![image 103](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile103.png)

    Tip: For visual assistance, you can add to open the Accessibility Menu.

    ![image 104](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile104.png)

    Use quick settings

    Open quick settings Settings you adjust frequently, like Bluetooth, are “quick settings”, easy to get to from any screen. To see your first few quick settings, swipe down once from the top of your screen.

    ![image 105](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile105.png)

    Swipe down again to:

  • • See all quick settings. You can swipe left for more.
  • • Open the full list of settings available in the Settings app by tapping .
  • ![image 106](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile106.png)

    ![image 107](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile107.png)

  • • Turn your phone off .
  • ![image 108](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile108.png)

    Adjust quick settings To adjust screen brightness, slide . To adjust other settings:

    ![image 109](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile109.png)

    Page 34

  • • Tap an icon to toggle the setting on/off.
  • • Touch & hold an icon to adjust related settings.
  • ####### Icon Setting

    ![image 110](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile110.png)

    Wi-Fi

    ![image 111](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile111.png)

    Mobile data

    ![image 112](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile112.png)

    Bluetooth

    ![image 113](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile113.png)

    Do Not Disturb

    ![image 114](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile114.png)

    Auto-rotate

    ![image 115](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile115.png)

    Smart Connect

    ![image 116](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile116.png)

    Control compatible smart devices

    Page 35

    ![image 117](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile117.png)

    Wallet (To learn more, read Google's help.)

    ![image 118](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile118.png)

    Smart Connect

    ![image 119](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile119.png)

    Wi-Fi calling

    ![image 120](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile120.png)

    System update

    ![image 121](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile121.png)

    Dolby Atmos

    ![image 122](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile122.png)

    Flashlight

    ![image 123](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile123.png)

    Airplane mode

    ![image 124](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile124.png)

    Hotspot

    ![image 125](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile125.png)

    Page 36

    Quick Share

    ![image 126](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile126.png)

    GIF maker

    Alarm

    ![image 128](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile128.png)

    Battery saver

    ![image 129](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile129.png)

    Screen Cast

    ![image 130](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile130.png)

    Screen Record

    ![image 131](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile131.png)

    Camera access

    ![image 132](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile132.png)

    Mic access

    ![image 133](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile133.png)

    Data Saver (Appears after you turn on Data Saver the first time.)

    ![image 134](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile134.png)

    Page 37

    Night Light

    ![image 135](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile135.png)

    Bedtime mode (Appears after you turn on Bedtime mode the first time.)

    ![image 136](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile136.png)

    NFC

    ![image 137](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile137.png)

    Scan QR code

    ![image 138](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile138.png)

    Power sharing

    ![image 139](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile139.png)

    Family Space

    ![image 140](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile140.png)

    Security & privacy

    Color inversion (Appears after you turn on Color inversion the first time.)

    ![image 142](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile142.png)

    Extra dim (Appears after you turn on Extra dim the first time.)

    Open all settings

    Page 38

    To open the full list of all settings:

  • • Open quick settings and tap .
  • ![image 143](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile143.png)

  • • Or, open the Settings app.
  • ![image 144](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile144.png)

    Tip: Search the Settings app to find what you need quickly. Just tap at the top of the app and type your search term.

    ![image 145](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile145.png)

    Customize quick settings

    Add, remove, rearrange quick settings You can rearrange quick settings, putting your most used at the top. You can also add or remove them.

  • 1. Open quick settings.
  • 2. Tap .
  • ![image 146](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile146.png)

  • 3. Drag tiles to rearrange. Or swipe up to add new tiles. To return quick settings to its original state, tap > Reset.
  • ![image 147](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile147.png)

    ##### Pin/unpin media player in quick settings

    When you leave a media app that allows you to listen in the background while you use other apps on your phone, playback switches to the media player, which opens in quick settings and also appears on your lock screen for convenient control.

    Page 39

    To let you continue listening from where you left off, the media player is pinned to its spot in quick settings. When it’s pinned, you can’t swipe it to close it.

    To swipe the media player to close it and remove it from quick settings until you play something again, unpin it:

  • 1. Open quick settings, touch & hold the media player, and touch . Or, go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Media.
  • ![image 148](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile148.png)

  • 2. Turn Pin media player off . To pin the media player to its spot in quick settings:
  • ![image 149](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile149.png)

  • 1. Open quick settings, touch & hold the media player, and tap . Or, go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Media.
  • ![image 150](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile150.png)

  • 2. Turn Pin media player on . Apps that support background playback
  • ![image 151](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile151.png)

    While some apps like YouTube and require a premium paid subscription to play in the background and won’t open in the media player using the free version, many media apps such as Spotify, Pandora, and Amazon Music do support background playback in their free versions.

    To find more apps, open Play Store and search for “free background playback”.

    ![image 152](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile152.png)

    Turn screen off and on

    Why your screen turns off automatically

  • • To save battery power, your screen turns off if you haven't used it for some time. You can lengthen or shorten the time before your screen automatically turns off. You can also use Attentive Display to keep your screen from turning off when you're looking at it.
  • • When you bring the phone to your face to speak into it during calls, the screen turns off to prevent accidental touches. When you pull the phone away from your face, the screen turns on so you can use it. (If the screen stays dark, follow these steps.)
  • Page 40

  • • When you use Auto lock,, the screen instantly locks if your phone detects you've left a trusted place, disconnected from a trusted device, or disconnected from a trusted Wi-Fi network. Set it up so you don't have to remember to manually lock the screen when you've left more secure circumstances.
  • Turn screen off and on manually

    To turn the screen off:

    • Press the Power button. When you set down your phone, it's good habit to do this. You prevent

    accidental touches, save a bit of battery, and keep it secure with the screen lock.

  • • Tap your home screen twice. (If this doesn't work, turn the gesture on.)
  • • To keep your screen off and phone quiet when you don't want interruptions, like at night, use Do Not
  • Disturb settings.

    When your screen is off, battery-friendly Peek Display notifications fade in and out, showing only notifications delivered since the screen was last on.

    To turn the screen on:

  • • Press the Power button. If you've set up a screen lock, you need to unlock it.
  • • Tap the screen. (If this doesn't work, turn the gesture on.)
  • • If you've added your fingerprint to the phone, touch the sensor to wake and unlock your phone.
  • • Your screen automatically turns on when you have an incoming call.
  • Turn off phone Swipe down from the top of the screen twice, then tap and Power off. Or, use the buttons on the side of your phone. Press the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then tap Power off.

    ![image 153](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile153.png)

    Tip: To press & hold only the Power button (instead of Power and Volume up) change the Power button gesture.

    Take screenshots

    Page 41

    Take a screenshot

    You can take a screenshot a few ways. Use the one most convenient for you.

  • 1. When you’re on the screen you want to capture, choose one:
  • • Touch & hold three fingers on the screen. (If this doesn't work, turn Use Three finger screenshot on.)
  • ![image 154](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile154.png)

  • • Drag from the bottom of the screen and hold to see recent apps, then tap .
  • ![image 155](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile155.png)

  • • Press & hold Power + Volume Down simultaneously until the screen is captured.
  • 2. To scroll and capture more content, tap . To stop scrolling before the end of the page, tap STOP or .
  • ![image 156](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile156.png)

    ![image 157](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile157.png)

  • 3. Do any of the following:
  • • To edit the screenshot, tap .
  • ![image 158](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile158.png)

  • • To share it, tap .
  • ![image 159](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile159.png)

    Page 42

  • • To analyze it with Google Lens, tap .
  • ![image 160](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile160.png)

  • • To delete it, tap .
  • ![image 161](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile161.png)

  • • For more time to review it before taking an action, tap the thumbnail to open the screenshot.
  • Edit screenshots

    If you tapped after taking the screenshot, you have these options:

    ![image 162](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile162.png)

    ####### Icon Meaning

    ![image 163](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile163.png)

    Crop. To choose standard , full screen , circular , or freeform modes for cropping, tap again.

    ![image 164](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile164.png)

    ![image 165](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile165.png)

    ![image 166](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile166.png)

    ![image 167](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile167.png)

    ![image 168](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile168.png)

    Page 43

    ![image 169](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile169.png)

    Draw. To change color or thickness, tap again.

    ![image 170](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile170.png)

    ![image 171](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile171.png)

    Highlight. To change color or thickness, tap again.

    ![image 172](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile172.png)

    ![image 173](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile173.png)

    Insert a text box. Tap the icons to change the background and text color.

    ![image 174](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile174.png)

    Blur with mosaic effect. Swipe over the area to blur.

    ![image 175](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile175.png)

    Undo change.

    ![image 176](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile176.png)

    Redo change.

    ![image 177](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile177.png)

    Close without saving.

    ![image 178](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile178.png)

    Page 44

    Save.

    ![image 179](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile179.png)

    Delete.

    ![image 180](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile180.png)

    Share.

    Find screenshots later

    Open the Photos app and tap Collections > Screenshots.

    ![image 181](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile181.png)

    Record your screen

    You can record a video of your screen while you’re using it. You can choose to include your audio or a selfie video when recording.

    Record screen

  • 1. If you want the recording to show when you tap screen elements, turn Record touch points on.
  • 2. To start recording:
  • • Open quick settings and tap .
  • ![image 182](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile182.png)

  • • If you're playing a game and Gametime is on, tap > .
  • ![image 183](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile183.png)

    Page 45

    ![image 184](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile184.png)

  • 3. Tap Start to open the recorder and see a 3-second countdown before recording.
  • Tip: To adjust options before recording, tap the countdown timer to stop and make changes. Tap to restart.

    ![image 185](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile185.png)

  • 4. Make your recording. While recording:
  • • To adjust recording options, tap and then tap . To restart recording, tap .
  • ![image 186](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile186.png)

    ![image 187](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile187.png)

    ![image 188](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile188.png)

  • • You can drag the recorder to reposition it.
  • • You’ll see a timer on the recorder and in the status bar.
  • ![image 189](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile189.png)

  • 5. To stop recording:
  • • Tap on the recorder.
  • ![image 190](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile190.png)

  • • Or, swipe down from the top of the screen, then tap the red notification.
  • Page 46

    ![image 191](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile191.png)

    Adjust recording options

    Sound You can mute or record your phone's sound, and you can include your own narration. To adjust sound, tap the current setting and change it.

    ####### Icon Meaning

    ![image 192](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile192.png)

    Mute

    ![image 193](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile193.png)

    Record your narration using the microphone

    ![image 194](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile194.png)

    Record only your phone's sound

    ![image 195](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile195.png)

    Record both your narration and your phone's sound

    Drawing To write on the screen, tap . To change pen colors, tap .

    ![image 196](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile196.png)

    ![image 197](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile197.png)

    Video To include a selfie video in the corner, tap . To turn the selfie video off, tap .

    ![image 198](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile198.png)

    Page 47

    ![image 199](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile199.png)

    Other options You can adjust more options, like frames per second or screen touches, in phone Settings. Learn more.

    Find your recordings

    To view a recording immediately after you capture it, swipe down from the top of the screen and tap the notification.

    ![image 200](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile200.png)

    To view any time, open Photos, Files, or another media viewing app, and look for the Screen record folder.

    Create GIFs from video

    You can make an animated GIF from a video on your screen.

    Record a GIF

  • 1. Open the video in the Photos, Files, or other media viewing app, and pause the video where you want to start the GIF.
  • 2. Open quick settings and tap GIF maker.
  • ![image 201](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile201.png)

  • 3. Touch Start.
  • 4. Adjust the GIF's frame over the video:
  • • To reposition the frame, drag .
  • ![image 202](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile202.png)

  • • To change frame size, drag the corners or sides.
  • • To close, tap .
  • Page 48

    ![image 203](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile203.png)

  • 5. To start recording tap . You can capture up to 15 seconds. To stop recording before that, tap .
  • ![image 204](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile204.png)

    ![image 205](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile205.png)

    View your GIF To view immediately, touch the notification. To view any time, open the Photos, Files, or other media viewing app, and look for the Screenshots folder.

    ![image 206](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile206.png)

    Turn flashlight on and off

    To turn your flashlight on or off:

  • • Open quick settings and tap .
  • ![image 207](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile207.png)

  • • Or, make a chopping motion. If the camera opens instead of turning on the flashlight, be sure to use a chop gesture, not a twist gesture. To control the chop gesture:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Gestures.
  • ![image 208](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile208.png)

  • 2. Tap Fast flashlight and turn it on or off.
  • Scan QR codes

  • 1. Open quick settings and tap .
  • Page 49

    ![image 209](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile209.png)

  • 2. Frame the code. If it isn't automatically detected, move the camera closer or farther away.
  • 3. When the code is detected, use options to open a website, copy/paste, or share the information.
  • Record audio notes

    Record a note

  • 1. Open the Recorder app.
  • ![image 210](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile210.png)

  • 2. To start recording, tap .
  • ![image 211](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile211.png)

  • 3. If needed, tap to pause and to resume recording.
  • ![image 212](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile212.png)

    ![image 213](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile213.png)

  • 4. To stop recording, tap .
  • ![image 214](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile214.png)

  • 5. Add a title. If you don't add one, the recording title will be the timestamp (day and time).
  • 6. Tap Save.
  • 7. To move a saved recording to a folder:
  • Page 50

  • • Tap by the recording you want to move, then tap Add to folder and choose the folder.
  • ![image 215](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile215.png)

  • • To add a new folder, tap , give it a title and save it. Then, tap the folder.
  • ![image 216](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile216.png)

    Listen to recordings

    You can listen to and share audio recordings in Recorder or other apps. To limit access to your recordings, you can restrict listening and sharing to only the Recorder app.

  • 1. Open the Recorder app.
  • ![image 217](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile217.png)

  • 2. If you marked a recording as a favorite, tap > Favorites.
  • ![image 218](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile218.png)

  • 3. If you want to just play a recording, tap by it in the list. If needed, tap to pause.
  • ![image 219](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile219.png)

    ![image 220](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile220.png)

  • 4. If you want more control of playback, tap the recording to open it in the full player. Then use icons as needed:
  • ####### Icon Action

    ![image 221](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile221.png)

    Page 51

    Tap to increase/decrease playback speed.

    ![image 222](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile222.png)

    Drag to skip to a specific point in the recording.

    ![image 223](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile223.png)

    Tap to skip forward a few seconds.

    ![image 224](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile224.png)

    Tap to skip backward a few seconds.

    ![image 225](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile225.png)

    Tap to adjust looping.

    Trim a recording

  • 1. In the Recorder app, tap the recording.
  • ![image 226](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile226.png)

  • 2. Tap .
  • ![image 227](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile227.png)

  • 3. Drag the handles around the audio to save.
  • 4. Tap Trim to cut away the audio outside the handles.
  • 5. Tap Save, then choose Save as copy to retain the original audio file and the trimmed version, or tap Save to save only the trimmed audio file.
  • Page 52

    Manage recordings

    Add or remove favorites Find recordings easily by adding them to your favorites:

  • 1. Open the Recorder app.
  • ![image 228](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile228.png)

  • 2. Next to the recording, tap .
  • ![image 229](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile229.png)

  • 3. Tap to add it to favorites, or tap to remove it.
  • ![image 230](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile230.png)

    ![image 231](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile231.png)

    ##### Rename, delete, share, or view details

  • 1. Open the Recorder app.
  • ![image 232](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile232.png)

  • 2. Next to the recording, tap .
  • ![image 233](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile233.png)

    ##### 3. Select options to rename, delete, or share the recording, or view file details.Control whether other apps can play and share your recordings

  • 1. In the Recorder app, tap > .
  • Page 53

    ![image 234](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile234.png)

    ![image 235](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile235.png)

    ![image 236](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile236.png)

  • 2. Tap Storage, then set access to your recordings:
  • • To restrict playing and sharing to only the Recorder app, select Audio Recorder only.
  • • To permit playing and sharing of recordings with other apps, select Audio Recorder + other apps. Change recording settings
  • To adjust settings for future recordings you make:

  • 1. In the Recorder app, tap > .
  • ![image 237](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile237.png)

    ![image 238](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile238.png)

    ![image 239](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile239.png)

  • 2. Adjust settings as described below.
  • ##### Adjust sound quality/file size Tap Quality and select an option:

  • • High (better sound)
  • • Low (smaller file size)
  • ##### Change file format

    Page 54

  • 1. Tap Recording format.
  • 2. Select the file type for new recordings (m4a, wav, aac). Allow/prevent notification sounds while recording
  • 1. Tap Notification sounds.
  • 2. Choose to allow or silence notifications.
  • ##### Allow/prevent screen from turning off while recording Turn Keep screen on while recording on or off .

    ![image 240](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile240.png)

    ![image 241](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile241.png)

    Control phone with your voice

    Speak a command Not all languages support voice commands. You can tell Google Assistant to call people, get directions, send messages, set alarms. Or, ask questions.

  • 1. Get your assistant's attention by doing any of these:
  • • Press & hold the Power button. If this doesn't work, turn the gesture on.
  • • For hands-free control, say “Hey Google” or “OK Google”, if you've taught it to recognize your voice.
  • • Swipe up from the bottom left or right corner of your phone. Learn more.
  • • Tap .
  • ![image 242](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile242.png)

  • 2. Ask a question or say a command. For example, you can say “What's the weather today?” or “Set alarm for 7 AM tomorrow.”
  • Tip: To see a list of commands, say “Help”.

  • 3. To silence Google Assistant when it's talking to you, tap . Google Assistant will stop listening after a few seconds.
  • Page 55

    ![image 243](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile243.png)

    To learn about changing settings for Google Assistant, read Google's help.

    Teach Google Assistant to recognize your voice

  • 1. Open the Google app, then tap your profile icon > Settings > Google Assistant > Hey Google & Voice Match.
  • ![image 244](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile244.png)

    ![image 245](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile245.png)

  • 2. Turn on Hey Google and follow the onscreen instructions to record your voice.
  • Fix an issue

    If your phone isn't recognizing “Hey, Google” commands:

  • 1. Is Battery saver on? If it's on, you need to get your assistant's attention by touch instead of voice, or turn off Battery saver. If it's off, then follow the remaining steps.
  • 2. Open the Google app.
  • 3. Tap your profile icon > Settings > Google Assistant.
  • ![image 246](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile246.png)

  • 4. Tap Hey Google & Voice Match.
  • 5. Tap the option to retrain your voice model.
  • Get directions to a location

    Navigation and battery life

    Page 56

    Navigation is one of the most power-intensive apps, so when possible keep your phone plugged into a highquality charger, especially if you're streaming music and/or using Bluetooth (also power-intensive features).

    Get turn-by-turn directions with voice readout

    Follow directions on a map in real-time, with or without voice readout. Get traffic updates and rerouted around issues on the way to your destination.

  • 1. Call the assistant:
  • • Press & hold the Power button. If this doesn't work, turn the gesture on.
  • • If you set up voice recognition, say “Hey Google.”
  • 2. Say “Navigate to [destination].” You can say the name of a place or give an address. To learn about setting a time of arrival, seeing street view, and other features, read Google's help.
  • Add Directions shortcut to home screen

    Use the Directions widget to create a home screen shortcut to your destination before you leave. When you're ready to travel, tap the shortcut, and your phone will navigate to the destination.

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen and tap Widgets.
  • 2. Scroll to Maps and tap .
  • ![image 247](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile247.png)

    ![image 248](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile248.png)

  • 3. Touch and hold the Directions shortcut, then drag it to your home screen.
  • 4. Enter the destination and shortcut name, then select any other options and tap Save.
  • Tip: Organize your Directions shortcuts into a folder on your home screen.

    Get directions to home or work

    Page 57

    Get directions from anywhere to your home or work addresses with one touch by setting up a task shortcut for the Maps app:

  • 1. Touch & hold .
  • ![image 249](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile249.png)

  • 2. Drag to a blank space on your home screen.
  • ![image 250](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile250.png)

  • 3. If you haven't set your home or work address yet in Maps, touch the shortcut and follow the onscreen instructions to add it.
  • When you're ready to roll, just touch the shortcut, and your phone will talk you through the directions.

    Use clock and weather widget

    Add Moto Widget to home screen

    Put a clock on your home screen and get quick access to alarms, your calendar, and the weather.

    ![image 251](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile251.png)

  • 1. Touch & hold the home screen.
  • 2. Tap Widgets.
  • 3. Tap Moto Widget to view different styles of the widget to add:
  • • For a simple widget with few icons and a digital clock (not analog), choose Clean.
  • • For a basic analog clock with weather and your calendar, choose Classic. The outer ring shows remaining battery.
  • • For a transparent widget that doesn’t obstruct your wallpaper, with a choice of digital or analog clocks, and individual panels so you can swipe between weather, time, and settings, choose Beyond.
  • ![image 252](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile252.png)

  • • For a highly customizable widget that can show or hide date, time, weather, battery, alarms, fitness tracking, and more depending on how you size the widget, choose Adapt.
  • Page 58

  • • To see daily and hourly forecasts (no clock, calendar), choose Weather.
  • 4. Touch & hold the style you want, then drag it to your home screen and release.
  • 5. Follow onscreen instructions to set up the widget.
  • Customize and use the widget

    ##### Resize it

    Touch and hold the widget to show its frame, then drag a side. Some widgets show more information when you expand their size.

    Move it Touch & hold the widget, then drag it around your screen or to a new panel. Release to place it.

    ##### Change clock style

  • 1. Touch & hold the widget, then tap .
  • ![image 253](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile253.png)

  • 2. Choose Digital or Analog.
  • Quickly access alarms, calendar, and weather For alarms, tap the time to open the Alarm tab in the Clock app. Tap other tabs to use the timer or stopwatch. Learn more about alarms. To open the Calendar, tap the current date. You can view or add events. For weather information, tap Add cities or your current weather conditions in order to:

  • • Turn on location to track the weather wherever you are.
  • • Add cities, locations, and regions to track their weather.
  • • View weather forecasts and other information.
  • • Adjust other weather settings, including notifications. In your weather app, look for onscreen instructions, or tap or for settings and help.
  • ![image 254](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile254.png)

    Page 59

    ![image 255](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile255.png)

    Add other clock and weather widgets

    Other apps offer their own widgets you can add to your home screen, in addition to the Moto Widget.

  • 1. Touch & hold the home screen.
  • 2. Tap Widgets, then:
  • • Tap Clock for a stopwatch or other types of time widgets.
  • • Tap your weather app for other types of weather widgets.
  • 3. Touch & hold the widget you want to add, then drag it to your home screen and release.
  • 4. Follow screen instructions to customize the widget For other widgets, search for “clock widget” or “weather widget” in and install one.
  • ![image 256](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile256.png)

    Set up family safe space

    Create a space on your phone where family can play safely, without disrupting your settings and privacy.

    Set up a space

  • 1. Open the Family Space app.
  • ![image 257](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile257.png)

  • 2. Touch .
  • ![image 258](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile258.png)

  • 3. Follow onscreen instructions to:
  • Page 60

  • • Name the space
  • • Select permitted apps
  • • Personalize the layout, wallpaper, and theme
  • • Set a timer to limit screen time
  • • Require a password to exit the space (or access the rest of the phone)
  • Enter or exit a space

    To enter:

  • 1. Open quick settings and touch .
  • ![image 259](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile259.png)

  • 2. If you've set up more than one space, touch the name of the space to open.
  • 3. Select the amount of screen time to allow, then touch Start.
  • 4. If this is your first time using Family Space, set the app permissions.
  • 5. Give the phone to your family member using the phone’s space. If you set a password for exiting the space, they can’t get to other parts of your phone unless they know the password.
  • To exit:

  • 1. Touch . Or, open quick settings and touch .
  • ![image 260](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile260.png)

    ![image 261](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile261.png)

  • 2. Unlock the phone.
  • Page 61

    Set app permissions

    The first time you set up a space, you need to enable permissions for the Family Space app before you can enter spaces:

    ![image 262](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile262.png)

  • 1. Open quick settings and touch . You'll see a permissions screen.
  • ![image 263](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile263.png)

  • 2. Touch Device Administrator > Activate this device admin app.
  • 3. Touch Do Not Disturb > Family Space, turn Allow Do Not Disturb on , then touch Allow.
  • ![image 264](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile264.png)

    ######## 4. Touch twice to return to the permissions screen.

    ![image 265](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile265.png)

    ####### 5. Touch Notifications > Allow.

    Manage how you spend time on your phone

    Set up Digital Wellbeing

    You can get info about how you spend time on your phone, like how often you unlock it and how long you use each app. Then use that info to improve your digital habits.

    The first time you use this feature:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls.
  • 2. If you want to find this feature as an app, rather than opening Settings, turn on Show icon in the app list.
  • Page 62

    Understand your habits

  • 1. Go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls.
  • 2. Review the chart to see:
  • • Time you spent using phone today
  • • Which apps you’ve had on screen and for how long
  • • How often you unlocked the phone today
  • • How many notifications you’ve gotten
  • 3. For more information, touch a label on the chart. For example, to see your screen time for the week, touch today’s usage time.
  • Limit daily screen time

    For individual apps, you can set a timer that limits the amount you use the app daily.

    Tip: To manage your child's screen time, use parental controls.

    To set an app timer:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls. Or, Settings > Apps > Screen time.
  • 2. Next to the app you want to limit, touch and tap the chart.
  • ![image 266](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile266.png)

  • 3. Set the total time that you can use the app per day. When you reach your time limit in an app:
  • • The app closes.
  • • Its icon dims and no longer opens the app.
  • Page 63

    The app timer resets at midnight. To use the app before midnight, go back to the timer in Settings and extend its time or delete the timer.

    Pause distracting apps to focus

    Use Focus mode to pause selected apps for fewer distractions.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls > Focus mode.
  • 2. Mark apps you want to pause.
  • ![image 267](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile267.png)

  • 3. Do one of the following:
  • • To turn it on, touch Turn on now.
  • • To have it turn on automatically, touch Set a schedule, then select days of the week and start/end times. When Focus mode is on:
  • • You'll see in the status bar.
  • ![image 268](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile268.png)

  • • You won’t be able to use the selected apps and won’t get notifications from them.
  • Tip: To add Focus mode to quick settings, open quick settings, touch , then drag the tile where you want it.

    ![image 269](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile269.png)

    ![image 270](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile270.png)

    To turn Focus mode off:

  • • Open quick settings and touch .
  • ![image 271](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile271.png)

    Page 64

  • • Or, on the notification, touch Turn off now. (To turn it off for a short period, touch Take a break.) To remove the schedule:
  • 1. Do one of the following:
  • • Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • ![image 272](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile272.png)

  • • Go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls > Focus mode.
  • 2. Next to Schedule, touch .
  • ![image 273](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile273.png)

    Tip: To mute sounds, stop vibration, and block notifications for all calls and notifications, use Do Not Disturb.

    Make it easier to put your phone away at bedtime

    You can schedule changes to get ready for sleep.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls > Bedtime mode.
  • 2. Select when to turn on Bedtime mode.
  • 3. Adjust start and end times if needed.
  • 4. Touch Customize to set what your phone should do during this scheduled time:
  • • Silence your phone (turn on Do Not Disturb).
  • • Use grayscale or dimmed color and light (touch Screen options at bedtime).
  • Page 65

    Use parental controls

    You can:

  • • Control your child’s access to devices and apps
  • • Control location settings and view the location of your child’s supervised device
  • • Set daily usage limits, monitor app usage, and remotely lock supervised devices
  • • Set filters and controls on what your child can browse, purchase, or download using Chrome, Google Search, Play Store, and YouTube
  • You’ll need to set up parental controls on your and your child's devices. To set up parental controls on this phone:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls.
  • 2. Touch Set up parental controls.
  • 3. Follow onscreen instructions to set up the phone for child or adult usage.
  • 4. To set up parental controls on the other device, refer to the help for that device. To learn more, read Google's help.
  • Use onscreen keyboard

    Open, close, rotate keyboard To open the keyboard, just touch an area where you can enter text or numbers. To close the keyboard so you can see other parts of the screen, tap . For a larger keyboard, turn your phone horizontally. (If your screen doesn’t rotate, check your auto-rotate setting.) You can also resize the keyboard to give yourself extra space for more accurate typing.

    ![image 274](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile274.png)

    Tip: If you installed multiple keyboards, you'll see next to the navigation buttons when you're typing. To switch to a different keyboard, touch .

    ![image 275](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile275.png)

    ![image 276](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile276.png)

    Type special characters

    Touch & hold a key to see related special characters. For example:

    Page 66

  • • Touch & hold . to see other punctuation marks.
  • • Touch & hold e to see ê, é, è, and ë.
  • Tip: To insert a period followed by a space, tap the spacebar twice quickly.

    Capitalize letters To type in ALL CAPS, touch twice, quickly, so you see . Touch it once more to turn ALL CAPS off. To change capitalization of a word you've already typed:

    ![image 277](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile277.png)

    ![image 278](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile278.png)

  • 1. Select the word.
  • 2. Touch until you see the capitalization you want: first letter only, ALL CAPS, or lowercase.
  • ![image 279](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile279.png)

    Use glide typing

    You have two options for entering text: type one letter at a time (multi-touch typing) or slide your finger through all the letters in a word using one continuous motion (glide typing). Start typing either way and switch whenever you like.

    When you're using glide typing, you can:

  • • Type a word. Drag your finger over the letters in the word.
  • • Enter apostrophes in common words. Drag through the letters and the apostrophe is automatically inserted.
  • • Add a space. There's no need to use the space bar. Just lift your finger and start the next word. You can disable glide typing.
  • Get suggestions Use suggestions to type faster. When you're typing, you'll see a list of suggested next words above the keys:

  • • Touch a word in the list to insert it in your text.
  • • If you don’t like a suggested word, touch & hold it, then drag it to . You can limit or turn suggestions off.
  • Page 67

    ![image 280](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile280.png)

    Spell check and auto correct Misspelled words are automatically corrected as you type. To prevent that word from being auto-corrected again, add it to your dictionary by touching the word in the list of suggestions above the keys. If auto-correction is turned off, you can still check spelling:

  • 1. After you're done typing, review your text; misspelled words (and words not in your dictionary) are underlined.
  • 2. Touch an underlined word:
  • • If the word is spelled correctly, touch it in the suggestion bar.
  • • If the word is misspelled, select the correct word in the suggestion bar or type the correction.
  • Type in multiple languages

    If you have added multiple languages as a system language in your phone settings, keyboards and text suggestion are available for those languages:

  • • When using a keyboard language other than your primary system language, available keyboard languages are shown on the spacebar.
  • • To toggle between languages, touch .
  • ![image 281](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile281.png)

  • • To see a list of available keyboards, touch & hold or the spacebar. You can add keyboards for other languages.
  • ![image 282](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile282.png)

    Cut, copy, paste text

    You can select and copy text from web pages and messages.

  • 1. To select text, touch & hold a word.
  • 2. Touch Copy, Cut, Share, Select all or:
  • Page 68

  • • Select more text. Drag the sliders .
  • ![image 283](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile283.png)

  • • Get information about selected text. Touch Web Search.
  • • Translate selected text. Touch Translate. (If you don't see this option, install the Google Translate app.)
  • 3. To paste text, touch to insert at the cursor or select a block of text to replace. Then touch Paste.
  • ####### Tips:

  • • In some apps, you need to double-tap a word to select it (instead of touching & holding it).
  • • When you use Copy, the text is copied to the clipboard in your phone's memory, overwriting previous text in the clipboard. If you want to save and manage everything you copy into the clipboard, search for “clipboard manager” in Play Store to select and download an app.
  • Use voice typing

  • 1. Touch a text field to show the onscreen keyboard.
  • 2. Touch on the onscreen keyboard.
  • ![image 284](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile284.png)

  • 3. Say what you want to type:
  • • Speak naturally but clearly. There's no need to shout or hold the phone close to your mouth.
  • • To include punctuation, say “comma,” “period,” “question mark,” or “exclamation point.”
  • • To pause or restart, touch .
  • ![image 285](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile285.png)

  • • To delete a word, touch .
  • Page 69

    ![image 286](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile286.png)

    You can also use your phone hands free by speaking voice commands.

    Fill in forms automatically

    Don’t retype your personal information again and again. Save it securely, then with just one touch, fill in passwords, addresses, credit cards, and other information saved to your Google account.

    To set it up:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > More privacy settings > Autofill service from Google.
  • 2. Tap categories to review and edit personal information, addresses, credit cards, and passwords.
  • Personalize with your style

    Find Personalize settings

    Quickly get to personalization settings - wallpapers, themes, fonts, and more:

  • • Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen, then tap Personalize.
  • ![image 287](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile287.png)

  • • Go to Settings > Personalize.
  • • Open the Moto app, then tap > Personalize.
  • ![image 288](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile288.png)

    ![image 289](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile289.png)

    Page 70

    Change how your phone looks

    A theme is a unique combination of colors, icon shape, font, and wallpaper. Apply themes to easily change the entire appearance of your phone. You can choose from existing themes or create your own.

    You can change individual settings for your phone's appearance, which layer on top of your selected theme. Use a theme

  • 1. Go to Settings > Personalize > Themes.
  • 2. To use an existing theme, browse and select the one you want.
  • 3. To create your own theme:
  • a. Tap .
  • ![image 290](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile290.png)

  • b. Name your theme.
  • c. Select the Wallpaper, Font, Color, Icon shape.
  • d. Tap Save.
  • e. To use it, select it from the existing themes.
  • ##### Make individual changes

    If you like the way your wallpaper, font, color, and icon shape look together, create a new theme for the combination instead of changing the individual settings. That way, you can easily go back to the combination later.

    You can change these Personalize settings:

  • • Wallpaper: Choose an image to see on your home screen or lock screen.
  • • Font: Select a character style to see throughout your phone.
  • • Color: Choose complementary colors, based on your wallpaper, for icons and backgrounds.
  • • Icon shape: Choose a different shape.
  • • Display size and text: Make just text bigger or smaller, or make everything bigger or smaller. You can also bold all text. Or use high contrast text. Learn more.
  • • Layout: Choose how many rows and columns of app icons you want to see on your home screen. To simplify your screen, choose fewer.
  • Page 71

  • • Dark mode: Temporarily switch your screen to a dark background to give your eyes and battery a break. This is called Dark theme in quick settings. Learn more.
  • ![image 291](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile291.png)

  • • Fingerprint animation: Change how fingerprint icon animates in response to your touching the sensor. Learn more.
  • Change how your phone sounds

    Quickly change the default sounds for calls, notifications, and alarms.

    Change when your phone lights

    Set lights to flash (or not flash) when you receive incoming calls and notifications, and when alarms sound. Learn more.

    Change wallpaper

    You can change the background image on your home screen or lock screen.

    Set the wallpaper

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank area on your home screen, then tap Wallpapers.
  • ![image 292](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile292.png)

  • 2. Do one of the following:
  • • To set a single wallpaper, select a photo or wallpaper.
  • • To use an animated background, select a dynamic wallpaper. Many dynamic wallpapers include settings. Look for or to set options.
  • ![image 293](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile293.png)

    ![image 294](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile294.png)

    Page 72

  • • If you select a wallpaper from a category (such as landscapes), you can see a different image every day. Open the category and touch icon.
  • ![image 295](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile295.png)

  • 3. Tap or Set.
  • ![image 296](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile296.png)

  • 4. Select whether you want to use the wallpaper on your home screen, lock screen, or both.
  • If your photo is too large Open the photo and take a screenshot of it. Then edit the screenshot as needed and set it as the wallpaper.

    If you selected a dynamic or interactive wallpaper If your battery is low, temporarily change wallpaper to a static image to save power.

    Create a stylized wallpaper

    Stylize your photos with AI visual effects and use them as wallpaper.

  • 1. Touch & hold hold a blank area on your home screen, then tap Wallpapers > Stylize.
  • ![image 297](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile297.png)

  • 2. Select an image.
  • 3. Select a style to apply to the image.
  • 4. Tap Set, then follow onscreen instructions to apply it.
  • Customize your Favorites tray

    The Favorites tray at the bottom of your home screen gives you quick access to your most-used apps. You can customize the shortcuts in this tray.

    Page 73

    ![image 298](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile298.png)

    Change app shortcuts manually

  • 1. Touch & hold one of the app shortcuts, then drag it up and drop it on Remove.
  • 2. Swipe up from the bottom of the home screen to open your app list.
  • 3. Touch & hold the app you want. When the new shortcut appears, drag it to the empty spot in your tray.
  • Tip: You can also use folders in your Favorites tray.

    Change app shortcuts automatically, based on usage

    To have your phone automatically update these shortcuts with apps you use most often:

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen.
  • 2. Tap Home settings > Home screen style.
  • ![image 299](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile299.png)

  • 3. Next to App tray, tap .
  • ![image 300](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile300.png)

  • 4. Turn Suggestions on Home screen on .
  • ![image 301](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile301.png)

    Fix an issue

    If the apps in your Favorites tray are being replaced by apps you haven't selected and you don't want them to change, try these troubleshooting steps.

    Use widgets, shortcuts, or folders

    Page 74

    Add widgets

    Widgets stream information, giving some of an app’s functionality without opening the app. For example, the Calendar widget shows your daily agenda and gives you one-touch access to your full calendar.

    ##### Add widget

  • 1. Touch & hold the home screen.
  • 2. Tap Widgets. Widgets are listed under their related apps.
  • ![image 302](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile302.png)

  • 3. Touch & hold a widget to add it.
  • Adjust widget's size You can make some widgets larger to view more content:

  • 1. Touch & hold the widget until it's highlighted.
  • 2. Release it to see an outline.
  • 3. Drag a corner or side to resize.
  • Add shortcuts

    On your home screen, you can add shortcuts to apps, so you don't have to open the tray and sort through all of your apps, shortcuts to common tasks, and shortcuts to open specific web pages.

    ##### Add app shortcuts

  • 1. Swipe up from the bottom of the home screen to open your app tray.
  • 2. Touch & hold the app you want.
  • 3. Drag the app to an empty spot on your home screen. Or, drag it to the edge of the screen and drop it onto a new home screen.
  • Add task shortcuts Many apps include shortcuts to common tasks, so you don’t have to open and navigate the app.

    Page 75

  • 1. Touch & hold an app icon to see available task shortcuts.
  • 2. Do one of the following:
  • • To perform the task, tap it.
  • • To create a shortcut for that task, drag to an empty space on your homescreen. Here are examples of task shortcuts for various apps. Not all apps include task shortcuts.
  • ![image 303](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile303.png)

    ####### App Task shortcuts

    Gmail • Compose new email

    ![image 304](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile304.png)

    • Open to specific account

    Maps • Navigate to Work

    ![image 305](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile305.png)

    • Navigate to Home

    YouTube • Search

    ![image 306](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile306.png)

  • • Subscriptions
  • • Explore
  • Chrome • New incognito tab

    Page 76

    ![image 307](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile307.png)

    • New tab

    Calendar • New reminder

    ![image 308](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile308.png)

  • • New event
  • • New task
  • Messages • Open most recent conversation

    ![image 309](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile309.png)

    • New conversation

    Clock • Start screen saver

    ![image 310](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile310.png)

  • • Start stopwatch
  • • Create new timer
  • • Create new alarm
  • Settings • Bluetooth

    ![image 311](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile311.png)

  • • Battery
  • • Data usage
  • Page 77

  • • Wi-Fi
  • ##### Add web page shortcuts

  • 1. Open the Chrome app.
  • 2. Navigate to the web page.
  • 3. Tap > Add to Home screen.
  • ![image 312](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile312.png)

  • 4. Edit the name if desired.
  • 5. Tap Add.
  • 6. Do one of the following:
  • • Touch & hold the icon to drag it where you want on the home screen.
  • • Tap Add to Home screen.
  • Add folders Folders organize your shortcuts. You can create folders on your home screen or in your app tray. Home screen folders To create a folder on your home screen:

  • 1. Touch & hold an app shortcut on your home screen.
  • 2. Drag it onto another to group them together, then release when you see a frame around them.
  • ![image 313](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile313.png)

  • 3. To name the folder, tap to open it, then tap Edit Name and type a new name. To add apps to the folder:
  • 1. Touch & hold the app's icon.
  • 2. Drag it onto the folder. To remove apps from the folder:
  • Page 78

  • 1. Open the home screen folder.
  • 2. Drag the app's icon onto the home screen, or drag it up and drop it on Remove. App tray folders To create a folder in your app tray:
  • 1. Open the app tray.
  • 2. Tap > Create folder.
  • ![image 314](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile314.png)

  • 3. Type the folder's name.
  • 4. Tap app icons to select what to put in the folder.
  • 5. Tap Done. To change apps in the folder:
  • 1. Touch & hold the folder.
  • 2. Tap Edit.
  • 3. Tap app icons to add or remove them. To add one app to the folder:
  • 1. Touch & hold the app's icon.
  • 2. Tap .
  • ![image 315](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile315.png)

  • 3. Select the folder. To remove one app from the folder:
  • 1. Open the folder.
  • 2. Touch & hold the app's icon.
  • 3. Tap .
  • Page 79

    ![image 316](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile316.png)

    Remove widgets, shortcuts, or folders

    To remove items from your home screen:

  • 1. Touch & hold it until it vibrates.
  • 2. Drag it to Remove. For app tray folders, tap Delete.
  • ![image 317](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile317.png)

    App icons on the home screen are shortcuts to installed apps found in the app tray. Removing an app shortcut from the home screen doesn't uninstall the app. Learn how to uninstall apps.

    To select a totally new user interface for your home screen, download a different launcher.

    Arrange apps and control icon's look

    Choose where to find apps: app tray or home screen

    The app tray holds all of your installed apps. Swipe up from the bottom of the home screen to open the tray. This simplifies your home screen, showing only apps you choose to add as shortcuts.

    To see all apps on your home screen instead, you can remove the app tray. You can switch at any time.

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen.
  • 2. Tap Home settings > Home screen style and then:
  • ![image 318](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile318.png)

  • • To see all apps on your home screen, tap Open.
  • • To see all apps in the app tray, tap App tray.
  • 3. Tap to see more customizations, described below.
  • Page 80

    ![image 319](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile319.png)

    If you’re using the app tray You can make these customizations in Home settings:

    ![image 320](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile320.png)

  • • Turn on/off suggested apps at the top of the list and bottom of the home screen.
  • • If you don’t want the app’s icon added to your home screen when you install a new app, turn Add app icons to Home screen off . The icon is only added to the app tray.
  • ![image 321](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile321.png)

    ##### If you're using Open to put all apps on the home screen You can customize how app icons are arranged:

    ![image 322](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile322.png)

  • • To be able to position icons anywhere on the home screen, tap Free arrangements.
  • • To have icons move automatically to fill empty spaces, tap Auto fill. Adjust icon size and names
  • You can make the app icons on your home screen and in the app tray larger or smaller. You can also remove or expand the names below the icon.

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen.
  • 2. Tap Home settings.
  • ![image 323](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile323.png)

  • 3. Adjust settings:
  • • To make the icons smaller or larger, tap Icon size and move the slider to choose a size.
  • • To remove the names below the icons, tap App label > Don't show.
  • Page 81

  • • To restore the names below the icons, tap App label > 2 rows (full names) or 1 row (short names).
  • Show or hide notification dots

    You can control whether app icons show dots to alert you about unread notifications.

    ![image 324](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile324.png)

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen.
  • 2. Tap Home settings.
  • ![image 325](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile325.png)

  • 3. Tap Notification dot on app icon.
  • 4. Turn Notification dot on app icon on or off .
  • ![image 326](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile326.png)

    ![image 327](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile327.png)

    Home screen rotation lock

    When when you enable Auto-rotate, app screens will rotate with your phone's orientation. You can keep your home screen from rotating while other apps auto-rotate.

    ![image 328](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile328.png)

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen.
  • 2. Tap Home settings.
  • ![image 329](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile329.png)

  • 3. Turn Allow Home screen rotation on or off .
  • Page 82

    ![image 330](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile330.png)

    ![image 331](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile331.png)

    Remove Google feed

    When you swipe to the farthest-left home screen, you’ll see the Google news feed. To remove it:

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen.
  • 2. Tap Home settings.
  • ![image 332](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile332.png)

  • 3. Tap Swipe Access > Nothing. To add the feed back again, change Swipe Access to Google feed.
  • Remake your home screen with launchers

    About launchers

    A launcher app is what makes your home screen look the way it does and controls how you organize and interact with your apps. The launcher that came with your phone puts the Google search widget and a clock widget on the home screen. See what that home screen looks like and how you can customize it.

    To totally change the look and feel of your home screen, you’ll need to download a new launcher and update your settings to use it. Launchers often come with new wallpapers, gestures to interact with your phone, and customizable elements for your home screen.

    You can always go back to the original launcher and home screen.

    Get different launcher

  • 1. Search for “launcher” in Play Store.
  • 2. Read through the choices and download the one (or more) that you want.
  • 3. To start using it, open the app or follow the onscreen instructions after downloading it.
  • Page 83

    Switch between launchers

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps.
  • 2. Tap Default apps > Home app.
  • 3. Select the launcher you want to use. To switch back to the standard home screen, select Moto App Launcher.
  • 4. If the launcher has adjustable settings, tap to change them.
  • ![image 333](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile333.png)

    Delete launchers You can only delete launchers that you installed. Touch & hold the launcher's app icon, then tap > Uninstall.

    ![image 334](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile334.png)

    #### Personalize your phone : Lock screen 75

    Use a screen saver

    Set up screen saver

    While your phone is idle on a dock or charger, turn it into a desk clock, a photo frame to show off your pics, or more.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display.
  • 2. Tap Screen saver.
  • 3. Do any of the following:
  • • To change screen savers, select one. To set options for that screen saver, tap Customize.
  • • To preview your selection, tap Preview. Tap the screen anywhere (unlock if necessary) to return to settings.
  • • To adjust when the screen saver starts (while docked, charging, or either), tap When to start.
  • Start screen saver

    Page 84

    The screen saver automatically starts when you connect your phone to a dock or charger and the screen turns off.

    To exit the screen saver and return to your home or lock screen:

  • • Press the Power button.
  • • Or, if you're using fingerprint security, touch the sensor. To manually start your screen saver any time, go to Settings > Display > Screen saver and turn Use screen saver on .
  • ![image 335](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile335.png)

    Turn off screen saver

    To prevent the screen saver from starting automatically:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display.
  • 2. Tap Screen saver.
  • 3. Turn Use screen saver off .
  • ![image 336](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile336.png)

    Add screen savers Search for “Screen saver” in Play Store for apps that give you more. After you install an app, you can select the new ones in Settings > Display > Screen saver.

    Open, close, switch apps

    Open and close apps

    To open an app, tap its icon on the home screen, or swipe up from the bottom of your home screen to open the app tray, then tap the app.

    ####### To leave an app and go to your home screen, just swipe up from the bottom of the screen.

    You don't need to close apps. Android manages the memory and battery that apps use, so you don't need to worry about leaving apps open.

    Page 85

    To close one app, drag up from the bottom of the screen, hold, then let go. In your recent apps, swipe up on the app.

    To close all apps, drag up from the bottom of the screen, hold, then let go. In your recent apps, swipe right until you see the start of the list, then tap Clear all. (You can prevent certain apps from being cleared.)

    Open app in freeform window

    Swipe in from the edge of the phone for a menu of your favorite apps. (If you don't see the sidebar, turn it on.)

    ![image 337](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile337.png)

    To open an app, swipe in from the edge of your phone where you see a translucent bar to open a menu of apps, then tap one to open it in a floating, freeform window.

    To move the freeform app, touch & hold at the top, then drag. To resize the freeform app, drag a bottom corner diagonally:

    ![image 338](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile338.png)

  • • Drag all the way down to open to full screen.
  • • Drag all the way up for a floating, movable icon you can tap to reopen the app. To close the app, tap in the upper corner. To customize the sidebar, tap . You can add or remove apps and reorder them.
  • ![image 339](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile339.png)

    ![image 340](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile340.png)

    Switch between open apps To switch between recently used apps, swipe left or right at the bottom of the screen. To see your list of recent apps, drag up from the bottom of the screen, hold, then let go:

  • • To see more apps, swipe left or right.
  • • To switch to an app, tap it in the list.
  • • To choose between opening the app in freeform or full screen, touch & hold its icon.
  • Tip: Use two apps at once with split screen.

    Page 86

    Clear recent apps

    You can clear all apps from your list of recent apps. Or, you can prevent an app from being cleared from your recent apps when you tap Clear all to close all apps.

    To remove all apps from the list:

  • 1. Drag up from the bottom of the screen, hold, then let go to see your list of recent apps.
  • 2. Tap Clear all. To lock an app in the list:
  • 1. Drag up from the bottom of the screen, hold, then let go.
  • 2. On the app you want to keep in the list, tap . To unlock the app so it's removed when you tap Clear all:
  • ![image 341](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile341.png)

  • 1. Drag up from the bottom of the screen, hold, then let go.
  • 2. On the app, tap .
  • ![image 342](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile342.png)

    See two apps at the same time

    Depending on the app, you can sometimes use more than one app at once. You can also watch a video in a small window while you do other things.

    Use two apps at once (freeform)

    You can open a second app in a small, freeform window, using the sidebar at the edge of your screen.

    Use two apps at once (split screen)

    ##### Split the screen

    Page 87

  • 1. Open the first app.
  • 2. Drag up from the bottom of the home screen, hold, then release.
  • 3. In the list of recent apps, tap the app's icon at the top of the preview to see and . Be sure to tap the app's icon instead of the screen preview, which opens the app.
  • ![image 343](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile343.png)

    ![image 344](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile344.png)

  • 4. Tap Split top.
  • ![image 345](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile345.png)

  • 5. Select the second app to use. Use gesture to split the screen
  • ![image 346](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile346.png)

    ![image 347](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile347.png)

    ![image 348](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile348.png)

    If you're using 3-button navigation , you can use a gesture to split the screen.

    To set it up:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Gestures.
  • ![image 349](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile349.png)

  • 2. Tap Swipe to split and turn it on . To use it:
  • ![image 350](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile350.png)

    Page 88

  • 1. In the first app you want to view in split screen, swipe once back and forth across the screen.
  • 2. Select the second app to use.
  • Exit split screen view Drag the divider line all the way up or down.

    See one app while using another (Picture-in-picture)

    With some apps, you can watch video in a small, movable frame while you do other things. Use it when navigating with Google Maps, too.

  • 1. When you’re playing a video or navigating with Maps, go to the home screen or app you want to use. The video (or navigation) shrinks.
  • 2. You can drag the video (or navigation) anywhere on the screen.
  • • To make the frame larger, tap it twice.
  • • To return it to full size, tap it once, then tap .
  • ![image 351](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile351.png)

  • • To close it, drag it to the bottom of the screen. Or, tap it, then tap .
  • ![image 352](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile352.png)

    ##### Turn off Picture-in-picture for an app

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps.
  • 2. Tap Special app access > Picture-in-picture.
  • 3. Tap the app.
  • 4. Turn Allow picture-in-picture off .
  • Page 89

    ![image 353](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile353.png)

    View notifications

    Find your notifications Apps send you notifications to let you know about new messages, calendar events, and alarms. You can check your notifications from a few places:

  • • When your screen is off, you'll see notifications in Peek Display.
  • • They appear on your lock screen.
  • • You see them when you swipe the status bar down on any screen.
  • ![image 354](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile354.png)

    If you get multiple notifications from an app, they'll be grouped together. You can swipe down to view more details. Conversation notifications are grouped together at the top of your other notifications so you can easily get back to them.

    Some important notifications will pop up over your current app so you can take action. For example, if you get a call while you're watching a video, a notification will appear so you can answer or ignore the call.

    If an app icon has a notification dot, you can touch & hold it to see the most recent notification:

    ![image 355](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile355.png)

    What you can do with lock screen and status bar notifications

    ####### Respond from a notification

    Many notifications include actions at the bottom that let you complete common tasks without opening the full app. If you have several notifications, these actions are hidden. When you see , tap it to reveal actions like Reply, Archive, and more.

    ![image 356](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile356.png)

    Open the app that sent the notification Swipe down from the top of the screen and tap the notification to open its app. Instead of opening apps in full screen from notifications, you can set them to open in freeform windows for multi-tasking. Learn more.

    From the lock screen, tap the notification twice and enter your PIN, pattern, or password to unlock your screen and open the app.

    Snooze a notification Tap . Then tap and select a duration to snooze notifications. To snooze notifications, first turn on snoozing. Dismiss a notification Swipe it sideways. Some notifications, like voicemails, require an action and cannot be dismissed. Dismiss all notifications Swipe to the end of your notifications and tap Clear all.

    Page 90

    ![image 357](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile357.png)

    ![image 358](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile358.png)

    Control how and when apps send notifications Use Do Not Disturb to silence all notifications when you don’t want interruptions. Touch & hold a notification to customize that app's notifications. Then you can:

  • • Stop all notifications from that app.
  • • Change the app's notifications to be Silent instead of Default.
  • About preloaded apps

    Sometimes, related apps (like apps from Google or from your carrier) are grouped into a folder.

    Apps that came with your phone The following apps may be pre-installed on your phone. Don’t want some? Delete or disable them. Need other apps? You can download free and paid apps.

    ####### Icon App Description

    ![image 359](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile359.png)

    Assistant Use your voice to control your phone.

    ![image 360](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile360.png)

    Booking Book your whole trip in one app. Find great deals on flights, hotels, rental cars.

    ![image 361](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile361.png)

    Calculator Make some quick calculations.

    ![image 362](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile362.png)

    Calendar Keep track of your upcoming events, get automatic reminders on your phone, and coordinate with others by sharing calendars.

    Page 91

    ![image 363](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile363.png)

    Camera Capture photos or videos. To learn more, read the Camera app's help.

    ![image 364](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile364.png)

    Chrome Browse the web. Access your browser bookmarks from any device, and sync tabs with your computer or Android devices.

    ![image 365](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile365.png)

    Clock Set alarms. Use a timer or stopwatch.

    ![image 366](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile366.png)

    Contacts Organize and connect with your contacts. Assign ringtones to people.

    ![image 367](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile367.png)

    Docs Create, edit, and collaborate with others on documents.

    ![image 368](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile368.png)

    Dolby Atmos Optimize and adjust audio for your phone’s speaker and any connected listening device.

    ![image 369](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile369.png)

    Drive Store and synchronize your files on Google's cloud, then access them anywhere you have an internet connection. Create and share spreadsheets, documents, and presentations. Scan documents and share or print them.

    ![image 370](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile370.png)

    Facebook Connect with friends, family, and communities. Share updates and media. Find information on events, entertainment, and businesses.

    ![image 371](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile371.png)

    Page 92

    Family Space Create a space on your phone where family can play safely, without disrupting your settings and privacy.

    ![image 372](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile372.png)

    Files Browse and manage files and folders stored on your phone.

    ![image 373](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile373.png)

    Find Device Locate and secure a lost phone.

    ![image 374](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile374.png)

    Fit Track your health and physical activity.

    ![image 375](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile375.png)

    Games Find tools & settings to help you focus on gaming.

    ![image 376](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile376.png)

    Gmail Compose, send, view, or search your email from your phone or computer.

    ![image 377](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile377.png)

    Google Search the web, see your updates, and adjust Google settings, including privacy.

    ![image 378](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile378.png)

    Google One Get expanded storage, Google support, and other member benefits with a paid subscription.

    ![image 379](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile379.png)

    Google TV Get movies and TV shows for instant viewing from Play Store. (Not available in all countries.)

    Page 93

    ![image 380](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile380.png)

    Home Set up and control your Google Home and Chromecast devices, and other home products like lights, cameras, and thermostats.

    ![image 381](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile381.png)

    Interactive wallpapers

    Provides access to Motorola's interactive wallpapers, hosted on the cloud so they don't take up space on your phone until you download them.

    ![image 382](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile382.png)

    Maps Find your destination, explore locations.

    ![image 383](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile383.png)

    Meet Make video calls with your friends across Android and iOS.

    ![image 384](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile384.png)

    Messages Send and receive text messages.

    ![image 385](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile385.png)

    Moto Customize your phone's look, sound, and how you interact with it using gestures.

    ![image 386](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile386.png)

    Moto Secure Manage network security, control app permissions, and create a secret folder for your most sensitive apps.

    ![image 387](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile387.png)

    Motorola Notifications

    Page 94

    Subscribe or unsubscribe to communications from Motorola.

    ![image 388](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile388.png)

    News See headlines, weather, and information on your favorite topics and locations.

    ![image 389](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile389.png)

    Phone Make calls.

    ![image 390](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile390.png)

    Photos Manage photos and upload them automatically to your private album.

    ![image 391](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile391.png)

    Play Store Get apps for your phone, as well as books, magazines, music, and movies and access them from your computer or any Android device.

    ![image 392](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile392.png)

    Ready For Connect your phone and PC to share content and experiences easily between them. Learn more.

    ![image 393](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile393.png)

    Recorder Record voice memos and review call recordings.

    ![image 394](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile394.png)

    Settings Customize your phone settings.

    ![image 395](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile395.png)

    Sheets Create, edit, and collaborate with others on spreadsheets.

    Page 95

    ![image 396](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile396.png)

    Slides Create, edit, collaborate with others, and play presentations.

    ![image 397](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile397.png)

    Spotify Discover music, audiobooks, podcasts.

    ![image 398](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile398.png)

    TikTok Watch short-form videos. Create your own videos, and apply filters or effects to express yourself.

    ![image 399](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile399.png)

    Wallet Securely store payment cards, flight and event tickets, transit passes, vaccination cards, loyalty and gift cards, digital car keys, and campus IDs in this digital wallet.

    ![image 400](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile400.png)

    Weather Get weekly weather, doppler radar, local news, and national weather alerts.

    ![image 401](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile401.png)

    YouTube Find, view, and upload videos to the web.

    ![image 402](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile402.png)

    YT Music Stream your favorite albums, singles, and live performances, and get recommendations for new music.

    Get help using an app

  • 1. Open the app.
  • 2. Tap or .
  • Page 96

    ![image 403](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile403.png)

    ![image 404](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile404.png)

  • 3. Look for Help or Settings > Help.
  • About the Moto app

    The Moto app groups together features and settings that help you customize the way your phone looks, sounds, and behaves. Several of these features are available only on Motorola phones.

    ![image 405](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile405.png)

    In the Moto app, touch to access these features and settings: Personalize Change your phone's layout, fonts, icon shapes, themes, and wallpapers. Gestures Control your phone with simple motions, like using a chopping motion to turn on the flashlight. Moto Secure Manage network security, control app permissions, and create a secret folder for your most sensitive apps. Tips Learn more about your phone with a guided tour and demos of favorite features. Display Control what shows on your lock screen. See what’s going on while your screen is off (Peek Display) or keep your screen on when you’re looking at it (Attentive Display). Play Adjust display and sound features for immersive, refined, and uninterrupted entertainment experiences. (Gametime and Dolby Atmos)

    ![image 406](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile406.png)

    Turn gestures on/off Perform everyday tasks with quick motions. You turn each gesture on/off independently. Tap “Learn more” links to learn how to use and turn gestures on/off.

    Double-tap the back of your phone for shortcut (open a selected app or perform action). Learn more.

    ![image 407](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile407.png)

    ![image 408](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile408.png)

    Swipe in from the edge of your phone for a pop-up menu of your favorite apps. Learn more.

    ![image 409](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile409.png)

    Twist your wrist twice quickly to open the camera from any screen. Learn more.

    ![image 410](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile410.png)

    Make a chopping motion to turn the flashlight on or off. Learn more.

    Page 97

    ![image 411](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile411.png)

    Use three fingers to take a screenshot. Learn more.

    ![image 412](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile412.png)

    Unlock by lifting your phone and looking at it. Learn more.

    ![image 413](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile413.png)

    Set your phone face down on a surface to start Do Not Disturb mode. Learn more.

    ![image 414](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile414.png)

    Pick up your ringing phone to silence it and switch to vibrate. Learn more.

    ![image 415](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile415.png)

    Swipe back and forth to use split screen. Learn more.

    Get help with other features and settings

    For information about other features or settings on your phone:

  • • To search Help, at the top of this screen, tap and type keywords.
  • ![image 416](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile416.png)

  • • To browse the entire Help menu (table of contents), at the top of this help screen, tap your phone's model.
  • Focus on gaming

    Page 98

    Find your games and gaming tools in one place

    Open the Games app and then:

    ![image 417](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile417.png)

  • • To play a game, tap .
  • ![image 418](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile418.png)

  • • If you don't have any games yet, tap Download games and choose one from Play Store.
  • • To adjust display settings, prevent interruptions, and turn off gestures during games, tap Settings.
  • ![image 419](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile419.png)

  • • To see moments you captured during games, tap .
  • ![image 420](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile420.png)

  • • To turn Gametime on or off for a game, tap .
  • ![image 421](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile421.png)

    Open toolkit Use the toolkit to quickly adjust settings during a game. To open it, you can either:

  • • Tap .
  • ![image 422](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile422.png)

  • • Swipe right.
  • ![image 423](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile423.png)

  • • Swipe right but don't show . This gives maximum space for and interferes least with gaming.
  • Page 99

    ![image 424](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile424.png)

    Reposition Drag to the top, middle, bottom, or opposite side of the screen.

    ![image 425](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile425.png)

    ##### Reposition

  • 1. Swipe right.
  • ![image 426](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile426.png)

  • 2. Tap Settings > Toolkit access.
  • ![image 427](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile427.png)

  • 3. Tap next to Swipe right from the edge.
  • ![image 428](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile428.png)

  • 4. Select top, middle, or bottom third of screen. Customize tap or swipe to open
  • 1. Open the Games app.
  • ![image 429](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile429.png)

  • 2. Tap > Toolkit access
  • ![image 430](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile430.png)

    Page 100

  • 3. Do one of the following:
  • • To tap , select Tap the icon.
  • ![image 431](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile431.png)

  • • To swipe right, select Swipe right from the edge.
  • ![image 432](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile432.png)

  • • To swipe without showing , select Swipe right from the edge, then tap and turn Show visual hint off .
  • ![image 433](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile433.png)

    ![image 434](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile434.png)

    ![image 435](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile435.png)

    Remove the toolkit If you don’t want to use the toolkit, you can remove it. Open the toolkit and tap Settings > Toolkit access > Hide the toolkit.

    ![image 436](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile436.png)

    Turn off calls and notifications

    ##### From the toolkit

  • 1. During a game, open the toolkit.
  • 2. Tap to block calls and to block notifications.
  • ![image 437](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile437.png)

    ![image 438](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile438.png)

    Page 101

  • 3. When Block calls is on , calls from starred contacts are allowed as exceptions. To block starred contacts as well, or to permit calls from certain contacts, tap > Caller exceptions.
  • ![image 439](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile439.png)

    ![image 440](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile440.png)

    ##### From Games app

  • 1. Open the Games app.
  • ![image 441](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile441.png)

  • 2. Tap .
  • ![image 442](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile442.png)

  • 3. Turn Block notifications and Block calls on or off .
  • ![image 443](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile443.png)

    ![image 444](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile444.png)

  • 4. When Block calls is on , calls from starred contacts are allowed as exceptions. To block starred contacts as well, or to permit calls from certain contacts, tap Caller exceptions.
  • ![image 445](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile445.png)

    Turn off gestures that conflict with game controls

    Some gestures may conflict with game controls. You can turn them off while you’re playing games.

  • 1. During a game, open the toolkit and tap .
  • Page 102

    ![image 446](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile446.png)

  • 2. Tap Block Gestures and turn on the gestures you want to block.
  • ![image 447](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile447.png)

    Adjust display settings

  • 1. During a game, open the toolkit.
  • 2. Tap Settings and adjust settings:
  • ![image 448](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile448.png)

  • • To improve display, adjust Display refresh rate.
  • • To keep brightness at a fixed level while gaming, turn Disable adaptive brightness on .
  • ![image 449](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile449.png)

  • • To hide labels below sidebar icons, turn Show labels off .
  • ![image 450](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile450.png)

    Use other apps while you play

    You can add up to two shortcuts in the toolkit for quick access. When you open the app from the toolkit during a game, it appears in a small freeform window that you can reposition.

    To add apps:

  • 1. Be sure the app you want is installed. If it isn't, download it from Play Store.
  • 2. During a game, open the toolkit and tap > .
  • Page 103

    ![image 451](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile451.png)

    ![image 452](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile452.png)

  • 3. Select the apps to add. To use the apps:
  • 1. During a game, open the toolkit and tap , then select the app.
  • ![image 453](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile453.png)

  • 2. Drag the app window where you want it.
  • 3. Use available app features as you normally do. Some app features might not be available in freeform mode.
  • Record or take screenshot during game

  • 1. During a game, open the toolkit.
  • 2. To record your screen, tap . Learn more. To take a screenshot, tap .
  • ![image 454](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile454.png)

    ![image 455](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile455.png)

  • 3. To share it, tap .
  • ![image 456](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile456.png)

    Allow game play over mobile data

    To save mobile data, Gametime prevents games from using mobile data when Wi-Fi is available. But you can change settings and allow games to use mobile data.

    Page 104

  • 1. Open the Games app.
  • ![image 457](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile457.png)

  • 2. Tap .
  • ![image 458](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile458.png)

  • 3. Turn Use mobile data on or off .
  • ![image 459](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile459.png)

    ![image 460](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile460.png)

    Install or update apps

    Get apps You can download more apps, in addition to the apps preloaded on your phone. If the app will contain important information (like banking apps), you can install it directly into your secure folder. Otherwise, just put it with your other apps.

    ##### Get apps from Google Play Store

  • 1. Open the Play Store app.
  • ![image 461](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile461.png)

  • 2. Browse by category or search.
  • 3. Tap an item to see a description, read reviews, and download it.
  • Tip: To prevent accidental or unwanted purchases, tap your profile icon > Settings. To learn more, read Google's help.

    ![image 462](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile462.png)

    ##### Restore Play Store apps

    Page 105

    If you uninstalled an app you got from Play Store, you can reinstall it anytime. Have apps you use infrequently, such as a flight tracker? Delete them and easily reinstall when needed.

  • 1. Open the Play Store app.
  • ![image 463](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile463.png)

  • 2. Tap your profile icon > Manage apps & device > Manage.
  • ![image 464](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile464.png)

  • 3. Tap This device and change to Not installed.
  • 4. Check the box for each app to re-install, then tap .
  • ![image 465](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile465.png)

  • 5. If you have multiple Google accounts, tap your profile icon and next to your account tap . Select the other account and repeat the process to restore apps downloaded in that account.
  • ![image 466](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile466.png)

    ![image 467](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile467.png)

    Get apps from other sources Before downloading, do some research: check the app's rating and read lots of comments. To download apps:

  • 1. Open the Chrome app and go to the appropriate site to download the app. If you see a warning, tap OK to continue. You'll see in the status bar when the download completes.
  • ![image 468](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile468.png)

  • 2. Tap the download notification to install the app. Or, open the Files app to install it later.
  • 3. When installing the app, be sure to review what information the app will access. If you don’t want the app to access this information, cancel the installation. For example, if you're installing an app that makes a shopping list, the app should not require access to your contacts.
  • Stop adding icons automatically If you don’t want the app’s icon added to your home screen when you install an app:

    Page 106

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen.
  • 2. Tap Home settings > Home screen style > App tray > .
  • ![image 469](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile469.png)

    ![image 470](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile470.png)

  • 3. Turn Add app icons to Home screen off .
  • ![image 471](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile471.png)

    Update apps

    Updating your apps gives you the latest features and improves security and stability. For best performance, apps are set to update automatically.

    If an app changes the information it wants to access on your phone, you'll get a notification to update the app manually and will be required to review and accept the new permissions.

    ##### Update Play Store apps manually

  • 1. Open the Play Store app.
  • ![image 472](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile472.png)

  • 2. Tap your profile icon > Manage apps & device.
  • ![image 473](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile473.png)

  • 3. Under Updates available:
  • • Tap Update all.
  • • Or, to update a specific app, tap See details, then tap Update by its name.
  • Page 107

    To read the summary of what changed, tap the app name before you update it.

    Update Play Store apps automatically To control when your apps are automatically updated:

  • 1. Open the Play Store app.
  • ![image 474](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile474.png)

  • 2. Tap your profile icon > Settings.
  • ![image 475](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile475.png)

  • 3. Tap Network preferences > Auto-update apps.
  • 4. Choose whether apps should:
  • • Auto-update over any network
  • • Auto-update only over Wi-Fi - save data charges on your cellular plan If you can't update apps
  • If you see apps waiting to update that are stuck in “Pending” status, update the Chrome app first.

    ![image 476](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile476.png)

  • 1. On the “Pending downloads” screen, cancel all downloads.
  • 2. Swipe to Chrome and tap Update.
  • ![image 477](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile477.png)

  • 3. After Chrome has updated, touch Update all. Apps will now update normally.
  • Page 108

    Turn off Play Store auto-updates For best security and performance, keep apps set to update automatically. Stop a specific app from updating automatically

  • 1. Open the Play Store app.
  • ![image 478](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile478.png)

  • 2. Tap your profile icon > Manage apps & device.
  • ![image 479](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile479.png)

  • 3. Tap Manage, then tap the app's name.
  • 4. Tap and turn off Enable auto update.
  • ![image 480](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile480.png)

    ##### Stop all apps from updating automatically

  • 1. Open the Play Store app.
  • ![image 481](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile481.png)

  • 2. Tap your profile icon > Settings.
  • ![image 482](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile482.png)

  • 3. Tap Network preferences > Auto-update apps > Don't auto-update apps.
  • Manage app permissions

    What are permissions?

    If an app wants to use specific features and personal information on your phone, it must ask for your permission. You can manage permissions at any time to allow, deny, or modify them.

    Page 109

    Features you'll be asked about If an app wants to access (use, view, change) these features, it must ask you for permission:

  • • Hardware and system settings, such as access to your camera, microphone, location, contacts, calendar, storage, and sensors
  • • Network settings, such as permission to access the internet, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth
  • • Personal information and accounts, including access to your personal data, accounts, authentication services (for example, email addresses, phone numbers, social media accounts, and more)
  • • The ability to modify phone settings and perform actions (such as sending notifications or controlling hardware components)
  • ##### Should you allow or deny access?

    Before you give an app permission, it’s important to review what the app’s asking for. Make sure you're okay with what the app wants to do before you say yes.

    Android apps can still work even if you don't give them all the permissions they ask for. For instance, an app might not need to know your location or see your contacts to do its thing. But, if you do allow it access, the app might work even better. It's a trade-off. On the one hand, you can limit what info the app knows. On the other hand, you might miss out on cool features.

    Respond to app permission requests

    You'll see permissions screens:

  • • The first time you open an app
  • • The first time you use a specific feature, if that feature requires access
  • • When an app updates and needs different permissions
  • • When you restart an app you previously denied permissions If the screen pops up over another app, tap to allow full access, partial access, or to deny the app access. If the screen takes you into Settings and flashes a setting:
  • 1. Tap the flashing item.
  • 2. Turn the permission on to accept (or off to deny it).
  • 3. Tap or swipe to go back to the previous screen.
  • ![image 483](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile483.png)

    Review or change permissions

    Page 110

    ##### Review by feature

    The first time you use an app, and sometimes when you install or update it, you are asked to grant the app permission to access certain data and phone features. You can adjust these permissions any time.

    To adjust permissions by feature:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > Privacy.
  • 2. Tap Permission manager tab.
  • 3. Tap a feature to see which apps have permission to use it.
  • 4. Turn that permission on or off for each app as needed. Review by app To adjust permissions by app:
  • 1. Touch & hold the app icon, then tap App info .
  • ![image 484](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile484.png)

  • 2. Tap Permissions.
  • 3. Turn each permission on or off as needed.
  • Tip: To see how the app uses each permission, tap > All permissions.

    ![image 485](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile485.png)

    Delete or disable apps

    Disable apps provided with phone You can't remove preloaded apps from your phone, but you can disable and hide apps that you don't need. To disable an app:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps.
  • 2. Tap See all # apps > app you want to disable.
  • 3. Tap Disable. To re-enable a disabled app:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps > See all # apps.
  • Page 111

  • 2. Tap the app.
  • 3. Tap Enable. You can remove any app from your homescreen.
  • Delete apps you installed

    You can delete (uninstall) apps that you downloaded. For many preloaded apps, you can disable but not delete them.

  • 1. Touch & hold the app's icon.
  • 2. Do one of the following:
  • • Drag the icon up and drop it on . This deletes the app and frees storage space.
  • ![image 486](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile486.png)

  • • If you don't see a delete option, touch & hold the app icon, then tap > Disable.
  • ![image 487](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile487.png)

    Delete apps installed by others

    If you are the owner of the phone and shared it with users or guests, you can uninstall apps they installed. Although their apps don’t appear in your app tray or on your home screen, they do reduce available storage space.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps > See all # apps. Apps installed by others show the message Not installed for this user.
  • 2. Tap the app name.
  • 3. Tap > Uninstall for all users.
  • ![image 488](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile488.png)

    Find problem apps with safe mode

    Page 112

    Issues such as apps crashing, unexpected reboots, or fast battery drain could be caused by an app you installed. Use safe mode to start your phone with only the original software and apps. If the issues go away in safe mode, the problem is probably from an app you downloaded.

    Step 1: Restart in safe mode

  • 1. Do one of the following:
  • • Press & hold the Power and Volume up buttons at the same time.
  • • Swipe down from the top of any screen and tap .
  • ![image 489](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile489.png)

  • 2. Touch & hold Power off. Then tap OK to restart in safe mode.
  • When it restarts, you'll see Safe mode across the bottom of the home screen, and all widgets and thirdparty apps will be disabled.

    Step 2: Check if the problem goes away

    Use your phone and see if the problem has gone away. Remember, you won’t be able to use any downloaded apps.

    If the problem goes away, an app is probably causing your problem, so you should exit safe mode and check your apps.

    If the problem doesn't go away, an app’s not the cause. Try these performance troubleshooting steps next.

    Step 3: Exit safe mode

    Press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then touch Restart . Or, hold the Power button for about 30 seconds, or until your phone restarts.

    ![image 490](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile490.png)

    Step 4: Check your apps

  • 1. One by one, delete recently downloaded apps. Keep a list of the apps as you go.
  • Page 113

  • 2. After you delete each app, restart your phone. See whether removing that app solved the problem.
  • 3. Once you’ve found and deleted the problematic app, you can restore the other apps you removed during testing.
  • Protect against harmful apps

    Scan phone for harmful apps

    Play Protect helps keep your phone secure by automatically scanning your apps, including sideloaded apps, to check for potentially harmful apps (malware).

    If Play Protect finds a potentially harmful app, it stops the app from running and warns you so that you can uninstall it.

    To see the results or to rescan:

  • 1. Open the Play Store app.
  • 2. Tap your profile icon > Play Protect.
  • ![image 491](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile491.png)

  • 3. Review the results of the latest scan, or tap Scan. Play Protect is on by default. To learn more, read Google's help.
  • If your phone seems slow

    If you’ve scanned your phone to confirm there aren’t any potentially harmful apps but your phone seems slow, troubleshoot the issue.

    Search the web

    Search from anywhere

    You don't have to leave your current app to search for the info you need. Use Google Assistant from any screen to get search results and options for your next action.

    To search:

    Page 114

  • 1. Say “OK, Google” or “Hey, Google”. (Be sure you've set up the launch phrase.) Or swipe diagonally from either lower corner of the screen.
  • 2. Tell the assistant what you're looking for. For example, search for a local restaurant by saying “Find [restaurant name].”
  • 3. Below the search result, tap options for related actions: make a call, get directions, read reviews, and more.
  • For more help with Google Assistant, read Google's support information.

    Search with the Google search bar

    ![image 492](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile492.png)

    ####### Type search terms

  • 1. Tap the blank space on the search bar.
  • 2. Start typing a search term. As you type, suggested terms appear.
  • 3. Tap a suggestion to search for it. Use voice search Tap to call Assistant. Learn more. Use camera to search for info Tap , then follow onscreen instructions.
  • ![image 493](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile493.png)

    ![image 494](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile494.png)

    Use camera to search for info

    You can use Google Lens with your camera to:

    ![image 495](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile495.png)

  • • Search for information about objects and surroundings: Learn about products, landmarks and buildings, plants and animals, books and visual art
  • • Scan barcodes and QR codes: Search for related information, open a website to purchase a product
  • • Digitize real-world text: Copy text to paste in another app, translate text, save business card information to Contacts, create calendar events from dates on posters or billboards
  • To use Google Lens:

    Page 115

  • 1. On the home screen, tap on the search widget. Or, open the Camera app and tap on the viewfinder.
  • ![image 496](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile496.png)

    ![image 497](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile497.png)

    ![image 498](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile498.png)

  • 2. Frame the item you want to learn about and tap .
  • ![image 499](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile499.png)

  • 3. Tap the item you want to learn about. For text, tap it to select it, and use to select more.
  • ![image 500](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile500.png)

  • 4. In the list of results:
  • • Review results, then tap a selection to view it or take the suggested action.
  • • To crop the area of your search for more accurate results, adjust the frame corners.
  • You can also use Google Lens on captured photos and screenshots. In the Photos app, open the photo or screenshot, then tap .

    ![image 501](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile501.png)

    ![image 502](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile502.png)

    To learn more, read Google's help.

    Delete Google search history

    Page 116

    To learn how, read Google's help.

    Use search engine other than Google

    To use a search engine other than Google:

  • 1. Search for “search engine” in Play Store and install one of the apps.
  • 2. Open that app to search.
  • 3. Optionally:
  • • Delete the Google search widget from your home screen. If you can’t delete it, use a different launcher for your home screen that doesn’t include the widget.
  • • Install a browser to replace Chrome and make it your default browser.
  • • Turn off Google’s collection of your information.
  • Search your phone

    Find an app

  • 1. Swipe up from the bottom of the home screen.
  • 2. Tap Search apps.
  • ![image 503](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile503.png)

  • 3. Type the app's name.
  • 4. If the app is on your phone, tap its icon to open it. If the app isn't on your phone, tap SEARCH FOR MORE APPS to go to Play Store and install with one tap.
  • Find a setting

  • 1. Go to Settings.
  • 2. At the top of Settings, tap .
  • Page 117

    ![image 504](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile504.png)

  • 3. Type your search term and tap on the keyboard.
  • ![image 505](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile505.png)

  • 4. In the list of search results, tap a setting to open it.
  • Find your phone number

  • 1. Go to Settings.
  • 2. Tap About phone > Phone number.
  • Find photos, videos, files To find photos or videos on your phone, use the Photos app. To find downloaded files, use the Files app.

    Browse websites

    Your phone connects to your carrier's cellular network or to a Wi‑Fi network to access the internet. To save data charges on your cellular plan, use a Wi‑Fi connection.

    Browse with Chrome

    ##### Visit and bookmark websites

  • 1. Open the Chrome app.
  • ![image 506](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile506.png)

  • 2. Go to a site by tapping the bar at the top and typing the address.
  • 3. On a web page:
  • • To bookmark it, tap > . Or, tap > Add to Home screen to put a shortcut on your home screen.
  • Page 118

    ![image 507](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile507.png)

    ![image 508](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile508.png)

    ![image 509](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile509.png)

  • • To search for text on that page, tap > Find in page.
  • ![image 510](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile510.png)

  • • To open a link, tap it.
  • • To see options for opening a link in a new tab and copying or sharing a link, touch & hold the link.
  • • To print the page, tap > Share > Print. If you don't see your printer listed, set up your print service.
  • ![image 511](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile511.png)

  • 4. To return to the previous page tap . To learn more about browsing or managing bookmarks, read Google's help.
  • ![image 512](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile512.png)

    ##### Open and switch tabs In the Chrome app:

    ![image 513](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile513.png)

  • • To switch tabs, tap the switcher icon .
  • ![image 514](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile514.png)

  • • To open a new tab, tap the switcher icon , then tap .
  • ![image 515](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile515.png)

    Page 119

    ![image 516](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile516.png)

    ##### Clear browsing history

  • 1. Open the Chrome app.
  • ![image 517](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile517.png)

  • 2. Tap > History.
  • ![image 518](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile518.png)

  • 3. Tap Clear browsing data. To learn more, read Google's help.
  • You can also review and delete your search history.

    Change default browser

    You can download other browsers from Play Store. After you've installed one, you can make it your default browser.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps.
  • 2. Tap Default apps > Browser app.
  • 3. Tap the app to use.
  • About text and multimedia messages

    Text messages - SMS

    SMS (Short Message Service) messages are text only. You can send a message up to 160 characters long. If you type more than that, your message will be sent in a series of SMS messages.

    You can send one SMS to multiple people, and the replies will come in separate threads (unless you and your recipients have group messaging enabled).

    Page 120

    SMS messages are included in most carriers' text messaging plans and don't use cellular data.

    Multimedia messages - MMS

    MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) messages can include unlimited text and a photo, picture slideshow, video, or sound file.

    You can send one MMS message to multiple people at once using group messaging, and replies will be delivered in group conversation threads to each person in the group.

    MMS messages use cellular data, so you need a cellular data plan or pay-per-use payment to send them.

    Group messaging

    With group messaging, you can have a conversation with multiple people at once. All replies from recipients are delivered to all recipients, in a group conversation thread.

    Even though you send one message to multiple people, you’ll be charged for each message received. Group messaging:

  • • Converts multiple-recipient SMS messages to MMS for everyone who can receive them
  • • Is available for MMS messages only
  • Note: Recipients who can't get MMS messages will receive an SMS instead. If there's media attached, they'll get a link to download it over Wi-Fi (if offered by their carrier). Replies are to the sender only, in an individual conversation.

    If you don't want to receive replies in group chats, you can turn off group messaging in the Messages app.

    Read, send messages

    Work with messages

    With the Messages app, you can send and receive text messages.

    ![image 519](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile519.png)

    Read and reply to a message When you receive a text message with the Messages app, you'll see in the status bar.

    Page 121

    ![image 520](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile520.png)

    ![image 521](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile521.png)

  • 1. Swipe the status bar down and tap .
  • ![image 522](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile522.png)

  • 2. To respond, type in the text box and tap .
  • ![image 523](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile523.png)

  • 3. Optionally:
  • • To open an attached photo or file, tap it.
  • • To save an attachment, touch & hold it, then tap > Save.
  • ![image 524](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile524.png)

  • • If the message is important, star it so you can find it later.
  • • If the message is from an unassigned number, create a contact to associate a name with that number.
  • Tips for incoming messages:

  • • You can control message notifications, changing the sound or turning them on/off.
  • • If you don't want multi-recipient SMS messages converted to MMS and want replies sent in separate conversations (threads) to you only, turn off group messaging.
  • • To protect your privacy, you can hide sensitive content for lock screen notifications. Send a message
  • 1. Open the Messages app.
  • Page 122

    ![image 525](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile525.png)

  • 2. Tap .
  • ![image 526](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile526.png)

  • 3. Enter recipients, then type the message.
  • 4. Optionally:
  • • To add an attachment, tap or .
  • ![image 527](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile527.png)

    ![image 528](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile528.png)

  • • To add a smiley or other icons, tap on the onscreen keyboard.
  • ![image 529](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile529.png)

  • • If you're using two SIMs and want to switch to the other to send the text, tap and select the SIM.
  • ![image 530](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile530.png)

  • 5. Tap . Tips for sending messages:
  • ![image 531](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile531.png)

  • • To text your best friend with one tap from your home screen, add a task shortcut. Touch & hold and drag to your home screen.
  • ![image 532](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile532.png)

    Page 123

    ![image 533](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile533.png)

  • • To change the text message reply to incoming calls, open the Phone app and tap > Settings > Quick responses.
  • ![image 534](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile534.png)

    ![image 535](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile535.png)

    ##### Manage drafts

    When you begin composing a text message reply or a new message with recipients, it's saved in your message list as a draft until you send or delete it.

  • 1. Open the message list and tap the conversation marked Draft.
  • 2. Do one:
  • • Finish composing the message and tap .
  • ![image 536](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile536.png)

  • • Delete the characters in the text field to delete the draft.
  • ##### Forward a message

  • 1. Open the conversation in Messages.
  • ![image 537](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile537.png)

  • 2. Touch & hold the message.
  • 3. Tap > Forward.
  • Page 124

    ![image 538](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile538.png)

    ##### Copy text from a message

  • 1. Open the conversation in Messages.
  • ![image 539](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile539.png)

  • 2. Touch & hold the message.
  • 3. Tap . You can now paste it elsewhere, like in a different text or in an email you're composing.
  • ![image 540](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile540.png)

    Work with attachments Your text messages can include photos, voice messages, and video as attachments. Add attachment

  • 1. In the Messages app, compose a reply or a new message.
  • ![image 541](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile541.png)

  • 2. Do one of the following:
  • • Touch & hold to start recording a voice message. When done, lift your finger.
  • ![image 542](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile542.png)

  • • Tap to attach a photo or video or capture a new one. Tap to expand the viewfinder to fullscreen, where you can switch to a selfie camera or capture a video.
  • ![image 543](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile543.png)

    ![image 544](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile544.png)

    ![image 545](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile545.png)

    Page 125

  • • Tap for other types of attachments (emoji, GIF, your location, contacts).
  • ![image 546](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile546.png)

  • 3. Tap . If you're having trouble attaching files, check that:
  • ![image 547](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile547.png)

  • • Cellular data is turned on.
  • • Your data plan supports MMS (multimedia messages).
  • ##### Save attachment you received

    In the message, touch & hold the attachment, then tap > Save. Or, tap the attachment to open it and look for save options.

    ![image 548](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile548.png)

    If you don't save an attached photo or video, it is kept within the message only. So, if you delete the message, you also delete the attachment. (You can try to recover recently deleted messages.)

    View saved attachments For photos or videos, open the Photos app and tap Collections. For other attachments, open the Files app.

    Manage, delete messages

    Keep track of important messages

    To access your important messages and conversations in the Messages app: Pin up to 3 conversations to keep these groups of messages at the top when you open the app. Star messages you want to find later.

    ![image 549](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile549.png)

    ![image 550](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile550.png)

    Page 126

    ![image 551](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile551.png)

    ##### Pin/unpin conversations To pin a conversation:

  • 1. Open the Messages app.
  • ![image 552](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile552.png)

  • 2. In your conversation list, touch & hold the conversation.
  • 3. Tap . To unpin a conversation, touch & hold it, then tap .
  • ![image 553](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile553.png)

    ![image 554](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile554.png)

    ##### Star messages

  • 1. Open the conversation that has the message you want to star.
  • 2. Touch & hold the message.
  • 3. Tap . To remove a star, on the message, tap .
  • ![image 555](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile555.png)

    ![image 556](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile556.png)

    Find starred messages To find starred messages across all conversations, go to the top of your conversation list and tap > Starred. To find starred messages within a specific conversation, open the conversation and tap > Starred.

    ![image 557](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile557.png)

    ![image 558](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile558.png)

    Delete or archive texts

    Page 127

    When you delete a message, you also delete any attached photos or videos. If you want the attachments, be sure to save them before deleting the message.

  • • To delete a single message, open the conversation (thread) and touch & hold the message, then touch
  • ![image 559](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile559.png)

    .

  • • To delete or archive all messages in a conversation, touch & hold the conversation, then touch to delete or to archive.
  • ![image 560](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile560.png)

    ![image 561](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile561.png)

  • • To delete or archive multiple conversations, touch & hold the first conversation, then touch the other conversations to select them, and touch or .
  • ![image 562](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile562.png)

    ![image 563](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile563.png)

  • • To see archived messages, tap your profile icon > Archived.
  • ![image 564](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile564.png)

    Control notifications for text messages

    Follow the instructions below to change all notifications from your messaging app. But, if you want to stop text message notifications only during certain hours or from specific people, use Do Not Disturb instead.

    ##### If you use the Messages app

  • 1. Open the Messages app.
  • Page 128

    ![image 565](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile565.png)

  • 2. Touch your profile icon > Messages settings.
  • ![image 566](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile566.png)

  • 3. If you have two SIMs, touch General.
  • 4. Touch Notifications and:
  • • Turn notifications on or off
  • • Change the sound
  • • Add or remove vibration
  • ##### If you use a different messaging app

  • 1. Touch & hold the app's icon.
  • 2. Touch App info > Notifications.
  • ![image 567](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile567.png)

  • 3. Make changes.
  • Request text delivery reports

    See whether recipients receive your messages by requesting delivery reports.

  • 1. Open the Messages app.
  • ![image 568](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile568.png)

  • 2. Touch your profile icon > Messages settings
  • Page 129

    ![image 569](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile569.png)

  • 3. If you have one SIM, touch Advanced. If you have two SIMs, touch the SIM.
  • 4. Turn on Get SMS delivery reports.
  • Turn group messaging on or off

    Group messaging allows conversation participants to reply to all recipients in a single thread. If you do not want multi-recipient SMS messages converted to MMS and want replies sent in separate threads only to you, turn off group messaging.

    This feature is not available in all countries. To adjust the group messaging setting:

  • 1. In the Messages app, touch your profile icon > Messages settings.
  • ![image 570](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile570.png)

    ![image 571](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile571.png)

  • 2. If you have one SIM, touch Advanced. If you have two SIMs, touch the SIM.
  • 3. Touch Group messaging and select an option.
  • Change default messaging app

    You can download additional messaging apps from Play Store. After you've installed one, you can make it your default messaging app.

    To select a different app to send and receive text (SMS) and multimedia (MMS) messages:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps.
  • 2. Touch Default apps > SMS app.
  • 3. Touch the app to use.
  • Page 130

    Change text message reply to incoming calls

    When your phone rings, you can drag towards to see a list of quick responses you can send by text message instead of answering the call.

    ![image 572](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile572.png)

    ![image 573](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile573.png)

    To edit these quick responses:

  • 1. Touch .
  • ![image 574](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile574.png)

  • 2. Touch > Settings.
  • ![image 575](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile575.png)

  • 3. Touch Quick responses.
  • 4. Touch one of the responses to edit it.
  • Get text messages on your computer

    Set up Device Pairing If you use the Messages app on your phone, you can see and send text messages on your computer. Pair your computer and the Messages app on your phone by scanning a QR code:

    ![image 576](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile576.png)

    ![image 577](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile577.png)

  • • The QR code is unique to that computer.
  • • You can set up multiple computers, getting individual QR codes, but only one is active at a time. To set up a computer:
  • Page 131

  • 1. Be sure your phone and computer are connected to the internet.
  • 2. On your phone, open the Messages app, then tap your profile icon > Device Pairing.
  • ![image 578](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile578.png)

    ![image 579](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile579.png)

  • 3. On your computer, go to https://messages.google.com/web.
  • 4. Follow onscreen instructions to scan the QR code on the web page with your phone. Once paired, you'll see your latest conversations in your computer's browser.
  • See and send messages

    When you have unread messages, you'll see a red notification and number of unread messages in the browser tab on your computer.

    To send messages from your computer, your phone must be on and connected to the internet. Usual carrier fees for sending text messages from your phone also apply to messages sent from your computer.

    Sign out of Device Pairing

    If you don’t use Messages on a paired computer for 14 days, you’re automatically signed out from that computer for security reasons.

    If you're using a shared or public computer, sign out when you're done. To sign out from your phone:

  • 1. Open the Messages app.
  • ![image 580](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile580.png)

  • 2. Tap your profile icon > Device Pairing.
  • ![image 581](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile581.png)

  • 3. Do one of the following:
  • Page 132

  • • Tap next to an individual computer to sign out of it.
  • ![image 582](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile582.png)

  • • Tap Unpair all devices.
  • To sign out from the computer, at the top of the message list, click > Unpair.

    ![image 583](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile583.png)

    Read, send, manage emails

    Read email

    If you've set up email, you’ll start receiving emails after your account syncs with your phone. When you receive an email notification, you'll see in the status bar.

    ![image 584](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile584.png)

  • To open email from a notification, swipe the status bar down and touch the notification:
  • • A single email notification opens the message directly.
  • • A multiple email notification opens the email list; touch an email to open it. If you dismiss the notification and want to view the email later, open the Gmail app. 2. Do any of the following:
  • • To view other folders, touch from your email list.
  • ![image 585](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile585.png)

  • • Attachments appear at the end of the email. You can view or save them.
  • • You can print emails from your phone. Reply to or forward an email
  • 1. Touch to reply to the sender. Or, swipe to the end of the email and touch to reply to all recipients or to forward.
  • ![image 586](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile586.png)

    Page 133

    ![image 587](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile587.png)

    ![image 588](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile588.png)

  • 2. Enter your message.
  • 3. To copy someone on the email, in the To field, touch .
  • ![image 589](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile589.png)

  • 4. Touch .
  • ![image 590](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile590.png)

    Send new email

  • 1. Open the Gmail app and touch Compose. Or, touch & hold , then touch Compose. (If you send lots of emails, add a task shortcut. Drag Compose to your home screen.)
  • ![image 591](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile591.png)

    ![image 592](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile592.png)

  • 2. Enter the recipient and your message.
  • 3. To copy someone on the email, in the To field, touch .
  • ![image 593](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile593.png)

  • 4. Touch .
  • ![image 594](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile594.png)

    Add attachment to email

    Page 134

  • 1. In the email you're composing, tap > Attach file to add a file stored on your phone, or attach one saved on Drive.
  • ![image 595](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile595.png)

  • 2. Browse to the file, and tap it to add it to the email. The attachment appears at the bottom of the email.
  • Find emails When you open the Gmail app, you see your Inbox. To view sent email, drafts, recently deleted email, and other categories, touch . To search for emails, at the top of your email list enter terms, like the topic or the sender's name.

    ![image 596](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile596.png)

    Delete emails To delete an open email, tap . To delete an open draft of an email, tap > Discard. To delete multiple emails, go to your email list, touch & hold the first message, then touch the other messages to select them, and tap . To delete large quantities of email, sign into your email account on your computer, and see your email provider's help for more information.

    ![image 597](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile597.png)

    ![image 598](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile598.png)

    ![image 599](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile599.png)

    ####### Tips:

  • • To delete attachments that you saved from emails, use the Files app.
  • • You can also remove email accounts from your phone.
  • Learn more For more help with Gmail, read Google's support information. For help managing email from other providers, sign into your email account on your computer and look for the provider's instructions.

    View email attachments

    View attachments Attachments appear at the end of an email. To view or play the attachment, tap it. If you see a message that you can't open the attachment type, most file types have a free viewer that you can use. In Play Store, search for the file type, then select and download an app.

    Save attachments from email In the email, tap on the attachment to download and save it on your phone, or tap to save it in Drive. To view attachments later, open the Files app (go to Download) or the Drive app.

    Page 135

    ![image 600](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile600.png)

    ![image 601](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile601.png)

    Delete attachments saved from email

  • 1. Open the Files app.
  • 2. Tap Downloads.
  • 3. Do one of the following:
  • • To select one item, touch & hold it.
  • • To select multiple items, touch & hold the first one, then tap the others.
  • 4. Tap .
  • ![image 602](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile602.png)

    Prevent previews of attachments Attached photos or videos appear as thumbnails, showing a preview. To see a generic thumbnail instead of a preview thumbnail until you open the file:

  • 1. Open the Gmail app.
  • 2. Tap > Settings, then tap the account name.
  • ![image 603](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile603.png)

  • 3. Tap Images > Ask before displaying external images.
  • Preview inboxes from home screen

    To preview your inboxes, open emails, or quickly start a new email, add the Gmail widget to your home screen.

    With the widget, you can:

    Page 136

  • • Open a message. Touch the message.
  • • Compose a message. Touch .
  • ![image 604](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile604.png)

  • • View more messages. Scroll down the list.
  • • Open the app. Touch the folder name at the top of the widget.
  • Add email signature

    To add a signature automatically to the end of emails you send:

  • Open the Gmail app. 2. Touch > Settings. 3. Select the account.
  • ![image 605](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile605.png)

  • Touch Mobile Signature and edit the text you want to appear at the end of every email.
  • Control email notifications

    You can control whether you see notifications when you receive an email.

  • 1. Touch & hold .
  • ![image 606](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile606.png)

  • 2. Touch > Notifications.
  • ![image 607](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile607.png)

  • 3. Adjust notification settings.
  • Page 137

    Tip: To automatically silence notifications during hours you specify, use Do Not Disturb.

    About the calendar

    Keep track of upcoming events and get automatic reminders on your phone with your calendar. Google calendars let you save all your events in one place, which is secure, synced, and accessible from any webenabled device or computer when you've signed in to your account.

    You can:

  • • Review existing events.
  • • Create new events.
  • • Control notifications for events.
  • Your calendar can automatically create new events based on your incoming Gmail messages. For example, if you make restaurant reservations or book a flight, these events will show up automatically on your calendar; you don't have to add them.

    If you created multiple calendars within your Google account, or if you have multiple Google accounts on your phone, you can control which events are synced with your phone.

    Find calendar events

    Open calendar events

    You'll see in the status bar to alert you of upcoming events. Just swipe the status bar down and touch the notification to see the event details in your calendar.

    ![image 608](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile608.png)

    To see your list of upcoming events, open the Calendar app.

    Tip: For an overview of your upcoming events from your home screen, add a Calendar widget.

    Get around the calendar

    To glance at the month view:

    Page 138

  • 1. Touch the month's name.
  • 2. Touch a date to jump to it and see its events. To change the view:
  • 1. In your calendar, touch .
  • ![image 609](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile609.png)

  • 2. Touch Schedule, Day, 3 days, Week or Month. This view remains the default until you change it. From these views, you can:
  • • Read or edit event details. Touch the event to open it and touch to edit it.
  • ![image 610](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile610.png)

  • • Add new events. Touch .
  • ![image 611](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile611.png)

  • • Search your calendar. Touch .
  • ![image 612](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile612.png)

    Create and manage events

    Create calendar events

    As you're creating an event, you'll see suggestions for the event titles, locations, people, and more. In some cases, these suggestions are personalized based on information associated with your Google account and your previously created events.

  • 1. Open the Calendar app and touch > Event.
  • ![image 613](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile613.png)

    Page 139

  • 2. If you have multiple accounts, touch the account for the calendar you want.
  • 3. Enter the start time and other details.
  • 4. If you want a reminder sent to your status bar, touch Add notification and select how long before the event you want a reminder.
  • 5. Touch Save.
  • Edit or delete calendar events

  • 1. Touch an event to open it.
  • 2. Do any of the following: • To edit it, touch .
  • ![image 614](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile614.png)

    • To delete it, touch > Delete.

    ![image 615](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile615.png)

    Control which events are shown

    To temporarily hide calendar events for a Google account you don't need to see all the time:

  • 1. Open the Calendar app and tap .
  • ![image 616](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile616.png)

  • 2. Beneath the account name, tap Events to remove the checkbox. If you have multiple calendars for that account, ap the name of each calendar to hide its events.
  • Tip: When you hide events, the calendar still syncs with your Google account. To prevent that account's calendar from automatically syncing, from the home screen go to Settings > Passwords & accounts.

    To exclude automatically-generated events created from Gmail (for events such as flight bookings and restaurant reservations):

  • 1. Open the Calendar app.
  • Page 140

  • 2. Tap > Settings > Events from Gmail.
  • ![image 617](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile617.png)

  • 3. Under the name of the account, turn Show events from Gmail off . To learn more, open Calendar and touch > Help & Feedback.
  • ![image 618](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile618.png)

    ![image 619](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile619.png)

    Control notifications for calendar events

  • 1. Touch & hold the app icon.
  • ![image 620](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile620.png)

  • 2. Tap > Notifications.
  • ![image 621](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile621.png)

  • 3. Adjust notification settings.
  • If you have assigned a ringtone for the notification but you silence your phone, your phone won't play the ringtone.

    Tip: To automatically silence notifications during hours you specify, use Do Not Disturb.

    Set alarms

    Set alarm by touch

  • 1. Open quick settings by swiping down twice, then swipe right and touch .
  • Page 141

    ![image 622](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile622.png)

  • 2. Adjust alarms:
  • • To create a new alarm, touch .
  • ![image 623](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile623.png)

  • • To use an existing alarm, switch it on.
  • • To change an alarm's sound, schedule or label, touch .
  • ![image 624](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile624.png)

  • 3. To control general alarm settings, like alarm volume and snooze duration, touch > Settings.
  • ![image 625](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile625.png)

    Tip: Your phone must be powered on for the alarm to activate.

    Set alarm by voice

  • 1. If you've set up Voice Match, say “Hey Google”. Or, touch on the Google Search widget.
  • ![image 626](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile626.png)

    ![image 627](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile627.png)

  • 2. When prompted to speak, say your command. For example: “Set alarm for 7:45 p.m., label, switch the laundry” or “Wake me up at 7 a.m. tomorrow.” Your phone sets the alarm and provides a confirmation.
  • When an alarm is set You'll see in the status bar. To adjust it, open quick settings by swiping down twice, then swipe right and touch .

    Page 142

    ![image 628](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile628.png)

    ![image 629](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile629.png)

    Delete an alarm

  • 1. Open the Clock app.
  • 2. Touch
  • ![image 630](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile630.png)

  • 3. Touch > .
  • ![image 631](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile631.png)

    ![image 632](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile632.png)

    Use timer or stopwatch

    Use timers

    You can set multiple countdown timers with labels to keep track:

  • 1. In the Clock app, touch for the Timer tab.
  • ![image 633](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile633.png)

  • 2. Enter the time to count down.
  • 3. Touch .
  • ![image 634](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile634.png)

  • 4. Do any of the following:
  • Page 143

  • • To pause the countdown, touch .
  • ![image 635](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile635.png)

  • • To add a label to the timer, touch the current name and change it (helpful when using multiple timers).
  • • To add a minute to the countdown, touch + 1:00.
  • • To reset the counter to the original time, touch .
  • ![image 636](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile636.png)

  • • To add a timer, touch .
  • ![image 637](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile637.png)

  • • To delete a timer, touch .
  • ![image 638](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile638.png)

  • • To change the timer's sound, touch > Settings > Timer sound.
  • ![image 639](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile639.png)

  • • If you leave this app, quickly return to it by swiping the status bar down with one finger to see the timer notification and remaining time. To open the timer, touch the notification.
  • Tip: If you use timers frequently, add a task shortcut. Touch & hold , then drag Create new timer to your home screen.

    ![image 640](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile640.png)

    Use a stopwatch

    Record your time.

    Page 144

  • 1. In the Clock app, touch for the Stopwatch tab.
  • ![image 641](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile641.png)

  • 2. Touch .
  • ![image 642](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile642.png)

  • 3. Do any of the following:
  • • To pause the stopwatch, touch .
  • ![image 643](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile643.png)

  • • To record laps (or multiple durations) while the stopwatch is running, touch .
  • ![image 644](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile644.png)

  • • To reset the counter to zero, touch .
  • ![image 645](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile645.png)

  • • If you leave this app, quickly return to it by swiping the status bar down with one finger and touching a control. To open the stopwatch, touch the notification.
  • ######## Tip: If you use stopwatches frequently, add a task shortcut. Touch & hold , then drag Start stopwatch to your home screen.

    ![image 646](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile646.png)

    Set date and time

    Change time format

    Page 145

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Date & time.
  • 2. To change how times are displayed:
  • • To use military time such as 13:00, turn Use locale default off and turn Use 24-hour format on
  • ![image 647](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile647.png)

    ![image 648](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile648.png)

    .

  • • To use the time format of your current location, turn Use locale default on .
  • ![image 649](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile649.png)

  • • To use 12-hour format, turn both Use locale default and Use 24-hour format off .
  • ![image 650](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile650.png)

    Set date and time automatically

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Date & time.
  • 2. Turn Set time automatically and Use location to set time zone on . Your phone automatically syncs with the local time (using the mobile network). The local time is used for alarms and is displayed on the lock screen and other displays.
  • ![image 651](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile651.png)

    Set date and time manually

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Date & time.
  • 2. Turn Set time automatically off .
  • Page 146

    ![image 652](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile652.png)

  • 3. To make corrections, tap Date and Time.
  • Switch time zones

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Date & time.
  • 2. Turn Set time zone automatically off .
  • ![image 653](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile653.png)

  • 3. Tap Time zone.
  • 4. Choose a regional time zone (which is applied to the current time).
  • Show multiple time zones

    You can view multiple time zones in the Clock app, so you can coordinate plans with friends and co-workers in other cities, or stay in touch with family back home when you’re traveling.

  • 1. Open the Clock app and tap .
  • ![image 654](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile654.png)

  • 2. To add time zones, tap , then select cities in the time zone you want to view.
  • ![image 655](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile655.png)

    Show home time zone

    When traveling, you can view your home time zone in the Clock app.

    Page 147

    ######## 1. Open the Clock app and tap .

    ![image 656](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile656.png)

    ####### 2. Tap > Settings.

    ![image 657](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile657.png)

    ####### 3. Turn Automatic home clock on .

    ![image 658](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile658.png)

    Share photos and videos

    You can wirelessly share one, multiple, or all items from any Photos view, sending them as email or message attachments, uploading to the cloud, or using device-to-device connections like Bluetooth.

    In addition to sharing wirelessly, you can transfer photos to your computer with a USB connection. To share wirelessly:

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • ![image 659](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile659.png)

  • 2. Navigate to the thumbnail of the item you want to share.
  • 3. Select the item to share:
  • • To select one item, touch & hold its thumbnail.
  • • To select multiple items, touch & hold the first thumbnail, then touch the others to select them.
  • Tip: To clear all selections, touch at the top of the screen next to the number selected.

    ![image 660](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile660.png)

  • 4. Touch and select the way you want to share.
  • Page 148

    ![image 661](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile661.png)

    Upload photos and videos

    Back up automatically

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • ![image 662](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile662.png)

  • 2. Touch your profile icon > Turn on backup. You can change back up settings any time.
  • ![image 663](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile663.png)

    Adjust back up settings

    To adjust settings for your automatic backups:

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • ![image 664](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile664.png)

  • 2. Touch your profile icon > Photos settings > Backup.
  • ![image 665](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile665.png)

  • 3. Adjust settings as needed:
  • • To choose high quality or original size for uploads, touch Backup quality.
  • • To back up items in your Download, Screenshots, and third-party app folders, touch Back up device folders.
  • Page 149

  • • To back up items over your cellular network, touch Mobile data usage, then adjust options for photos, videos, and roaming.
  • Back up manually

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • ![image 666](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile666.png)

  • 2. Open the photo or video.
  • 3. On the photo or video, touch . (Swipe up if you don't see .)
  • ![image 667](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile667.png)

    ![image 668](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile668.png)

    View your backed up photos and videos From your phone, open the Photos app. From your computer, sign in to photos.google.com.

    ![image 669](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile669.png)

    Manage your storage

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • ![image 670](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile670.png)

  • 2. Touch your profile icon > Photos settings > Backup.
  • ![image 671](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile671.png)

  • 3. Touch Manage storage.
  • 4. View how many GB of storage you have used and approximately how much time your remaining storage will last. If you're running low, follow onscreen instructions to get more storage.
  • Page 150

  • 5. To review and delete recommended photos:
  • a. Under Review and delete, touch a category (such as large photos and videos, blurry photos, screenshots).
  • b. Touch & hold an item to delete, then touch others to include.
  • c. Touch .
  • ![image 672](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile672.png)

    More help

    To learn more, read Google's help.

    Add contacts

    Add contacts automatically

    When you add an account to your phone, the contacts for that account are available on your phone automatically.

    Add contact with Contacts app

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 673](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile673.png)

  • 2. Tap .
  • ![image 674](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile674.png)

  • 3. If you're using more than one account, the account that will be synced with your new contact appears at the top. To change accounts, tap .
  • ![image 675](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile675.png)

    Page 151

  • 4. Tap a text box to type the name and details. Fill in as much or as little information as you'd like.
  • Tips:

  • • Tap to add a photo. Choose a photo you've saved, or take a photo and crop it.
  • ![image 676](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile676.png)

  • • You can assign a custom ringtone for calls from that contact.
  • • If you have multiple accounts on your phone and want to change the default account for new contacts, in the Contacts app tap your profile icon > > Default account for new contacts.
  • ![image 677](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile677.png)

    ![image 678](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile678.png)

    ![image 679](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile679.png)

  • 5. Tap Save.
  • Add contact from text message

    You can easily create a new contact or add a new number for an existing contact when you receive a text message from an unassigned number.

  • 1. Open the Messages app.
  • ![image 680](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile680.png)

  • 2. In the message list, touch & hold the number, then tap > Add contact.
  • ![image 681](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile681.png)

    Page 152

  • 3. Tap .
  • ![image 682](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile682.png)

  • 4. Do one of the following:
  • • To add to an existing contact, start typing the contact's name in the search field, then select it.
  • • To set up a new contact, tap Create a new contact and add contact details.
  • 5. Tap or Save.
  • ![image 683](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile683.png)

    Other ways to add contacts

  • • Save a recent call as a contact.
  • • Have someone send you a name card.
  • Edit or delete contacts

    Edit contacts

    After creating a contact, you can change the name, photo, and other contact information.

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 684](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile684.png)

  • 2. Touch the person's name. 3. Adjust settings as needed:
  • Page 153

  • • To assign a custom ringtone, touch > Set ringtone.
  • ![image 685](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile685.png)

  • • To edit contact info, touch , then touch a field to make changes, touch to change the photo, or touch > Discard to undo changes.
  • ![image 686](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile686.png)

    ![image 687](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile687.png)

    ![image 688](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile688.png)

    Merge contacts

    If you have two contacts for the same person, you can merge the information (including all emails and phone numbers) into a single listing.

    ##### Automatically merge contacts

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 689](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile689.png)

  • 2. Tap Organize > Merge & fix.
  • ![image 690](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile690.png)

  • 3. Tap Merge duplicates. If you don’t see this option, contacts can't be automatically merged.
  • 4. Select options to merge one or all duplicates.
  • Delete contacts

    You can delete contacts created and stored on your phone. If the contact is synced from a social network account, you need to delete the contact in that account. For example, a Facebook contact must be deleted from within your Facebook account. Or, hide Facebook contacts on your phone by filtering your contact list.

    Page 154

    ##### Delete one contact

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 691](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile691.png)

  • 2. Touch the person's name.
  • 3. Touch > Delete and confirm the deletion.
  • ![image 692](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile692.png)

    ##### Delete multiple contacts

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 693](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile693.png)

  • 2. In your contact list, touch & hold the first contact.
  • 3. Touch the other contacts to delete.
  • ######## 4. Touch .

    ![image 694](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile694.png)

    Star your favorite contacts

    ![image 695](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile695.png)

    Contacts you mark as favorites appear at the top of the list in the Contacts app and on the tab in the Phone app. To add someone to your favorites:

  • 1. Touch the contact icon (photo or other icon).
  • Page 155

  • 2. Touch .
  • ![image 696](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile696.png)

    Sort contacts

    Sort contacts in Contacts app

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 697](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile697.png)

  • 2. Touch your profile icon > .
  • ![image 698](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile698.png)

    ![image 699](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile699.png)

  • 3. Set options:
  • • To sort by first or last name, touch Sort by.
  • • To list names with first name first or last name first, touch Name format. Sort contacts in Phone app
  • 1. Open the Phone app.
  • ![image 700](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile700.png)

  • 2. Touch > Settings > Display options.
  • ![image 701](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile701.png)

  • 3. Set options:
  • Page 156

  • • To sort by first or last name, touch Sort by.
  • • To list names with first name first or last name first, touch Name format. Narrow which contacts are shown
  • In the Contacts app, you can choose which contacts to show. These changes won't affect the contacts that show up in the Phone app.

    In the Contacts app:

    ![image 702](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile702.png)

  • • To show contacts from only one account or all accounts, touch your profile icon , then select the account(s).
  • ![image 703](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile703.png)

  • • To narrow which contacts are shown from your account, touch > Customize view.
  • ![image 704](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile704.png)

    ![image 705](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile705.png)

    In the Phone app, use the tab to see only contacts you call frequently or have starred as favorites. To remove contacts from this tab, touch & hold the contact, then touch .

    ![image 706](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile706.png)

    ![image 707](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile707.png)

    Share contacts

    Ways to share contacts You can share one or all contacts by sending a name card file (.vcf). You can also share a contact’s information as a text message attachment. Or, just touch your phones together and beam the contact information with NFC.

    Share one or a few contacts

    Page 157

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 708](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile708.png)

  • 2. Touch & hold a name to select it, then touch others to select more.
  • 3. Touch .
  • ![image 709](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile709.png)

  • 4. Select the way to share.
  • Receive a name card file

  • 1. When someone sends you a name card file, you'll see a file transfer notification. Tap the notification and accept the file transfer.
  • 2. Tap the name card file (.vcf) to open it and add the person to your contacts.
  • Answer calls

    Answer incoming call

    When you receive a phone call, the Incoming call screen shows the caller ID. If you miss a call, you'll see in the status bar.

    ![image 710](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile710.png)

    To answer an incoming call:

  • • On the Incoming call screen, touch Answer.
  • • On the lock screen, swipe up to answer a voice call, or swipe the caller's icon/picture up to answer a
  • ![image 711](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile711.png)

    Page 158

    video call.

    During a call, you can use the keypad to enter numbers or codes, use speakerphone or a paired Bluetooth device, and add other people to the call. Learn more.

    Tip: You can save a recent call as a contact.

    Auto answer on headset

    Not all carriers support this feature.

    You can set your phone to automatically answer calls after 2, 5, or 10 seconds when you're using a headset (wired or Bluetooth).

  • 1. Touch .
  • ![image 712](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile712.png)

  • 2. Touch > Settings.
  • ![image 713](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile713.png)

  • 3. Do one of the following:
  • • If your phone has one SIM, touch Calls.
  • • If your phone has two SIMs, touch Calling accounts and select the SIM.
  • 4. Touch Auto answer on headset and select a duration.
  • Dismiss incoming call

    If you don’t want to talk to the caller, you can:

    Page 159

  • • Divert the call to voicemail. On the Incoming call screen, touch Decline. Or, on the lock screen, press the Power button. You can also automatically divert all calls from a specified number to voicemail.
  • • Respond with a text message. On the lock screen, touch . You can customize these default messages.
  • ![image 714](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile714.png)

  • • Block all calls from that number.
  • Control ringtones and notifications

    You can:

  • • Quickly silence the ringer. Press Volume Down on the side of the phone.
  • • Silence ringtones during hours you specify. Use Do Not Disturb.
  • • Choose a unique ringtone for specific people. You'll know instantly who's calling.
  • • Get notified of incoming calls when you're on a call. Set up call waiting.
  • • Set the number of rings before sending a call to voicemail. Dial into voicemail, then follow your carrier’s prompts to change this setting.
  • Fix an issue

    If your phone isn't ringing for incoming calls, look for in your status bar. Open quick settings and turn

    ![image 715](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile715.png)

    Do Not Disturb off. Your phone will ring for incoming calls. Check your settings to make sure your phone is screening calls at the appropriate times. If you’re having other issues, try these troubleshooting steps.

    ![image 716](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile716.png)

    Make calls

    Make a call

    Page 160

  • 1. Touch .
  • ![image 717](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile717.png)

  • 2. Touch and enter a number.
  • ![image 718](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile718.png)

  • 3. If you enter a wrong number, touch .
  • ![image 719](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile719.png)

  • 4. Touch to call the number.
  • ![image 720](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile720.png)

  • 5. To hang up, touch .
  • ![image 721](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile721.png)

    Other ways to make calls

    You can place calls from:

  • • The Phone app
  • ![image 722](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile722.png)

  • • The Contacts app
  • ![image 723](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile723.png)

  • • The Assistant app
  • Page 161

    ![image 724](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile724.png)

  • • Other apps that show contact information. Wherever you see a phone number, you can usually touch it to dial.
  • Return a recent call In the Phone app, touch , then touch next to the number.

    ![image 725](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile725.png)

    ![image 726](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile726.png)

    ![image 727](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile727.png)

    Tip: You can save a recent call as a contact.

    ##### Dial a favorite contact

    ![image 728](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile728.png)

    In the Phone app, touch to see your favorites, then touch the contact.

    ![image 729](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile729.png)

    In the Contacts app, at the top of the list under , touch the contact.

    ![image 730](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile730.png)

    ![image 731](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile731.png)

    ##### Dial by contact lookup

  • 1. Open the Phone app and touch . Or, open the Contacts app.
  • Page 162

    ![image 732](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile732.png)

    ![image 733](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile733.png)

    ![image 734](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile734.png)

  • 2. In the search field, start typing the name to select from matches.
  • ![image 735](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile735.png)

  • 3. Touch the contact name, then touch next to the number to call.
  • ![image 736](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile736.png)

    Tip: To call frequent numbers with one touch from your home screen, add a Direct dial widget.

    Dial by voice Get your assistant's attention, then say “Call” or “Dial” and one of the following:

  • • Phone number
  • • Contact's name
  • • Name and town of local business Change default calling app
  • You can download additional calling apps from Play Store. After you've installed one, you can make it your default calling app.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps.
  • 2. Touch Default apps > Phone app.
  • 3. Touch the app to use.
  • Fix an issue

    If you can't make calls, try these troubleshooting steps.

    Page 163

    During a call

    Adjust sound during call

    While listening, you can:

  • • Adjust the volume. Use the Volume button on the side of the phone.
  • • Switch between earpiece, loudspeaker, or connected Bluetooth device. Touch .
  • ![image 737](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile737.png)

  • • Use a paired Bluetooth device. Touch to use or stop using the device.
  • ![image 738](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile738.png)

  • • Mute your microphone. Touch . You can hear the caller but they can’t hear you.
  • ![image 739](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile739.png)

    Enter a number

    Touch on the call screen to use the numeric keypad.

    ![image 740](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile740.png)

    Use other apps

    When you put your phone up to your ear, the screen turns off to prevent you from accidentally touching it. To turn it back on, move it away from your ear or press the Power button.

    To hide the call and use other apps, swipe up from the bottom of the screen. To return to the call, swipe the status bar down and touch Ongoing call.

    Answer call waiting

    Page 164

    If call waiting is active and a new call comes in, you can answer it. Touch Hold and Answer Voice. The first call is put on hold.

    To switch between calls, touch . To merge the calls, touch .

    ![image 741](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile741.png)

    ![image 742](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile742.png)

    Record calls Not all carriers and countries support this feature. To record an incoming or outgoing call:

  • • On the call screen, touch to start and to stop.
  • ![image 743](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile743.png)

    ![image 744](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile744.png)

  • • You can't start recording when you’re on mute, on hold, or on conference calls.
  • • When you start recording a call, for legal purposes, a voice announces the call is being recorded. You can't turn off the announcement.
  • To play or share the recording:

  • 1. In the Phone app, touch .
  • ![image 745](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile745.png)

    ![image 746](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile746.png)

  • 2. In the list of recent calls, means the call was recorded. Touch the call.
  • ![image 747](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile747.png)

  • 3. Then:
  • Page 165

  • • Touch to play the recording.
  • ![image 748](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile748.png)

  • • Touch to share it.
  • ![image 749](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile749.png)

  • • To delete it, swipe the recording left.
  • Recording a conversation without the consent of the other party is illegal in most countries. Know your country's laws before recording a call.

    End the call

    Tap on the call screen. Or:

    ![image 750](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile750.png)

  • • From the conversation bubble, tap End call.
  • • From the notification, tap Hang up.
  • Make video calls

    Make video call with Meet app

    Meet lets you video call anyone in your contact list who also uses Meet. Android users can get it from Play Store, and iPhone users can download it from the App Store. The video calls are secure and can’t be seen by others.

    To get started, open the Meet app and follow the onscreen instructions to set it up. For more information, tap > Help & Feedback.

    ![image 751](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile751.png)

    Page 166

    Get an app to make video calls

    There are many video calling apps to choose from on Play Store (like WhatsApp, Skype, and more).

  • 1. Open the Play Store app.
  • 2. Search for “video calls”.
  • 3. Download the app you want to use.
  • Make conference calls

    To make a conference call:

  • 1. Call the first person.
  • 2. To call the next person:
  • a. Touch . This puts the first call on hold.
  • ![image 752](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile752.png)

  • b. Enter the number.
  • c. Touch .
  • ![image 753](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile753.png)

  • 3. To join the calls after the second person answers, touch .
  • ![image 754](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile754.png)

    Make calls over Wi-Fi

    Page 167

    About Wi-Fi calling

    Some carriers support Wi-Fi calling to make and receive calls and text messages from locations where your cellular signal is poor or not available. Contact your carrier to confirm that they support Wi-Fi calling for your phone.

    Calls and texts that are made over a Wi-Fi network use your existing cellular rate plan, even when roaming:

  • • Calls and texts to numbers in your home country are charged the same as your regular cellular calls.
  • • Calls and texts to international numbers are charged at international rates.
  • When connected to a Wi-Fi network, your phone automatically switches between cellular and Wi-Fi networks for calls and texts based on the signal strengths.

    Turn Wi-Fi calling on or off

    If your carrier supports Wi-Fi calling, you need to turn it on.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Mobile network.
  • 2. If you're using two SIMs, tap the SIM name.
  • 3. Tap Wi-Fi calling. Depending on your carrier, the Wi-Fi calling setting may be in your Phone app at > Settings > Calling accounts > your SIM > Wi-Fi calling. If you don’t see this option, your carrier doesn’t support this feature.
  • ![image 755](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile755.png)

    ![image 756](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile756.png)

  • 4. Turn it on or off . You can also open quick settings to turn Wi-Fi calling on or off .
  • ![image 757](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile757.png)

    ![image 758](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile758.png)

    ![image 759](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile759.png)

    Make Wi-Fi call

    Page 168

  • 1. Make sure that:
  • • Wi-Fi calling is on.
  • • You're connected to a Wi-Fi network.
  • 2. Make the call as usual.
  • Depending on your carrier, you’ll see a Wi-Fi calling icon in the status bar, start and end call buttons, or the active call status indicator when your call is over a Wi-Fi network.

    If you're not connected to Wi-Fi, calls use your carrier’s mobile network.

    If Wi-Fi calling isn’t working

    If you're outside your carrier's network and want to use Wi-Fi calling instead of roaming on another carrier’s network:

    ####### 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Mobile network.

  • 2. If your phone has two SIMs, tap the SIM set up for Wi-Fi calling.
  • 3. Tap Wi-Fi calling.
  • 4. Tap When Roaming and choose Prefer Wi-Fi. Other reasons why Wi-Fi calling may not work:
  • • If you're in airplane mode, a Wi-Fi call will drop when you lose your Wi-Fi connection.
  • • When traveling internationally, some carriers require turning on Wi-Fi calling before leaving your home country.
  • • Some countries don't allow Wi-Fi calling, and some carriers restrict Wi-Fi calling to and from certain countries. See your carrier for details.
  • Use caller ID

    About caller ID

    Page 169

    When you receive a call, caller ID shows the number on the incoming call or lock screens, unless the caller has hidden their information.

    When you make a call, those you call will see your number if they use caller ID. Depending on your services, caller ID may also:

  • • Show your name when you make a call
  • • Show incoming callers’ personal or business names
  • • Read aloud the caller’s name/number
  • • Identify potential spam - Google's Caller ID & spam lets you easily block them
  • Change your caller ID info

    To change the information that people see about you when you call, contact your carrier.

    Hear caller ID announcement

    You can hear the caller's name and number read out loud:

  • • Every time you receive a call
  • • Only when you are wearing a headset
  • • Never To set it up:
  • 1. Open the Phone app.
  • ![image 760](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile760.png)

  • 2. Touch > Settings > Caller ID announcement.
  • ![image 761](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile761.png)

  • 3. Touch Announce Caller ID, then select when you want to hear it. To turn the announcement off, select Never.
  • Identify and block spam callers automatically

    Page 170

    For numbers that aren't in your contacts, Google can provide information about the number and warnings about potential spam callers.

  • 1. Touch .
  • ![image 762](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile762.png)

  • 2. Touch > Settings > Caller ID & spam.
  • ![image 763](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile763.png)

  • 3. Turn See caller and spam ID on .
  • ![image 764](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile764.png)

  • 4. To prevent ringing and notifications from suspected spam calls, turn Filter spam calls on .
  • ![image 765](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile765.png)

    You won't receive notifications for these calls, but you'll see them in your call history and can check any voicemail you receive.

    When Caller ID & spam is on:

    • If you see “Suspected spam caller” or “Spam” for an incoming call, you can answer the call or block and

    report the number.

  • • Your phone may need to send information about your calls to Google.
  • • It doesn’t control whether your number shows when you make calls. If you don't want Google to identify spam callers, touch > > Settings > Caller ID & spam and turn it off
  • ![image 766](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile766.png)

    Page 171

    ![image 767](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile767.png)

    .

    ![image 768](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile768.png)

    Turn call waiting on and off

    When you’re on a call and a new call comes in, the new call is sent to voicemail. If you want to be notified of new calls instead, turn on call waiting.

    Note: Some carriers automatically control call waiting. If you do not see this option on your phone, contact your carrier for more information.

    To turn call waiting on:

  • 1. Open the Phone app.
  • ![image 769](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile769.png)

  • 2. Touch > Settings.
  • ![image 770](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile770.png)

  • 3. Do one of the following:
  • • If your phone has one SIM, touch Calls.
  • • If your phone has two SIMs, touch Calling accounts and select the SIM.
  • 4. Touch Additional settings, then turn Call waiting on .
  • ![image 771](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile771.png)

    Page 172

    When call waiting is on, if you're on a call and a new call comes in, you can answer it. The first call is put on hold. Touch to merge the two calls.

    ![image 772](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile772.png)

    To turn call waiting off, go to Additional settings, then turn Call waiting off

    ![image 773](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile773.png)

    Block calls and texts

    If you don't want to receive calls or texts from a certain number, you can block it. When the number tries to contact you, your phone will automatically decline the call or text.

    Block a number Use either app to block both calls and texts from a number. From the Phone app

  • 1. Tap .
  • ![image 774](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile774.png)

  • 2. Touch & hold a call from the number to block.
  • 3. Tap Block/report spam.
  • 4. If you don’t want to report the number as spam to Google, remove the checkmark.
  • 5. Tap Block. From the Messages app
  • 1. Touch & hold the conversation thread from the number to block.
  • 2. Tap > Block. Or, touch (for numbers saved in your contacts).
  • ![image 775](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile775.png)

    ![image 776](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile776.png)

  • 3. If you don’t want to report the call as spam to Google, remove the checkmark.
  • 4. Tap OK.
  • Page 173

    Unblock a number Use either app to unblock a number, so you can receive calls and texts from that number. From the Phone app

  • 1. Tap > Settings > Blocked numbers.
  • ![image 777](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile777.png)

  • 2. Tap by the number to unblock.
  • ![image 778](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile778.png)

    ##### From the Messages app

  • 1. Tap your profile icon > Spam & blocked.
  • ![image 779](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile779.png)

  • 2. Tap the blocked conversation.
  • 3. Tap Unblock.
  • Block all numbers for a contact

    If a contact has multiple numbers, you can block them all with the Contacts app.

    ![image 780](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile780.png)

    ##### Block a contact's numbers

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 781](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile781.png)

    Page 174

  • 2. Tap the contact's name.
  • 3. Swipe to move down and tap Block numbers.
  • 4. If you don’t want to report the call as spam to Google, remove the checkmark.
  • 5. Tap Block. On the contact screen, you'll see by the blocked numbers.
  • ![image 782](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile782.png)

    ##### Unblock the numbers

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 783](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile783.png)

  • 2. Tap the contact's name.
  • 3. Tap Unblock numbers > Unblock.
  • Block calls from unidentified callers

  • 1. Open the Phone app.
  • ![image 784](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile784.png)

  • 2. Touch > Settings > Blocked numbers.
  • ![image 785](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile785.png)

  • 3. Turn Unknown on .
  • ![image 786](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile786.png)

    Your phone will block calls from private or unidentified numbers. You'll still receive calls from phone numbers that are stored in your contacts.

    Page 175

    Tip: You can also automatically identify potential spam callers and easily block them with Google Caller ID & spam. Learn how to set it up.

    View and delete call history

    See your call history

    To see all recent calls:

  • 1. Touch .
  • ![image 787](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile787.png)

  • 2. Touch .
  • ![image 788](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile788.png)

  • 3. You'll see one or more of these icons next to each call:
  • Icon Meaning

    ![image 789](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile789.png)

    Missed call (incoming)

    ![image 790](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile790.png)

    Call you answered (incoming)

    ![image 791](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile791.png)

    Call you made (outgoing)

  • 4. To learn more about a call, touch it, then touch . To see only your missed calls:
  • Page 176

    ![image 792](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile792.png)

  • 1. Touch .
  • ![image 793](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile793.png)

  • 2. Touch > Call history.
  • ![image 794](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile794.png)

  • 3. Touch Missed.
  • Save recent call as contact You can save a number to make it easy to find and call back later. To save a number:

  • 1. Touch .
  • ![image 795](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile795.png)

  • 2. Touch .
  • ![image 796](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile796.png)

  • 3. Touch the number.
  • 4. Touch Add contact.
  • 5. Select whether to save it to an account or the phone.
  • 6. Do one of the following:
  • • To add to an existing contact, touch Add to existing.
  • • To set up a new contact, add contact details.
  • Page 177

  • 7. Touch or Save.
  • ![image 797](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile797.png)

    Delete calls from history

    Caution: There’s no way to restore the history after you delete it.

    To delete one call:

  • 1. Touch .
  • ![image 798](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile798.png)

  • 2. Touch .
  • ![image 799](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile799.png)

  • 3. Touch & hold the number.
  • 4. Touch . To delete all calls:
  • ![image 800](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile800.png)

  • 1. Touch .
  • ![image 801](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile801.png)

  • 2. Touch > Call history.
  • ![image 802](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile802.png)

    Page 178

  • 3. Touch > Clear call history.
  • ![image 803](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile803.png)

    Make emergency call from locked phone

    In an emergency, you don’t need to unlock your phone to dial an emergency number (for example, 911 in the US or 112 in Europe).

    To dial an emergency number from a locked screen:

  • 1. Swipe up on the lock screen.
  • 2. Touch Emergency call to see the dialer.
  • 3. Enter the emergency number for your region and touch . When you make an emergency call, Emergency Location Service automatically sends your location to emergency responders. You can also set up an emergency SOS.
  • ![image 804](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile804.png)

    Use voicemail

    Listen to voicemail

    If you've set up voicemail, you'll see in the status bar when a new voicemail message arrives.

    ![image 805](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile805.png)

  • 1. Do one of the following:
  • • Swipe the status bar down and touch .
  • ![image 806](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile806.png)

  • • Or, touch , then touch & hold 1.
  • Page 179

    ![image 807](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile807.png)

  • 2. When connected, follow your carrier’s system prompts.
  • If you listen to a new message and disconnect from voicemail without saving or deleting it, you will still see in the status bar.

    ![image 808](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile808.png)

    Manage your mailbox

    Your carrier provides your voicemail system.

  • 1. Do one of the following:
  • • Swipe the status bar down and touch .
  • ![image 809](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile809.png)

  • • Or, touch , then touch & hold .
  • ![image 810](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile810.png)

    ![image 811](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile811.png)

  • 2. When connected, follow the prompts to manage your messages and mailbox. Contact your carrier for help with:
  • • Recovering or resetting your password/PIN for voicemail
  • • Replaying messages
  • • Saving, forwarding, or deleting messages
  • Page 180

  • • Replying with or sending voice messages
  • • Changing number of rings before connecting call to voicemail
  • • Changing greeting or recorded name
  • • Changing notification options
  • • Changing mailbox language
  • Fix an issue If remains in your status bar after you listen to your voicemails, try the following. First, force stop the app:

    ![image 812](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile812.png)

  • 1. Touch & hold .
  • ![image 813](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile813.png)

  • 2. Touch .
  • ![image 814](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile814.png)

  • 3. Touch Force stop. This restarts the app and should remove the notification.
  • If that doesn't help:

  • 1. Call yourself from another phone and leave a short message.
  • 2. Go into your voicemail and delete this message, but wait to hang up until the notification icon has disappeared from your status bar.
  • Listen to music

    Get music

    Stream songs or download them to your phone so you can listen when you’re on an airplane or don’t have an internet connection.

    Page 181

    Your phone can play MP3, FLAC, M4A, AAC, AAC+, MIDI, and WAV files. To get music, do any of the following:

  • • Purchase it in a music app. Then stream it or download it using that app.
  • • Transfer it over USB or Bluetooth from your computer to your phone’s Music folder.
  • • Upload it from your computer to the cloud and listen on any internet-connected device.
  • Stream songs with YT Music Easily find your favorite albums, singles, and live performances, and get recommendations for new music. The streaming service is free and contains ads. The paid, premium service offers:

  • • Ad-free, uninterrupted music
  • • Continuous play when the screen is locked
  • • Downloads for listening offline To get started:
  • 1. Open the YT Music app.
  • 2. Touch to search for music, or use the tabs to browse:
  • ![image 815](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile815.png)

    • Home: Get customized stations and recommendations based on your mood, activity, or listening

    history.

  • • Explore: Browse newest releases, or choose a playlist for your mood.
  • • Library: Add songs, albums, and playlists to your library.
  • 3. To learn more about features or subscription pricing, tap your profile icon > Help & Feedback. You can listen through your phone's speaker or by pairing with a Bluetooth speaker.
  • ![image 816](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile816.png)

    Enhance your music with Dolby Atmos

    Page 182

    Want to tweak your sound? Open the Dolby Atmos app to use a preset Music sound profile, which you can customize. Or set up your own sound profile. Learn more.

    ![image 817](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile817.png)

    Use Volume buttons to switch tracks When the screen is off, you can use the Volume buttons to switch tracks. To set it up:

    ####### 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.Or, open the Moto app and touch > Play.

    ![image 818](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile818.png)

    ######## 2. Tap Media controls and turn it on .To switch tracks when the screen is off:

    ![image 819](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile819.png)

  • • For the next track, press & hold the Volume up button.
  • • For the previous track, press & hold the Volume down button. If this restarts the current track, press
  • Volume down again.

    Transfer music files

    About transferring music You can move music files you've bought and saved on your devices to other devices you own. Music apps that share music files from cloud storage usually just share links to the files instead of transferring them between devices. To transfer music files, the music needs to be stored on the device.

    Send files over Bluetooth

    To send music files stored on your phone:

  • 1. Pair your phone with the device receiving the music.
  • 2. On your phone, open the Files app and tap Audio.
  • 3. Touch & hold the file.
  • 4. Touch and select Bluetooth.
  • ![image 820](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile820.png)

    Page 183

  • 5. Touch the name of the paired device. During file transfer, you’ll see in the status bar. To check the status, see the notification.
  • ![image 821](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile821.png)

    Receive files over Bluetooth

  • 1. Pair your phone with the device sending the music.
  • 2. On the device sending the music, start the file transfer, following device’s instructions.
  • 3. When you receive the Bluetooth notification on your phone, swipe down and tap it, then tap Accept. During file transfer, you’ll see in the status bar. To check the status, open the notification.
  • ![image 822](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile822.png)

    The files are saved in Music/Bluetooth, where music apps will find them. You’re ready to listen!

    Transfer music from your computer

    To move your music from your computer to your phone, connect them with a USB cable and copy the files to your phone’s Music folder.

    Connect a MIDI device

    To connect a MIDI device:

  • 1. Make sure you have:
  • • A USB cable that's capable of data transfer and isn't for charging only.
  • • A USB OTG adapter cable, if needed.
  • 2. Turn the phone and MIDI device on.
  • 3. Connect them with the USB cable (and adapter if needed).
  • 4. Unlock the phone.
  • Page 184

  • 5. Change the USB connection type to allow MIDI connection:
  • a. Swipe down from the top of your home screen and tap the Charging this device via USB

    notification. b. Tap MIDI.

    Connect to Wi‑Fi networks

    Turn on and connect Open quick settings and tap to turn Wi‑Fi on. Your phone will automatically connect to Wi-Fi networks you've used before. If there aren't any, you can search for nearby networks and connect with one. When you're connected, you'll see in the status bar.

    ![image 823](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile823.png)

    ![image 824](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile824.png)

    Change, share, remove networks

    After connecting to a Wi-Fi network, your phone saves its details to automatically connect to previously used networks. You can manually connect to a different nearby network, share a network, or remove a saved network you no longer want to connect automatically.

    Search for new networks To scan for nearby available networks that you haven't connected to before:

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • ![image 825](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile825.png)

  • 2. Turn Wi-Fi on . You'll see a list of available networks. If a network needs a password, you'll see .
  • ![image 826](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile826.png)

    ![image 827](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile827.png)

  • 3. Do one of the following:
  • Page 185

  • • If the network is open (no ), tap its name to connect.
  • ![image 828](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile828.png)

  • • To type a password from the network owner, tap the network to connect to, then enter the password. For your home network, get the password from the label on the Wi-Fi router. For a public network, get the password from the business or organization.
  • • To connect using a QR code, swipe to Add network, then tap and scan the code.
  • ![image 829](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile829.png)

  • • If the network is hidden, you'll need to set it up before it'll show up in the list of available networks.
  • Change networks To switch to a network you've used before:

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • ![image 830](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile830.png)

  • 2. In the list of nearby networks:
  • • To connect to a different network, tap its name.
  • • To change settings for the currently connected network, tap > .
  • ![image 831](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile831.png)

    ![image 832](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile832.png)

  • • To change settings for a saved, disconnected network, touch & hold its name, then tap Modify.
  • Share a network You can share connection information with a friend so they can connect to the same network.

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • Page 186

    ![image 833](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile833.png)

  • 2. Tap the network you’re connected to, then tap .
  • ![image 834](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile834.png)

  • 3. Show the person the code to scan or the Wi-Fi password to type. Remove a network If you don't want to automatically connect to a saved Wi-Fi network, you can forget that network.
  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • ![image 835](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile835.png)

  • 2. If the network appears in your list of nearby networks, tap its name, then tap Forget.
  • 3. To review all of your saved networks, tap Saved networks. For each network you want to remove, tap its name, then tap Forget.
  • Turn Wi-Fi off To save battery life, turn off Wi‑Fi when you're not near a Wi‑Fi network. Open quick settings and tap to turn it off.

    ![image 836](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile836.png)

    Advanced Wi-Fi settings

    ##### Disable Wi-Fi scanning

  • 1. Go to Settings > Location.
  • 2. Tap Location services.
  • 3. Tap Wi‑Fi scanning and turn it off If you turn this off, apps that use your location won't work as well. Connect to hidden networks
  • ![image 837](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile837.png)

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • Page 187

    ![image 838](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile838.png)

  • 2. Below the list of networks, tap Add network.
  • 3. Enter the SSID (network name), security type, check Show password and enter the password.
  • 4. Tap Advanced options, and change Hidden network to Yes.
  • 5. Tap Save.
  • The hidden network is now visible in the list of available networks, and if you weren’t connected to Wi-Fi previously, you’re now connected.

  • 6. If you were connected to Wi-Fi when you added the hidden network, in the list of available networks, tap the name of the saved network, then tap Connect.
  • Connect with Wi-Fi Direct

    If you have a device, like a printer or TV, that supports Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your phone without a wireless router or cable.

    When you turn on your phone’s Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct is automatically enabled. To connect to a Wi-Fi Direct device:

  • 1. On the device you want to connect, set up Wi-Fi Direct. For instructions, see that product's user guide.
  • 2. On your phone, go to Settings > Network & internet > Wi‑Fi > Wi-Fi preferences.
  • 3. Tap Wi-Fi Direct. You'll see a list of Wi-Fi Direct devices that are within range and compatible.
  • 4. Tap the device’s name to connect.
  • Use Airplane mode

    Airplane mode turns off all wireless connections on your phone to prevent it from transmitting signals that could interfere with airplane communications.

    Turn it on Open quick settings and tap to turn airplane mode on. This disables all wireless connections (Wi‑Fi, voice and data for calls and text messages, Bluetooth). If your airline permits it, you can then turn Wi‑Fi and/or Bluetooth back on during the flight. Other wireless connections will remain off. Turn it off Open quick settings and tap .

    ![image 839](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile839.png)

    ![image 840](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile840.png)

    Page 188

    Control data usage

    Turn mobile data off/on Open quick settings and tap Mobile data. When you turn off cellular data, you can still use data over Wi-Fi. Cellular data must be ON if you want to:

    ![image 841](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile841.png)

  • • Receive or send multi-media messages
  • • Share your phone’s internet connection with other devices Set data warning and limit
  • Data plans often have limits, and it's easy to exceed them. Setting up a usage warning can prevent surprises by alerting you when approaching your limit. You can even set a usage limit to turn off cellular data when it's reached, eliminating unexpected charges.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Mobile network. Or, in quick settings, touch & hold .
  • ![image 842](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile842.png)

  • 2. If needed, tap the SIM name.
  • 3. Tap Data warning & limit.
  • 4. To set a warning, turn Set data warning on , then tap Data warning and enter the amount of data.
  • ![image 843](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile843.png)

  • 5. To set a usage limit, turn Set data limit on , then tap Data limit and enter the amount of data.
  • ![image 844](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile844.png)

    Restrict background data

    Even when you’re not actively using them, most apps use data in the background to sync information and deliver notifications.

    To conserve data when you’re running low, use Data Saver to turn off background data for all apps. You can also prevent specific apps from ever using background data, whether Data Saver is on or not.

    Page 189

    Notifications stop: When you turn off background data for an app, you won't receive ANY notifications from the app until you open the app so it can sync.

    ##### Restrict for all apps when you’re low on data

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Data Saver.
  • 2. Turn Use Data Saver on . You'll see in your status bar and all apps are prevented from using background data.
  • ![image 845](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile845.png)

    ![image 846](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile846.png)

  • 3. To allow certain apps to continue using background data, tap Unrestricted data, then next to the app name, slide the switch on .
  • ![image 847](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile847.png)

    ##### Restrict for specific apps indefinitely

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Mobile network.
  • 2. Tap the SIM name.
  • 3. Tap App data usage.
  • 4. Tap an app, then turn Background data off .
  • ![image 848](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile848.png)

    Dual SIMs

    If your phone has two SIMs, cellular data is active on only one SIM at a time. You can control which SIM is used.

    Share your internet connection

    When you need an internet connection for another device, share your phone's:

    Page 190

    • For wireless sharing with another Wi-Fi capable device, turn on your Wi-Fi hotspot, which is great for

    range and speed. This uses more power, so it's best when you can plug in.

  • • For wireless sharing with a device in close proximity (like a phone next to a computer), you can use Bluetooth tethering, offering you less interference in crowded Wi-Fi environments, more privacy, and less power consumption than your Wi-Fi hotspot.
  • • To share over a physical connection, connect your phone to a device with a USB cable, providing a more
  • stable, speedy, and safe connection in some situations than sharing over wireless connections. Your cellular plan must support data sharing. If you don’t know, contact your carrier.

    Use your hotspot

    ##### Step 1: Set it up

  • 1. Check that:
  • • Cellular data is on. (If cellular data is off, your phone doesn't have an internet connection to share.)
  • • Data Saver is off.
  • 2. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Hotspot & tethering.
  • 3. Tap Wi-Fi hotspot and do any:
  • • Make it easier to find and connect to your hotspot. Tap Hotspot name and change it.
  • • Prevent others from seeing your phone's network name. Check Hide my device.
  • • See your current password or change it. Tap Hotspot password.
  • • Improve hotspot signal. For less interference, change the broadcast channel/band to 5GHz. For a stronger signal, change it to 2GHz. (This feature is not available in all countries.)
  • • Help other devices find your hotspot. Tap Compatibility and make sure Extend compatibility is on
  • ![image 849](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile849.png)

    .

    Page 191

  • • Increase the hotspot connection speed. If you no longer need to assist others in finding your hotspot, turn Compatibility > Extend compatibility off.
  • • Limit the number of devices that can connect, or restrict access to only devices you specify. Tap Manage devices.
  • • Save battery life. Tap Timeout settings to configure when the hotspot should automatically turn off if no one is using it.
  • ##### Step 2: Connect devices

  • 1. Check that cellular data is on. If cellular data is off, your phone doesn't have an internet connection to share.
  • 2. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Hotspot & tethering.
  • 3. Tap Wi-Fi hotspot.
  • 4. Turn Use Wi‑Fi hotspot on , then plug in your phone to charge. Using the hotspot really drains the battery! When your hotspot is active, you'll see in the status bar.
  • ![image 850](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile850.png)

    ![image 851](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile851.png)

  • 5. Set up the connection.
  • ####### To connect Do this

    A phone a. On your phone, next to the hotspot's name, tap and unlock if prompted. b. Use the other phone's camera to scan the QR code that provides the password.

    ![image 852](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile852.png)

    Other device a. Open the device’s Wi-Fi settings. b. Select your phone’s hotspot. c. Enter the hotspot password. Learn how to find the hotspot's password.

    ##### View or change password

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Hotspot & tethering.
  • 2. Tap Wi-Fi hotspot.
  • 3. Tap Hotspot password to see the current password.
  • Page 192

  • 4. To change the password, type over the current password.
  • Note: Although you can turn off passwords for your hotspot, keeping a password prevents unauthorized usage of your cellular data.

    ##### Manage security

    If you're getting a warning about weak security for your hotspot, set a strong hotspot password. Also, secure your hotspot by selecting a protocol:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Hotspot & tethering > Wi-Fi hotspot.
  • 2. Tap Security.
  • 3. Adjust settings:
  • • WP3 is the most secure choice.
  • • Choose WPA2/WPA3 for newer devices (made after July 2020). Older devices may not be able to connect to a WPA3 or WPA2/WPA3 mixed network.
  • • Choose WPA2 (AES) for the widest compatibility with both current and older devices.
  • • Don’t use None for this setting.
  • Manage hotspot connections

    View number of connections To see the number of devices connected to your hotspot:

  • • In quick settings, look below .
  • ![image 853](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile853.png)

  • • Or, go to Settings > Network & internet > Hotspot & tethering and look under Wi-Fi hotspot.
  • By assigning a password for your hotspot, you ensure that people can't connect to your hotspot without your knowledge or permission.

    Disconnect everyone To disconnect all devices and prevent them from reconnecting:

    Page 193

  • 1. Turn the hotspot off.
  • 2. Change the password.
  • 3. Turn the hotspot back on to continue using it. Control who can connect
  • If you’re experiencing performance issues, you can limit the number of connections allowed or temporarily disconnect devices.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Hotspot & tethering.
  • 2. Tap Wi-Fi hotspot > Manage devices.
  • 3. Do any of the following:
  • • To limit number of devices allowed, tap Device limit.
  • • To temporarily disconnect devices until your next hotspot session, under Connected devices, tap the device's name > Disconnect. The device will remain unable to connect until you turn off and restart the hotspot.
  • To allow only specified devices to connect:

  • 1. Get the MAC addresses of the devices you want to allow to connect. (Connect devices to the hotspot normally, then go to Manage devices, and tap the name of each connected device to view its MAC address.)
  • 2. Tap Manage allowed devices > Add allowed device.
  • 3. For each device, enter the MAC address and device name.
  • 4. Once you add allowed devices, they are saved unless you delete them, and you can turn this feature on and off by checking or unchecking Allow all devices any time.
  • To restrict access for a previously allowed device, tap the device name, then tap Delete.

    USB tethering

    To connect a device to the internet using your phone's cellular data and a USB cable:

  • 1. Check that cellular data is on. If cellular data is off, your phone doesn't have an internet connection to share.
  • Page 194

  • 2. Connect your phone to your computer with a USB cable.
  • 3. On your phone, go to Settings.
  • 4. Tap Network & internet > Hotspot & tethering.
  • 5. Turn on USB tethering to start the connection. You'll see in your notifications.
  • ![image 854](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile854.png)

    To stop the connection, tap the notification and turn off USB tethering, then disconnect your phone and computer.

    Bluetooth tethering

    To connect a device to the internet using your phone's cellular data and a Bluetooth connection:

  • 1. Check that cellular data is on. If cellular data is off, your phone doesn't have an internet connection to share.
  • 2. Turn on Bluetooth on your phone and pair with the other device.
  • 3. Set up the other device to get its network connection via Bluetooth.
  • 4. On your phone, go to Settings.
  • 5. Tap Network & internet > Hotspot & tethering.
  • 6. Turn on Bluetooth tethering to start the connection. To stop the connection, turn off Bluetooth or touch & hold in quick settings and disconnect the device.
  • ![image 855](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile855.png)

    Connect to VPNs

    A virtual private network (VPN) lets you access files on a secure network like an office network with a firewall. Contact your network administrator for VPN settings and any additional apps or requirements.

    To set up a VPN connection:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet.
  • 2. Tap VPN. If prompted, set a screen lock PIN or password.
  • 3. Tap .
  • Page 195

    ![image 856](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile856.png)

  • 4. Choose the type of VPN and enter settings from the network administrator.
  • 5. To always remain connected to the VPN, check Always-on VPN.
  • 6. Tap Save. The network is stored in the VPN list so you can select it when you need to connect.
  • Add a Private DNS service

    Private DNS protects you when you browse the internet and use apps on your phone. It:

  • • Encrypts your data over a secure channel
  • • Prevents you from being redirected to fraudulent websites that appear legitimate
  • • Prevents you from receiving fraudulent communications from sources that appear legitimate (phishing)
  • • Prevents others from stealing your information as it’s being sent or received (snooping)
  • Your phone is set to Private DNS > Automatic by default. So, as long as your mobile or internet service providers offer encrypted DNS, you're protected. Check with your mobile and internet providers.

    ##### Private DNS services

    The only time you need to change this setting is if you have a free or paid DNS service to use, instead of relying on your mobile or internet providers. To add the service to your phone:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Private DNS.
  • 2. Select Private DNS provider hostname.
  • 3. Touch Enter hostname of DNS provider.
  • 4. Enter the URL for your DNS provider and touch Save. If you no longer want to use the private DNS service:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Network & internet > Private DNS.
  • 2. Select Automatic. We don't recommend turning Private DNS off.
  • Connect with Bluetooth

    Page 196

    You can use Bluetooth to connect your phone to other devices without a cord. After you pair a Bluetooth device for the first time, your devices can connect automatically.

    Turn Bluetooth on/off

    Bluetooth uses more of your battery, so turn it off when not in use.

  • 1. Open quick settings.
  • 2. Tap to switch it on/off.
  • ![image 857](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile857.png)

    Pair with and use devices

    To connect with a new Bluetooth accessory or other device, you need to pair with it. You only need to do this once for each device.

    Your devices stay paired until you unpair them. Pair with a device

  • 1. Set the device you want to pair (accessory, computer, other phone, etc.) to Bluetooth discovery mode so that your phone can find it. See the device manufacturer’s instructions.
  • 2. On your phone, go to Settings > Connected devices.
  • 3. Tap . As the phone searches for available devices, you'll see .
  • ![image 858](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile858.png)

    ![image 859](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile859.png)

  • 4. Tap an available device to connect.
  • 5. Do any of the following:
  • • If a pairing code appears on your phone and Bluetooth device, make sure the codes match. (If they don't, tap Cancel, verify the name of the device you want to pair with, and try again.)
  • • If your device shows a passkey (like 0000 or 1234), enter it on your phone. If you don't see a place to enter it, swipe down from the top of your screen and tap the Bluetooth notification.
  • • If your device doesn't show a passkey and you must enter one for the device to pair, see the device manufacturers' instructions.
  • Page 197

  • 6. Tap Pair on your phone. Check the other device for a pairing prompt as well; if it has one, you'll need to confirm on both devices or pairing will fail.
  • 7. Set sharing options if you'll want to share contacts, phone audio, media audio, or internet access.
  • Tip: If you use a screen lock, you can define a paired Bluetooth device as a trusted device, keeping your phone unlocked while connected to it. When you disconnect or move out of range, your phone locks again. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings > Smart Lock > Trusted devices.

    Can't pair? Troubleshoot the issue. Use paired device

    Tip: Bluetooth connections can really drain your battery. Save power by turning Bluetooth off when you're not connected to a device.

    After pairing with a device, you’ll need to set sharing options and then you can use Bluetooth to:

  • • Make or receive calls with a headset
  • • Make or receive calls and play music over your car's audio system
  • • Transfer music
  • • Share photos
  • • Share contacts
  • • Share your phone's internet connection with your computer Reconnect with a device
  • 1. Open quick settings and turn on.
  • ![image 860](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile860.png)

  • 2. Turn on the Bluetooth device.
  • Configure, rename, or remove

    ##### Set sharing options for paired device

  • 1. Go to Settings > Connected devices.
  • 2. Tap by the device's name.
  • Page 198

    ![image 861](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile861.png)

  • 3. Turn sharing options on or off.
  • 4. On the paired device or in the device’s app, look for Bluetooth settings to review and adjust. For more information, see the paired device manufacturer’s instructions.
  • ##### Change phone's name

    You'll see your phone's name on other Bluetooth devices when you're pairing with them. You can change the name.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Connected devices.
  • 2. Tap > Device name.
  • ![image 862](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile862.png)

    ##### Remove (unpair) a device

  • 1. Go to Settings > Connected devices.
  • 2. Under Saved devices, find the device to remove. Tap See all if needed.
  • 3. Next to the device, tap .
  • ![image 863](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile863.png)

  • 4. Tap > Forget device.
  • ![image 864](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile864.png)

    ##### Turn off Bluetooth scanning

    When Bluetooth is off, your phone can still scan and automatically connect to a previously paired device. To prevent this, turn off Bluetooth scanning.

    Page 199

    To turn off scanning:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Location.
  • 2. Tap Location services.
  • 3. Turn Bluetooth scanning off . If you turn this off, apps that use your location won't work as well.
  • ![image 865](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile865.png)

    Make contactless payments

    Only some versions of this phone, sold in certain countries, support this feature.

    Use NFC (near-field communication) to pay quickly and securely at checkout registers by touching your phone to an electronic reader.

    Set up contactless payment

  • 1. Make sure you have:
  • • Set up a payment app on your phone. Install one from Play Store if needed.
  • • Turned on NFC.
  • 2. Go to Settings > Connected devices > Connection preferences.
  • 3. Tap NFC and make sure it's on.
  • 4. Tap Contactless payments and adjust settings:
  • • To change payment apps, tap Default payment app and select the app.
  • • If you have multiple payment apps, tap Use default payment app, then chose when to use your
  • default app (always or except when another payment app is open).

    Page 200

    Note: This feature manages payment apps. It doesn't include money transfer apps.

    Make a payment

  • 1. Make sure NFC is on and that the terminal has this symbol:
  • ![image 866](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile866.png)

  • 2. Unlock your phone and tap its back to the terminal.
  • Your payment app might require you to open the app and enter a PIN before touching your phone to the terminal.

    Turn off contactless payment

    Turn off NFC.

    Tip: You can also open your payment app and turn off contactless payments. Not all payment apps support this option.

    Share or receive with NFC

    Only some versions of this phone, sold in certain countries, support this feature.

    NFC (near-field communication) makes it easy to securely share with sources you trust, without having to type a lot of information or struggle with pairing.

    Turn NFC on

  • 1. Go to Settings > Connected devices > Connection preferences.
  • 2. Tap NFC and turn it on . If you don't see this option, then your phone doesn't support NFC.
  • ![image 867](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile867.png)

    Share content between devices Share content from your phone to another device by touching the devices together (usually back to back). You can share content using the Files app. To learn how, read Google's help.

    Page 201

    Read NFC tags on posters and signs

    Receive web links, e-coupons, brochures, maps, and more from an NFC tag. Look for the NFC logo on NFCenabled accessories, posters, signs and store displays. Just touch the back of your phone to within 2 cm of the logo to receive its tag information.

    ![image 868](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile868.png)

    Enable NFC icon in status bar

    To know whether NFC is on by glancing at your status bar:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Connected devices.
  • 2. Tap Connection preferences > NFC.
  • 3. Turn NFC icon on . When NFC is on, you'll see in your status bar.
  • ![image 869](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile869.png)

    ![image 870](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile870.png)

    Turn NFC off

    Open quick settings and tap .

    ![image 871](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile871.png)

    Share files and links with nearby devices

    Share content easily and securely. You can share things like photos or videos, contacts, documents, and links. Send them to another device near you without using an internet connection.

    You can share with Android 6+ devices and Chromebooks, and with selected Windows devices through an app. Sharing with iPhones isn’t supported. For more about supported devices and countries, see Google's help.

    Send and receive content

    Page 202

    ##### Turn on sharing

  • 1. On your phone, make sure Bluetooth and Location are turned on.
  • 2. Open quick settings and tap . Or, go to Settings > Connected devices > Connection preferences > Quick Share.
  • ![image 872](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile872.png)

  • 3. Tap Who can share with you.
  • 4. Choose who can see your phone for sharing. Share content
  • 1. Open the content to share.
  • 2. Tap or tap > Share, then select Quick Share. Your phone will look for nearby devices.
  • ![image 873](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile873.png)

    ![image 874](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile874.png)

  • 3. Hold your phone and the other phone close to each other.
  • 4. When you see the other phone in your list of nearby devices, tap its name to send the item. The other person can accept or reject the transfer.
  • ##### Receive content

  • 1. When someone shares content with you, you’ll get a notification. If needed, tap the notification to make your phone visible.
  • 2. To get the content, tap Accept. Turn off sharing
  • 1. Open quick settings and tap .
  • ![image 875](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile875.png)

  • 2. Turn Who can share with you off .
  • Page 203

    ![image 876](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile876.png)

    Tip: You can change your phone’s name to something less identifiable before sharing or receiving. Go to Settings > Connected devices > Connection preferences > Quick Share > Device name and edit the name.

    Choose who can see you for sharing

    To adjust who can share with you:

  • Open quick settings and tap .
  • ![image 877](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile877.png)

    Or, go to Settings > Connected devices > Connection preferences > Quick Share > Who can share with you.

  • Choose who can see your phone for sharing:
  • • Your devices: Your phone is visible to your other devices that are signed into the same Google

    account, even when the screen is off or locked.

  • • Contacts: Your phone is visible to your nearby contacts when the screen is on and unlocked.
  • • Everyone: Your phone is visible to anyone nearby when the screen is on and unlocked. To limit
  • access to 10 minutes, mark the checkbox.

    If a contact isn't available, you'll need to add an email address associated with their Google account to their contact info.

    Fix an issue

    If you can't share content with someone, try these steps:

  • 1. On both phones, check that Bluetooth is on.
  • Page 204

  • 2. On both phones, check that Location is on.
  • 3. Bring the devices close together, within 1 foot (30 cm) of each other.
  • 4. Turn airplane mode on and then off.
  • 5. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 6. Wait until no one else is sharing content with the other phone.
  • Transfer files between phone and computer (USB)

    You can transfer music, photos, and other files between your phone's storage and computer (in either direction). Use a USB cable that's capable of data transfer and isn't for charging only.

    Step 1: Connect phone to computer

  • 1. With the phone and computer turned on, connect the phone and computer with a USB cable.
  • 2. Unlock the phone.
  • 3. Change the USB connection mode for the type of file you're transferring: File transfer or PTP for photos and videos.
  • 4. If you're transferring videos, you can convert them to AVC (advanced video coding) so they're compatible with more media players. Although they'll play on more media players, the quality may be reduced. Turn Convert videos to AVC on or off .
  • ![image 878](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile878.png)

    ![image 879](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile879.png)

    Step 2: Transfer files

    ##### With a Windows computer

  • 1. Ensure the phone is properly connected to the computer using the steps above.
  • If you don't unlock the phone and change the USB connection to allow file transfers, you won't see any files on your phone.

  • 2. On your computer, open File Explorer, click the name of your phone, and navigate to its internal storage.
  • 3. If you selected PTP when you connected the phone, in File Explorer choose whether to import pictures and videos automatically or manually.
  • 4. Open a second File Explorer window to see your computer folders.
  • Page 205

  • 5. Navigate to the folders or files to transfer, then drag and drop them to and from the open phone storage and computer folders.
  • ##### With a Mac

  • Ensure the phone is properly connected to the computer using the steps above.
  • If you don't unlock the phone and change the USB connection to allow file transfers, you won't see any files on your phone.

  • On your computer, download the Android File Transfer application from www.android.com/filetransfer and follow the onscreen instructions.
  • Where to find transferred files

    Files are stored in these folders on your phone:

  • • DCIM: (Digital Camera Images) Photos and videos taken with the Camera app
  • • Pictures: Photos you edited and photos from apps other than Camera
  • • Download: Files downloaded from the internet
  • • Music: Files for apps that play music
  • • Ringtones: Sound files for ringtones
  • • Notifications: Sound files for notifications
  • • Alarms: Sound files for alarms
  • Fix an issue

    If you’re having issues, try these troubleshooting steps.

    Change USB preferences

    Available USB modes Smart Connect: Pair and connect with Smart Connect File transfer: Allow all types of files to transfer from your phone to another device. USB tethering: Share your phone’s mobile data connection with another device. MIDI: Connect electronic musical instruments. PTP: Allow only photos to transfer from your phone to another device. Ready For: Use your phone as a mobile desktop. Learn more. No data transfer: Charge battery over USB.

    Page 206

    Change USB mode

    The default USB mode is No data transfer, which means your connection is charging the phone only. To allow your phone to communicate across USB for anything other than charging the phone, you need to change the USB connection mode.

    ##### From the popup

  • 1. Connect your phone to another device using your USB cable. You’ll see a popup that lets you choose the connection mode.
  • 2. Tap the mode you want to use. If you don't see the mode, tap to open the full settings screen, then select it.
  • ![image 880](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile880.png)

    ##### From notifications

  • 1. With your phone connected to another device using your USB cable, swipe down from the top of the screen and look for the notification, which shows your current USB mode.
  • ![image 881](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile881.png)

  • 2. Tap if needed.
  • ![image 882](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile882.png)

  • 3. Tap the notification for more options.
  • ![image 883](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile883.png)

  • 4. Tap the mode you want to use. From Settings
  • 1. With your phone connected to another device using your USB cable, go to Settings > Connected devices > USB.
  • 2. Under Use USB for, select a mode.
  • Keep in charging mode only

    Page 207

    If you don’t want to see a popup with choices of USB modes when you connect your phone to a device, you can turn the popup off. The mode defaults to No data transfer, for charging. And to change modes, you can use the notification or Settings app.

    To turn off the popup:

  • 1. With your phone connected to another device using your USB cable, go to Settings > Connected devices > USB.
  • 2. Turn Show popup to choose desired mode off .
  • ![image 884](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile884.png)

    Cast screen or media to TV

    Mirror with Chromecast

    To mirror your screen on a TV, showing all apps and screens you use on your phone, you must:

  • • Use a TV with Chromecast built-in.
  • • Or, plug a Chromecast into your TV’s HDMI port. (Learn how.) To start casting:
  • 1. Make sure your phone and Chromecast or TV with Chromecast are connected to the same Wi-Fi network.
  • 2. Go to Settings > Connected devices > Connection preferences > Cast. Or, from quick settings, tap .
  • ![image 885](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile885.png)

  • 3. Tap the name of the Chromecast or TV to connect. To stop:
  • • On the casting notification, tap > Disconnect.
  • ![image 886](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile886.png)

  • • Or, from quick settings, tap > Disconnect.
  • Page 208

    ![image 887](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile887.png)

    Cast an app

    You can cast an app if you:

  • • Have a smart TV that supports mobile apps for viewing or playing media from your phone. See your TV user guide for instructions to connect your phone.
  • • Have Chromecast or a TV with Chromecast built-in. Miracast is not supported. To cast an app:
  • 1. Make sure your phone and smart TV or Chromecast are connected to the same Wi-Fi network.
  • 2. In a cast-compatible app (like YouTube), tap .
  • ![image 888](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile888.png)

    If you don't see or don't see your TV listed in the casting options, try these troubleshooting steps. While casting:

    ![image 889](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile889.png)

  • • You’ll see in the status bar.
  • ![image 890](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile890.png)

  • • You can still make and receive calls and use your phone’s other features. To stop casting:
  • • In the app that's casting, tap and tap the option to disconnect.
  • ![image 891](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile891.png)

  • • From the notification, tap .
  • ![image 892](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile892.png)

    Page 209

    Cast personal media with Wi-Fi Direct

    If your TV supports Wi-Fi Direct, set up a connection between your phone and TV so that you can view or play media from your phone.

    For information about using Wi-Fi Direct after you've connected, see the user guide that came with your TV.

    Fix an issue After each step, see if your issue is fixed. Check the basics

  • 1. If you’re using a VPN, turn off the VPN and try again.
  • 2. Make sure your phone and Chromecast or smart TV are connected to the same Wi-Fi network.
  • 3. Move your phone to within 15 feet of your Chromecast or smart TV.
  • 4. If you're using Chromecast or a TV with Chromecast built-in, check for updates to the Home app. Phone can't find smart TV First, check the basics. Then:
  • 1. On the TV, open the app and start a video. Then on your phone, open the app and try casting to the TV again.
  • 2. Link the app on your phone to the app on the TV:
  • a. On your phone, open the app, open its settings, and look for options to watch on TV. (For example, YouTube > > Settings > Watch on TV > Link with TV code.)
  • ![image 893](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile893.png)

  • b. Follow the app’s onscreen instructions to complete setup.
  • 3. Reboot your Wi-Fi router.
  • 4. Check your TV for firmware and app updates. See the TV manufacturer’s support website for information.
  • 5. Check your TV manufacturer’s support website to make sure the app is still supported on your TV model.
  • ##### Check for app help

    If you’re having issues casting with one of these apps, check their help center for troubleshooting information:

    Page 210

  • • Netflix
  • • Amazon Prime Video
  • • YouTube
  • • Google TV
  • Print from your phone

    Set up printing

    To connect your printer and phone:

  • 1. Before you begin:
  • • If your printer is connected to a Wi-Fi network, be sure the phone and your printer are connected to the same network.
  • • If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct, set up a direct connection between the phone and printer.
  • 2. Go to Settings > Connected devices > Connection preferences > Printing.
  • 3. Touch Default Print Service to automatically find your printer. Once your printer is found, it is ready to print.
  • If your printer isn't found in Default Print Service:

  • 1. Touch Add service.
  • 2. In Play Store, search for “[printer brand] print service” and install the app for the printer's service plugin.
  • 3. Once installed, return to Settings > Connected devices > Connection preferences > Printing and touch the print service plugin name to automatically find your printer.
  • 4. If your printer isn't found automatically, touch > Add printer > .
  • ![image 894](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile894.png)

    ![image 895](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile895.png)

  • 5. Enter the printer's name and IP address (found in your printer settings on connected computer).
  • Page 211

    Print

  • 1. Open the item to print, such as:
  • • A photo in Photos
  • • An email
  • • A document in Drive
  • • A web page in Chrome
  • 2. Tap or > Print. (If you're using Chrome, > Share > Print.)
  • ![image 896](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile896.png)

    ![image 897](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile897.png)

    ![image 898](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile898.png)

  • 3. Select printer options if needed.
  • 4. Tap .
  • ![image 899](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile899.png)

    About wireless sharing

    What you can share

    You can share your photos and videos, contacts, screenshots, and downloaded files.

    When sharing photos and videos

    Page 212

    When deciding how to share your photos or videos, consider these factors:

  • • Resolution (high versus low) of the photo or video; high resolution uses more data
  • • Number of photos to share (one photo or a few or an entire vacation album)
  • • Whether you want to share on the internet or from device-to-device
  • • Length of availability for sharing
  • Ways to share

    Choosing how to share depends on the type and amount of content you're sharing, and how widely you want to share it.

    Quick Share Good for:

  • • Sharing securely with nearby devices
  • • Sharing a link, a contact, one or a few photos
  • • Fast, immediate sharing Things to consider:
  • • The other device must be within 1 foot (30 cm).
  • • Can't be used to share with iPhones.
  • • No Wi-Fi or cellular data connection required. Learn more.
  • Bluetooth Good for:

  • • Sharing from phone-to-phone or other connected device
  • • Fast sharing Things to consider:
  • • Your phone must be paired and connected with another device.
  • NFC Good for:
  • • Quickly sharing with a nearby phone, tablet, or computer
  • • No need for pairing devices (Simply touch them back-to-back.) Things to consider:
  • • Devices you share with must have NFC.
  • • Both your phone and the other device must be on and unlocked. Learn how
  • Message (MMS) Good for:

    Page 213

  • • Sharing one photo or a low-resolution video
  • • Sharing with a friend or group
  • • Sharing immediately, as an event is happening Things to consider:
  • • You and your recipients must have cellular data plans to receive multimedia text messages.
  • • Sending high resolution photos via text message uses more more data.
  • • Photos and video remain available until the recipient deletes the message.
  • • High quality videos are too large and cannot be shared in text messages. Learn how
  • Email Good for:

  • • Sharing one or a few photos
  • • Sharing with a friend or group Things to consider:
  • • Some email providers limit attachment sizes. For large files, upload the file to a cloud storage and email the link instead of the file.
  • • Email attachments remain available for download until the recipient deletes the email. Learn how
  • Cloud Good for:

  • • Sharing high resolution photos, multiple photos, entire albums, and videos
  • • Controlling sharing via links
  • • Controlling how long you share something (You can easily delete it or turn off sharing privileges.) Things to consider:
  • • Many cloud services offer free storage with a basic account.
  • • Cloud storage services are fairly secure, but not completely free from security breaches, so upload wisely.
  • • Upload over Wi-Fi to prevent cellular data charges. Learn how
  • Social app Good for:

  • • Sharing publicly, with large groups of friends, followers, and subscribers
  • • Sharing one photo at a time, or many photos, albums, or videos
  • • Controlling how long you share something (You can easily delete it or turn off sharing.) Things to consider:
  • • Understand social network privacy and sharing policies before you post.
  • • Review updates to social network privacy and sharing policies often.
  • Page 214

  • • Requires a Wi-Fi or cellular data connection.
  • Smart Connect Good for:

  • • Sharing files between phone and PC or tablet
  • • Sharing clipboard between phone and PC or tablet Things to consider:
  • • Smart Connect can also share mobile data with your PC, access Android apps from your PC, use your phone as a webcam on PC, and much more.
  • • Learn more at Settings > Connected devices > Smart Connect
  • Adjust screen brightness To set your screen's brightness, open quick settings and slide . Your phone automatically adjusts your screen to the light around you, with Adaptive brightness. When the feature is on, you can still fine tune the brightness in quick settings. To turn this feature off:

    ![image 900](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile900.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display.
  • 2. Turn Adaptive brightness off.
  • Tips:

  • • If the lowest setting on the slider is still too bright, you can make the screen extra dim.
  • ![image 901](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile901.png)

  • • If Adaptive brightness stops working as desired, you can reset it to retrain the system.
  • Use Dark theme Give your eyes and battery a break by changing to a dark background. When Dark theme is on:

  • • The dark background applies to your settings and apps.
  • • Colors don't change in media, such as videos.
  • • Not all apps support Dark theme. To change those apps to a dark background, in order to reduce eye strain while reading, use color inversion.
  • Page 215

    When it's off, if you run low on battery, Battery saver switches temporarily to the dark background until the phone has charged. Turn it on or off 1. Go to Settings > Display.

  • Turn Dark theme on or off .
  • ![image 902](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile902.png)

    ![image 903](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile903.png)

    Tip: To add Dark theme to quick settings, open quick settings, tap , then drag the tile where you want it.

    ![image 904](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile904.png)

    ![image 905](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile905.png)

    ##### Set a schedule

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Dark theme.
  • 2. Tap Schedule, then select one:
  • • To start and stop at specified times, tap Turns on at custom time and enter times.
  • • To use from dusk to dawn, tap Turns on from sunset to sunrise.
  • Choose color mode

    You can change the intensity of color on your screen for a realistic or enhanced look.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display.
  • 2. Tap Colors.
  • 3. Choose one:
  • • To see the most accurate colors, tap Natural.
  • • To see the most vivid colors, tap Saturated.
  • Page 216

  • 4. To change the color temperature, drag toward Warm or Cool.
  • ![image 906](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile906.png)

    Tips:

  • • If colors don't appear as you expect, troubleshoot the issue.
  • • If you're color blind, use color correction instead.
  • Change text and icon size

    You can make the text or other items on your screen smaller or larger for your comfort and convenience. You can also make text appear bolder and increase contrast to see it better.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Display size and text.
  • 2. Do any of the following:
  • • To adjust only the size of text on the screen, drag Font size to the size you want.
  • • To adjust the size of icons along with their labels, drag Display size to the size you want.
  • • To make the text darker and heavier, turn Bold text on .
  • ![image 907](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile907.png)

  • • To make text stand out better against its background, turn High contrast text on . When it's on,
  • ![image 908](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile908.png)

    a thin black line is added around white text, or a thin white line is added around black text.

  • 3. To preview how the changes affect your icons and text, swipe the Preview window.
  • Page 217

    Undo your changes To reset the display size and text to the original settings:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Display size and text.
  • 2. Tap Reset settings > Reset. If you need more help seeing the screen Turn on accessibility features, like magnification to zoom in and out or a screen reader to hear audio descriptions of what you touch on the screen. Adjust other font and display options Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen, then tap Personalize. Learn more.
  • ![image 909](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile909.png)

    Adjust refresh rate

    The action you see on your screen is a series of frames strung together, like a movie. A higher display refresh rate shows more frames per second, making the action smoother and more responsive. This uses more battery power.

    You can adjust the display refresh rate, depending on your needs:

  • • For the smoothest, most responsive display, use the highest refresh rate.
  • • To save battery power, use a lower rate.
  • Note: When Battery saver is on, the refresh rate is set to 60Hz.

    To raise or lower the refresh rate:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display.
  • 2. Tap Display refresh rate.
  • 3. Select the rate.
  • Show apps full screen

    By default, apps avoid the banded area across the front camera, but you can set your apps to use full screen and stretch across the entire display.

    You can turn it on or off for individual apps or all apps.

    Page 218

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Full screen.
  • 2. Adjust the settings:
  • • To adjust an individual app, next to the app's name, turn it on or off .
  • ![image 910](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile910.png)

    ![image 911](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile911.png)

  • • To adjust all apps, tap > Turn on for all apps or Turn off for all apps.
  • ![image 912](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile912.png)

  • 3. If you don't see the change or it doesn't display correctly, do either to close and restart the app:
  • • Open recent apps and swipe it from the list, then reopen the app.
  • • Restart the phone, then reopen the app.
  • If you're using an app and want to toggle full screen on or off, you can do it from the recent apps list:

  • 1. Drag up from the bottom of the home screen, hold, then release. Or, tap if you're using 3-button navigation.
  • ![image 913](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile913.png)

  • 2. Tap the app's icon.
  • 3. Tap Full screen to switch it on or off:
  • • extends the app screen around the camera.
  • Page 219

    ![image 914](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile914.png)

  • • prevents the app from extending around the camera.
  • ![image 915](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile915.png)

    Stop automatic rotation

    Prevent screen from rotating Open quick settings and turn Auto-rotate off. In this mode, you can manually rotate the current app. Turn your phone the direction you want, then touch

    ![image 916](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile916.png)

    in the corner.

    ![image 917](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile917.png)

    Allow screen to rotate To allow rotation for all apps, open quick settings and turn Auto-rotate on. You can also adjust this in Settings > Display > Auto-rotate screen.

    ![image 918](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile918.png)

    Tip: If your home screen isn't rotating but Auto-rotate is on, then check your home screen settings. Touch & hold a blank spot on your home screen, then tap Home settings > Allow Home screen rotation.

    ![image 919](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile919.png)

    Adjust Edge Lights

    Lights show on your phone's edges to let you know the phone is charging or to alert you of an incoming call, notification, or alarm.

    To change how they look and when they turn on, go to Settings > Display. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Display.

    ![image 920](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile920.png)

    Turn lights on/off

    Page 220

    To stop or restart the lights:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display.
  • 2. Tap Edge Lights and turn them off or on .
  • ![image 921](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile921.png)

    ![image 922](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile922.png)

    Change color of lights

  • 1. In Settings > Display > Edge Lights, tap .
  • ![image 923](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile923.png)

  • 2. Tap a color to select it.
  • Customize when your lights turn on

    If your phone is lighting up too much, you can turn the lights off by event (calls, alarms, notifications), by schedule, or when your screen is facing up.

    ##### Turn lights on/off for calls, alarms, or app notifications

  • In Settings > Display > Edge Lights, tap . 2. For each feature, turn lights off or on .
  • ![image 924](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile924.png)

    ![image 925](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile925.png)

    ![image 926](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile926.png)

    Page 221

    ##### Turn off for a scheduled period of time To keep the lights dark at certain times:

  • 1. In Settings > Display > Edge Lights, tap .
  • ![image 927](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile927.png)

  • 2. Turn Turn off for a scheduled period on .
  • ![image 928](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile928.png)

  • 3. Enter start and end times. Show lights only when screen faces down
  • 1. In Settings > Display > Edge Lights, tap .
  • ![image 929](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile929.png)

  • 2. Turn Only show when the screen is facing down on .
  • ![image 930](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile930.png)

  • 3. To set the intensity of the lights you see when the screen faces down, adjust Show at full brightness when the screen is facing down:
  • • For bright lights, turn it on .
  • ![image 931](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile931.png)

  • • For dim lights, turn it off .
  • ![image 932](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile932.png)

    Stop screen flicker in dark environments

    Page 222

    If you're using your phone in dark environments and the screen flicker is irritating your eyes, use Flicker prevention.

    To turn it on or off:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display.
  • 2. Turn Flicker prevention on or off .
  • ![image 933](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile933.png)

    ![image 934](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile934.png)

    Adjust colors at night

    If you selected a color mode, it will resume outside of night hours.

    Automatically change screen to amber

    Your phone can automatically filter out blue light and adjust screen colors to warmer tones at night, making it easier to view and read in dim light. You might even fall asleep more easily.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Night Light.
  • 2. Touch Schedule, then:
  • • To start and stop at specified times, touch Turns on at custom time and enter times.
  • • To filter from dusk to dawn, touch Turns on from sunset to sunrise.
  • To adjust filter intensity, open quick settings, touch & hold , then use the slider to change the intensity of the amber filter.

    ![image 935](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile935.png)

    Turn it off To temporarily switch back to regular colors from amber, open quick settings and turn off Night Light. To stop automatically changing to amber, select Settings > Display > Night Light > Schedule > None.

    Page 223

    ![image 936](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile936.png)

    Automatically change screen to grayscale

    To help you wind down at night, your phone can change to grayscale (black and white).

  • 1. Go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls > Bedtime mode.
  • 2. Touch Bedtime routine, then set your schedule.
  • 3. Touch Customize > Screen options at bedtime.
  • 4. Turn Grayscale on .
  • ![image 937](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile937.png)

    Turn it off To temporarily switch back to regular colors from grayscale, open quick settings and touch . To stop automatically changing to grayscale at night, go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls > Bedtime mode > Customize > Screen options at bedtime and turn Grayscale off .

    ![image 938](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile938.png)

    ![image 939](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile939.png)

    See Peek Display notifications

    About Peek Display notifications

    When your screen is off, battery-friendly notifications fade in and out, lighting only the pixels needed and showing notifications delivered since you last woke your screen. You can select which apps show notifications and limit content to control your privacy.

    These notifications aren't displayed:

  • • When the phone is in your pocket or purse
  • • When the phone is lying face down
  • • When you are on a call
  • • When Do Not Disturb is on
  • Page 224

    Respond to Peek Display notifications Check for notifications If you haven’t seen activity for a while, to wake your phone, bump it. Peek at contents Touch & hold an icon to preview the notification. View more and take action For more details and notifications, drag an app icon up, or drag it to . Then:

    ![image 940](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile940.png)

  • • To respond, drag the app icon to an action, like reply or archive .
  • ![image 941](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile941.png)

    ![image 942](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile942.png)

  • • To dismiss, drag the app icon to Dismiss. Change Peek Display settings
  • ####### 1. Go to Settings > Display > Peek Display.Or, open the Moto app and tap > Display > Peek Display.

    ![image 943](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile943.png)

    ######## 2. If needed, turn Peek Display on .

    ![image 944](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile944.png)

  • 3. Tap Settings and do any of the following:
  • • To change the style of the clock on the notifications screen, tap Clock, select the type, then tap for more options.
  • ![image 945](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile945.png)

  • • To see a black background for these notifications instead of an animated one that fades in and out, turn Animated background off .
  • ![image 946](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile946.png)

  • • To see these notifications by tapping on the screen or moving the phone, tap Wake display.
  • • To prevent phone from vibrating when you tap a notification or drag it to an action (like Dismiss), turn Vibrate on touch off .
  • Page 225

    ![image 947](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile947.png)

  • • To allow replies without unlocking the phone, turn Safe reply off . To require unlocking to reply, keep it on .
  • ![image 948](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile948.png)

    ![image 949](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile949.png)

  • • To stop specific apps from showing these notifications, tap Block apps > and tap the app's name.
  • ![image 950](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile950.png)

    Stop Peek Display notifications

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Peek Display. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Display.
  • ![image 951](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile951.png)

  • 2. Turn Peek Display off . To restart the notifications, turn Peek Display on .
  • ![image 952](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile952.png)

    ![image 953](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile953.png)

    Change screen timeout

    Change when your screen turns off

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display.
  • 2. Touch Screen timeout and select the time of inactivity before your phone sleeps.
  • Page 226

    Tip: Set a shorter time to extend battery life.

    Stay on until you look away

    Use Attentive Display to keep the screen on when you're looking at it and turn it off when you look away:

  • • Your screen won't dim or sleep when you're looking at it.
  • • Your screen will sleep sooner when it doesn't see you, saving battery. In certain lighting conditions, your phone may have difficulty detecting when you've looked away. To turn Attentive Display on:
  • ####### 1. Go to Settings > Display > Screen timeout.Or, open the Moto app and tap > Display.

    ![image 954](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile954.png)

    ######## 2. Tap Attentive Display and turn it on.If you don't want to use Attentive Display, then turn it off .

    ![image 955](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile955.png)

    Set screen recording options

    To adjust settings before recording your screen:

  • 1. Open recording options:
  • • In quick settings, touch & hold .
  • ![image 956](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile956.png)

  • • Or, go to Settings > Display > Screen record.
  • 2. Use the Viewfinder sizeAvatar size option to resize the small frame that shows you when the camera is on during screen recording.
  • 3. To show screen touches, turn Record touch points on .
  • Page 227

    ![image 957](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile957.png)

  • 4. Adjust the quality or file size as needed:
  • • If you want the best quality recording, use the highest resolution.
  • • To minimize the recording file size, select a lower resolution.
  • Learn how to adjust other settings, record your screen or find your recordings.

    Change lock screen features Use these options to control what content and features appear on your lock screen. You can also control when your screen locks.

    Limit lock screen notifications

    Control which notifications appear You can turn off notifications for your lock screen, or choose between showing some or all content:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display.
  • 2. Tap Lock screen > Privacy.
  • 3. Select whether or not to show notifications.
  • If you show notifications but hide sensitive content, then you'll receive notifications for incoming emails or chats, but they won't include message details.

    ##### Choose between icons or summary list

    If you're allowing notifications to appear on your lock screen, you can display them in a list, where you can preview the content. Or, to keep them more private, you can just show a chip of icons for the apps that have sent notifications; touch the chip to see the full list.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Lock screen.
  • 2. Tap Notification Style.
  • 3. Choose one:
  • Page 228

  • • To see notifications as a list with details, select List.
  • • To see only icons and touch them to see the list of notifications, select Chip. Make clock smaller
  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Lock screen.
  • 2. Turn Double-line clock off .
  • ![image 958](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile958.png)

    Add message to lock screen

    To add your name or a short message to your lock screen for anyone who finds your phone:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Lock screen.
  • 2. Tap Text on lock screen.
  • 3. Type the text to display and tap Save.
  • Tip: Don't put your mobile number as contact info on your lock screen unless you can access your voicemail from another device.

    Control access to your wallet

    To allow or prevent access to your Wallet without unlocking your phone:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Lock screen.
  • 2. Turn Show wallet on or off .
  • ![image 959](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile959.png)

    ![image 960](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile960.png)

    Show and control smart devices

    Page 229

    If you have Google Home devices (lights, cameras, thermostats), you can monitor and control them from the lock screen:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Lock screen.
  • 2. To add them to your lock screen, turn Show device controls on .
  • ![image 961](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile961.png)

    This allows you to review their controls from the lock screen, but you'll have to unlock to adjust their settings.

  • 3. If you also want to be able to adjust their controls without unlocking, turn Control from locked device on .
  • ![image 962](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile962.png)

    Adjust volumes

    Use Volume buttons In-call audio. When you’re on a call, the Volume buttons control the volume of the other person. Media. When you’re not on a call, the Volume buttons control media volume during playback or before you listen. Phone ringtone, notification sounds, and alarms. To adjust these volumes, press a Volume button and then use this shortcut on your home screen:

    ![image 963](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile963.png)

  • 1. Slide to adjust media volume.
  • 2. Tap to choose level for ringtone and notification sounds: on , silent , and vibration only .
  • ![image 964](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile964.png)

    ![image 965](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile965.png)

    ![image 966](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile966.png)

  • 3. Slide to adjust call volume.
  • 4. Tap to see all volume controls (call, ring/notification, alarm, media).
  • 5. Tap to turn captions on/off when speech is detected.
  • Page 230

    Set app volumes and auto-mute apps You can adjust the volume of each app. Also, your phone can learn to automatically mute apps you usually mute. You can review and adjust the list of apps at any time.

    ##### Set it up

  • Go to Settings > Sound & vibration. 2. Tap Multi-volume and turn it on .
  • ![image 967](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile967.png)

    ##### Adjust app volumes

    Press a Volume button to control volume of the app currently on screen, or use the sliders to adjust volumes of any apps with sound in use.

    ![image 968](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile968.png)

    ##### View and remove automatically muted apps

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Multi-volume.
  • 2. Tap Auto mute to see the list of muted apps.
  • 3. To remove an app from the list, just unmute it in the app.
  • If you don’t want your phone to learn your usage patterns and automatically mute apps, go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Multi-volume and turn Auto mute off .

    ![image 969](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile969.png)

    Silence with Power & Volume buttons

    To silence a ringing phone, press either the Power button or the Volume down button.

    Tip: Use Do Not Disturb to silence all calls, messages, events, and reminders. Turn it on from quick settings, or schedule it to turn on automatically during certain times or during calendar events.

    Pick up to silence You can simply pick up your phone to silence incoming calls and alarms, and to turn vibration on. To enable this gesture:

    Page 231

    ####### 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.Or, open the Moto app and tap > Gestures.

    ![image 970](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile970.png)

    ######## 2. Tap Pick up to silence and turn it on .

    ![image 971](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile971.png)

    ######## 3. If you want this gesture to silence calls but not alarms (or vice versa), tap Settings and turn theappropriate option off .

    ![image 972](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile972.png)

    Set ringtones

    Change default call ringtone

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. Do one of the following:
  • • If your phone has one SIM card, tap Phone ringtone.
  • • If your phone has two SIMs, tap the ringtone for the SIM you want to change.
  • 3. Do one of the following:
  • • Select a ringtone from the list.
  • • To use a song as the ringtone, tap Add ringtone at the bottom of the list. Then tap > Audio and select the song stored on your phone.
  • ![image 973](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile973.png)

  • • For silence, tap None at the top of the list.
  • Page 232

    Set call ringtone for a contact

    You can choose a unique ringtone for calls from specific people so you'll know instantly who's calling.

  • 1. Open the Contacts app.
  • ![image 974](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile974.png)

  • 2. Tap the contact's name.
  • 3. Swipe to move down and tap Contact ringtone.
  • 4. Do one of the following:
  • • Select a ringtone from the list.
  • • To use a song as the ringtone, tap Add ringtone at the bottom of the list. Then tap to browse and select the song stored on your phone.
  • ![image 975](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile975.png)

  • • For silence, tap None at the top of the list.
  • Change notification sound

    You can modify the notification sound for all apps, or assign a distinctive sound to notifications from a specific app, replacing the default.

    ##### Set default notification sound

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Default notification sound.
  • 2. Do one of the following:
  • • To change it, choose a new sound.
  • • To turn notification sounds off, select None.
  • Page 233

    ##### Set notification sound for a specific app

  • 1. Touch & hold the app icon.
  • 2. Tap > Notifications.
  • ![image 976](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile976.png)

  • 3. Tap the category for enabled notifications, then tap Sound and select a unique ringtone, or set it to none.
  • If you can't hear a notification If an app's notifications are silent but you want to hear them:

  • 1. Touch & hold a notification.
  • 2. Tap Default. To let an app's notifications be heard when Do Not Disturb is on:
  • 1. Touch & hold the app icon.
  • 2. Tap > Notifications.
  • ![image 977](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile977.png)

  • 3. Tap the category for enabled notifications and turn Override Do Not Disturb on .
  • ![image 978](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile978.png)

    Change alarm sound/music

  • 1. Open the Clock app.
  • 2. On the tab, tap by the alarm.
  • ![image 979](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile979.png)

    Page 234

    ![image 980](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile980.png)

  • 3. Tap and choose what to play:
  • ![image 981](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile981.png)

  • • To use a ringtone on your phone, select one.
  • • To wake to a music app like Spotify, select the app and choose the music.
  • Get more ringtones

    Although your phone comes with lots of ringtones, you can get more:

  • • Search for “ringtones” in Play Store and install an app that provide ringtones.
  • • Search for “ringtone maker” in Play Store and install an app that lets you create custom ringtones. Open the app and use it to select entire songs or portions of songs.
  • • If you have songs that are .mp3 files stored on your computer, connect your phone and computer with a USB cable, then copy the song to your phone.
  • Fix an issue

    If you're not hearing your ringtones:

  • • Look for in your status bar, which means you're in Do Not Disturb mode. Open quick settings and turn Do Not Disturb off.
  • ![image 982](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile982.png)

    ![image 983](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile983.png)

  • • Check that your ringtone volume is set to .
  • ![image 984](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile984.png)

    Page 235

    Change vibration settings

    Turn all vibration on/off Turning vibration off is a good way to extend battery life when you need to. To control overall phone vibration (calls, notifications, keyboard interactions) with one on/off switch:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Vibration & haptics.
  • 2. Turn Use vibration & haptics on or off .
  • ![image 985](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile985.png)

    ![image 986](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile986.png)

    Set call vibration

    ##### Prevent your phone from vibrating for calls

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. Tap Vibration & haptics.
  • 3. Under Calls, slide Ring vibration to stop vibration. Make your phone vibrate for calls
  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. Tap Vibration & haptics and check that Use vibration & haptics is on .
  • ![image 987](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile987.png)

  • 3. Under Calls, select options:
  • • For incoming calls, turn Ring vibration on . Optionally, turn Vibrate first then ring gradually on .
  • ![image 988](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile988.png)

    Page 236

    ![image 989](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile989.png)

  • • To feel a vibration when a call you make is answered, turn Outgoing call vibration on .
  • ![image 990](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile990.png)

  • • To synchronize the vibration with the rhythm of your ringtone, turn Synchronized ring vibration on .
  • ![image 991](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile991.png)

    Set notification vibration

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. Tap Vibration & haptics and check that Use vibration & haptics is on .
  • ![image 992](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile992.png)

  • 3. Under Notifications and alarms, turn Notification vibration on or off .
  • ![image 993](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile993.png)

    ![image 994](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile994.png)

    Control alarm vibration

    ##### Turn vibration on/off for one alarm

  • 1. In the Clock app, tap by the alarm.
  • ![image 995](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile995.png)

  • 2. Check or uncheck Vibrate.
  • Page 237

    ##### Turn vibration off for all alarms

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. Tap Vibration & haptics and check that Use vibration & haptics is on .
  • ![image 996](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile996.png)

  • 3. Under Notifications and alarms, turn Alarm vibration off . This overrides the vibration setting for individual alarms. If you don't feel vibration and expect to
  • ![image 997](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile997.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. Tap Vibration & haptics and check that Use vibration & haptics is on .
  • ![image 998](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile998.png)

  • 3. Under Notifications and alarms, turn Alarm vibration on .
  • ![image 999](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile999.png)

    Enhance sound

    About Dolby Atmos

    Use preset equalizers to enhance your phone’s speaker sound, or apply sound profiles to your headphones or other connected device based on the type of media playing.

    Smart audio automatically chooses the best settings for the media you're listening to, or you can set and customize sound profiles for the loudspeaker and connected devices.

    Select sound profiles

    Page 238

    You can select a preset sound profile for your loudspeaker, headphones, or other connected device, and your phone will remember the next time you connect it.

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold . Or, open the Dolby Atmos app.
  • ![image 1000](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1000.png)

    ![image 1001](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1001.png)

  • 2. Tap Settings.
  • 3. Choose how to adjust sound:
  • • To automatically adjust based on the media playing, select Smart audio.
  • • To use a preset sound profile, select Music, Movie, Game, or Podcast.
  • • To use a custom sound profile where you can adjust a graphic equalizer, select Custom.
  • 4. To customize a selected sound profile, next to the profile name tap , then:
  • ![image 1002](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1002.png)

  • • Choose an equalizer preset to enhance treble, bass, or vocals.
  • • To get a surround sound experience from any set of headphones or stereo speakers, turn Surround virtualizer on.
  • • To keep the same volume level when you switch between audio sources, turn Volume leveler on.
  • • To learn more about these settings, touch > Help.
  • ![image 1003](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1003.png)

  • • To revert a profile to its original settings, tap > Reset.
  • ![image 1004](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1004.png)

  • • To revert to all original settings, on the main Dolby Atmos screen, tap Settings > > Reset settings.
  • Page 239

    ![image 1005](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1005.png)

    Turn Dolby Atmos off To turn Dolby Atmos off for headphones or another connected device, open quick settings and tap . To turn it off when you're listening through the loudspeaker:

    ![image 1006](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1006.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Dolby Atmos.
  • 2. Tap > About.
  • ![image 1007](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1007.png)

  • 3. Tap the version listed three times to add the on/off switch.
  • 4. Turn it off .
  • ![image 1008](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1008.png)

    Silence calls & notifications

    When you're busy, use Do Not Disturb to mute ringtones for incoming calls, stop vibration, and block notifications.

    Quickly turn Do Not Disturb on or off

    ##### Turn it on

  • 1. Open quick settings and tap . You'll see in the status bar when Do Not Disturb is on.
  • ![image 1009](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1009.png)

    ![image 1010](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1010.png)

  • 2. To change how long it stays on, in quick settings, touch & hold , tap Duration for Quick Settings, and then choose one:
  • Page 240

    ![image 1011](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1011.png)

  • • To keep it on indefinitely, tap Until you turn off.
  • • To select a duration, tap For 1 hour, then tap + or - to adjust the time. • To choose each time you turn Do Not Disturb on, tap Ask every time.
  • Turn it off Open quick settings and tap . If it's turning itself on again, but you don't want it to:

    ![image 1012](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1012.png)

  • • Make sure you're not automatically silencing on a schedule or during calendar events.
  • • If you're using Bedtime mode, tap Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls > Bedtime mode > Customize and turn Do not Disturb for Bedtime mode off .
  • ![image 1013](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1013.png)

    Set down to start You can turn on Do Not Disturb by placing your phone face down on a surface. To enable this gesture:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Gestures.
  • ![image 1014](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1014.png)

  • 2. Tap Flip for DND and turn it on .
  • ![image 1015](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1015.png)

    Silence automatically

    Your phone can automatically switch into and out of Do Not Disturb mode, either based on your calendar events or on a schedule you create.

    ##### Silence during calendar events

    Page 241

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • ![image 1016](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1016.png)

  • 2. Tap Schedules.
  • 3. Turn Event on .
  • ![image 1017](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1017.png)

  • 4. To select the calendar to use and choose events based on your reply status, tap Event.
  • ##### Silence using a schedule

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • ![image 1018](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1018.png)

  • 2. Tap Schedules. 3. Adjust settings:
  • • To use an existing schedule, tap its name, like Sleeping.
  • • To create a new one, tap Add more. Tap Time, then enter a name and tap Add. Specify its days,
  • start and end times, and level of silence.

    Stop automatic silencing If you don't want your phone to switch automatically into and out of Do Not Disturb:

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • ![image 1019](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1019.png)

    Page 242

  • 2. Tap Schedules.
  • 3. To stop silencing based on your calendar, turn Event off .
  • ![image 1020](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1020.png)

  • 4. To stop silencing based on a schedule:
  • • To use the schedule later, turn it off.
  • ![image 1021](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1021.png)

  • • To delete a schedule, tap its name, then tap . You can only delete schedules you created.
  • ![image 1022](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1022.png)

  • • To delete multiple schedules, tap > Delete schedules.
  • ![image 1023](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1023.png)

    Choose what can interrupt You can choose which interruptions to allow when Do Not Disturb is on. Choose interruptions by People

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Do Not Disturb. Or, in quick settings, touch & hold .
  • ![image 1024](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1024.png)

  • 2. Tap People.
  • 3. Choose what and who to allow.
  • • Calls: Allow calls from starred contacts, other contacts, all callers, or none. You can also allow calls if the same person calls twice in 15 minutes; turn Allow repeat callers on .
  • ![image 1025](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1025.png)

    Page 243

  • • Messages: Allow messages from starred contacts, other contacts, anyone, or none.
  • ##### Choose interruptions by Apps

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Do Not Disturb. Or, in quick settings, touch & hold .
  • ![image 1026](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1026.png)

  • 2. Tap Apps.
  • 3. Tap .
  • ![image 1027](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1027.png)

  • 4. Tap the app to allow, and set notifications to allow .
  • ![image 1028](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1028.png)

    You'll see selected apps under APPS THAT CAN INTERRUPT. To change which notifications can interrupt, tap the app in the list.

    ##### Allow alarms and other interruptions

    Alarms and media sounds are allowed by default, but you can turn them off. You can also allow touch sounds, reminders, and calendar events to send notifications.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Do Not Disturb. Or, in quick settings, touch & hold .
  • ![image 1029](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1029.png)

  • 2. Tap Alarms & other interruptions.
  • 3. Turn interruptions on or off .
  • Page 244

    ![image 1030](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1030.png)

    ![image 1031](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1031.png)

    Stop phone from speaking

    Silence replies to voice commands

    Some voice commands (like “What's up?” and “What is the current weather?”) cause Google Assistant to speak in response.

    To quickly silence a voice command response, tap . To have your phone show responses to voice commands on screen and not speak them:

    ![image 1032](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1032.png)

  • 1. Open the Google app.
  • 2. Tap your profile icon > Settings.
  • ![image 1033](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1033.png)

  • 3. Tap Voice and turn off speech output.
  • Turn off screen reader If your phone describes everything you touch on screen, speaking your notifications, and reading messages aloud, you might have turned on a screen reader. This accessibility feature helps people with visual impairments. To turn it off:

  • 1. Press & hold both Volume Up and Down buttons for three seconds. If TalkBack was reading the screen, this pauses readout so you can update settings more easily.
  • 2. Go to Settings > Accessibility.
  • 3. Turn off all screen readers, such as TalkBack or Select to Speak.
  • Silence “Hello Moto” during power up

    If you don’t want your phone to say “Hello Moto” when it powers up:

    Page 245

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. Turn Power on sounds off . You can't adjust the volume level for this sound.
  • ![image 1034](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1034.png)

    Turn off charging sounds

    If you don’t want your phone to make a sound when it comes in contact with a charger:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. Turn off Charging sounds and vibration.
  • Turn touch sounds on/off

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. Do any of the following:
  • • To hear a tone when you dial a number, turn on Dial pad tones.
  • • To hear a click when you lock or unlock the screen, turn on Screen locking sound.
  • • To hear a click when you touch something on the screen, turn on Touch sounds. If you don't want any of these sounds, just turn them off .
  • ![image 1035](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1035.png)

    Hear other notification sounds You can assign a ringtone for notifications from specific apps. You can also control sounds that notify you of other events:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration.
  • 2. To hear a confirmation tone and feel a vibration when you successfully connect your phone to a charger, turn Charging sounds and vibration on .
  • ![image 1036](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1036.png)

    Page 246

  • 3. To feel a vibration when you make a call and the other party answers, tap Vibration & haptics and turn
  • Outgoing call vibration on .

    ![image 1037](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1037.png)

    If you don't want any of these sounds, just turn them off .

    ![image 1038](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1038.png)

    Turn notifications on/off

    Turn off app notifications

    When you receive unwanted notifications from an app, touch & hold the notification, then tap Turn off notifications.

    To review all apps and adjust whether they can send notifications:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications.
  • 2. Tap App settings.
  • 3. Do one of the following:
  • • To stop all notifications from an app, turn it off .
  • ![image 1039](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1039.png)

  • • To stop certain notifications from an app, tap the app name, then turn notifications or off for each category.
  • ![image 1040](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1040.png)

    ![image 1041](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1041.png)

    Page 247

  • • To stop an app from showing notifications as a banner across the top of an unlocked screen, like those for incoming calls, tap the app name, (if needed, tap the notification type), then turn Pop on screen off for the category.
  • ![image 1042](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1042.png)

    Tip: To prevent notifications from all apps during certain times or calendar events, use Do Not Disturb.

    Turn on app notifications

    If an app isn't sending notifications but you want it to:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications.
  • 2. Tap App settings.
  • 3. At the top, tap and select Turned off.
  • ![image 1043](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1043.png)

  • 4. Turn notifications on as needed.
  • ![image 1044](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1044.png)

    Choose how notifications look and open

    Turn notification dots off/on

    App icons show dots to alert you about unread notifications. You can turn off dots for one or all apps.

    ![image 1045](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1045.png)

    ##### Turn dots off for all apps

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications.
  • 2. Turn Notification dot on app icon off or on .
  • Page 248

    ![image 1046](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1046.png)

    ![image 1047](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1047.png)

    ##### Turn dots off for one app

  • 1. Touch & hold the app icon.
  • 2. Tap > Notifications.
  • ![image 1048](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1048.png)

  • 3. Turn Allow notification dot off or on .
  • ![image 1049](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1049.png)

    ![image 1050](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1050.png)

    Turn bubbles off/on for messaging

    Bubbles keep your conversations accessible by floating on top of other apps. Read and send messages from the bubble without opening the app. You can turn bubbles off if you want to always see conversations in their full app.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications > Bubbles.
  • 2. Turn Allow apps to show bubbles off or on .
  • ![image 1051](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1051.png)

    ![image 1052](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1052.png)

    ##### Turn off/on for specific app or conversation

    Page 249

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps > See all # apps.
  • 2. Tap the app to change.
  • 3. Tap Notifications > Additional settings in the app > Bubbles. If you don’t see Bubbles, then the app doesn’t support this feature.
  • 4. Adjust settings to specify whether some or all conversations can bubble, or nothing should bubble (all conversations open in the full messaging app).
  • Turn on snoozing

    If you want to be able to snooze your notifications, turn on snoozing:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications.
  • 2. Turn Allow notification snoozing on .
  • ![image 1053](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1053.png)

    Allow notifications to open apps in freeform

    In addition to the sidebar, you can set apps to open in freeform mode from your notifications.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures > Sidebar.
  • 2. Tap Settings > More settings.
  • 3. Turn Open notifications in freeform on ,
  • ![image 1054](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1054.png)

    Control notification sound

    Change notification volume

    To adjust the volume level of all notifications:

  • 1. Press a Volume button and on the screen tap .
  • Page 250

    ![image 1055](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1055.png)

  • 2. Adjust the Notification volume slider.
  • Change notification sound

    You can modify the notification sound for all apps, or assign a distinctive sound to notifications from a specific app, replacing the default.

    ##### Set default notification sound

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Default notification sound.
  • 2. Do one of the following:
  • • To change it, choose a new sound.
  • • To turn notification sounds off, select None.
  • ##### Set notification sound for a specific app

  • 1. Touch & hold the app icon.
  • 2. Tap > Notifications.
  • ![image 1056](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1056.png)

  • 3. Tap the category for enabled notifications, then tap Sound and select a unique ringtone, or set it to none.
  • If you can't hear a notification If an app's notifications are silent but you want to hear them:

  • 1. Touch & hold a notification.
  • 2. Tap Default. To let an app's notifications be heard when Do Not Disturb is on:
  • Page 251

  • 1. Touch & hold the app icon.
  • 2. Tap > Notifications.
  • ![image 1057](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1057.png)

  • 3. Tap the category for enabled notifications and turn Override Do Not Disturb on .
  • ![image 1058](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1058.png)

    Silence an app's notifications

    To temporarily silence notifications from all apps, use Do Not Disturb.

    Change to Silent If you want an app's notifications to be less intrusive, you can categorize them:

  • • Default: You'll hear a sound and feel vibration (if on), get a message on your lock screen, and can see the app's icon in your status bar.
  • • Silent: You won't hear a sound or feel a vibration. The notification icon will still show in the status bar, unless you hide them.
  • Option 1: On a notification
  • 1. Touch & hold a notification.
  • 2. Tap Silent.
  • Option 2: In Settings
  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications > App settings, and select the app.
  • 2. Tap the type of notification to change.
  • 3. Tap Silent. Hide silent notifications
  • Page 252

  • 1. Go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Do Not Disturb. Or, in quick settings, touch & hold .
  • ![image 1059](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1059.png)

  • 2. Tap Display options for hidden notifications.
  • 3. Select what to allow or block:
  • • No sound from notifications: You will see notifications in the pull-down list of all notifications but

    won’t hear their sound.

  • • No visuals or sound from notifications: You won’t see or hear notifications.
  • • Custom: Start with not seeing or hearing notifications, and make small adjustments, like allowing
  • notification dots on app icons.

    ##### Hide status bar icons for silent notifications To hide the icons for silent notifications from all apps:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications.
  • 2. Turn Hide silent notifications in status bar on .
  • ![image 1060](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1060.png)

  • 3. Restart the phone to apply the new settings.
  • You won't see the icon in the status bar for any silent notifications. When you swipe the status bar down, the icon appears in the pull-down along with the notification.

    Tip: To hide status bar icons for a single app, open the app and look in its settings. Only some apps let you do this.

    Page 253

    Manage notification privacy

    Control which apps read your notifications

    Some apps need to access notifications from other apps to work properly. For example, a smart driving companion app needs to access notifications from other apps in order to read them aloud when you're driving.

    Be sure that apps with access to your notifications have legitimate reasons, because with this access they can:

  • • Read all notifications, including personal information like contact names and text messages
  • • Dismiss notifications
  • • Answer calls
  • • Turn Do Not Disturb on or off
  • ##### Check which apps can read your notifications

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications > Device & app notifications.
  • 2. Under Allowed, review the list of apps.
  • 3. Tap an app to see which notifications it can access:
  • • Real-time communication from apps in use, including navigation and calls
  • • Conversations, like text messages and chats
  • • Notifications with sound and vibration
  • • Silent notifications
  • ##### Stop app from reading notifications

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications > Device & app notifications.
  • 2. Under Allowed, tap the app name.
  • 3. Choose one:
  • Page 254

  • • To stop it from reading certain types of notifications, unmark checkboxes.
  • • To stop it from reading any notifications, turn Allow notification access off , then tap Turn off.
  • ![image 1061](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1061.png)

    If you restrict an app's access to notifications and then find the app isn't working properly, you can restore access.

    ##### Allow app to read notifications

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications > Device & app notifications.
  • 2. Under Not allowed, tap the app name.
  • 3. Turn Allow notification access on , and tap Allow.
  • ![image 1062](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1062.png)

  • 4. Adjust checkmarks if you want to stop it from reading certain types of notifications.
  • Control lock screen notifications

    If you've set a pattern, PIN or password, you can control which type of notifications show on your lock screen and prevent them from revealing private information.

    To adjust notifications for all apps:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications.
  • 2. To hide sensitive content on your lock screen, turn Sensitive notifications off .
  • ![image 1063](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1063.png)

    You’ll get lock screen notifications for an incoming email or chat, but they won’t include message details.

    For finer control, leave this on to allow details, and instead hide sensitive content from specific apps.

    Page 255

    ![image 1064](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1064.png)

  • 3. To change which notifications show on your lock screen (show all, hide notifications from apps you silenced, or hide all), tap Notifications on lock screen.
  • To hide sensitive content from specific apps:

  • 1. Set lock screen notifications for all apps to Show conversations, default, and silent.
  • 2. Touch & hold the app icon, then tap > Notifications.
  • ![image 1065](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1065.png)

  • 3. Types of notifications the app sends appear here. For each enabled notification that you want to hide: a. Tap the name. b. Tap Lock screen > Show sensitive content only when unlocked.
  • Tip: When you turn on Lockdown, notifications won't show on your lock screen.

    See previously viewed notifications After you clear or snooze notifications, you can go to your notification history to view them again. To set it up:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Notifications.
  • 2. Tap Notification history.
  • 3. Turn Use notification history on . To see the history, go to Settings > Notifications > Notification history.
  • ![image 1066](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1066.png)

    Change System navigation

    You can choose how to move between apps and screens:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures.
  • 2. Tap System navigation.
  • 3. Choose an option:
  • Page 256

    • Gesture navigation: Use drag and swipe gestures to return to your home screen, to switch apps,

    or to go back to the previous screen. Learn more about gestures.

    • 3-button navigation: Use the back , home , and recent buttons. Learn more.

    ![image 1067](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1067.png)

    ![image 1068](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1068.png)

    ![image 1069](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1069.png)

    Set options for Gesture navigation You can choose if the navigation bar appears at the bottom of the screen and how certain gestures work. Show or hide navigation bar

    If you don’t want to see the navigation bar at the bottom of the screen, you can hide it. You can show it again any time.

    ![image 1070](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1070.png)

    ![image 1071](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1071.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures > System navigation.
  • 2. Next to Gesture navigation, tap .
  • ![image 1072](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1072.png)

  • 3. Under Navigation bar, select whether to Show or Hide it.
  • Adjust sensitivity of back gesture To adjust sensitivity of the back navigation gesture:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures > System navigation.
  • 2. Next to Gesture navigation, tap .
  • Page 257

    ![image 1073](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1073.png)

  • 3. Under Back Sensitivity, move the sliders to adjust sensitivity for the left and right edges.
  • If you have apps that include gestures along the edges of the screen, setting a higher sensitivity here might conflict with them.

    ##### Disable or enable swipe for Google Assistant

    To start a voice command with Google Assistant, swipe from the bottom corner. If this gesture conflicts with another you use, you can turn it off.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures > System navigation.
  • 2. Next to Gesture navigation, tap .
  • ![image 1074](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1074.png)

  • 3. Turn Swipe to invoke assistant off or on .
  • ![image 1075](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1075.png)

    ![image 1076](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1076.png)

    Set options for 3-button navigation

    To start a voice command with Google Assistant, press & hold the home button. You can turn this gesture on or off any time.

    ![image 1077](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1077.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures > System navigation.
  • 2. Next to 3-button navigation, tap .
  • ![image 1078](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1078.png)

    Page 258

  • 3. Turn Hold Home for Assistant on or off .
  • ![image 1079](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1079.png)

    ![image 1080](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1080.png)

    Set up sidebar for easy multitasking

    Use the sidebar to open freeform apps in a small window that you can move and resize.

    Turn on the sidebar

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Gestures.
  • ![image 1081](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1081.png)

  • 2. Tap Sidebar and turn Use sidebar on .
  • ![image 1082](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1082.png)

    You'll see a sidebar on the right edge of your screen. Swipe it in to see a menu of apps that you can open.

    ![image 1083](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1083.png)

    Customize the sidebar

    ##### Change apps in sidebar

  • 1. On the sidebar, tap . Or, go to Settings > Gestures > Sidebar > .
  • ![image 1084](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1084.png)

    Page 259

    ![image 1085](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1085.png)

  • 2. Customize the menu:
  • • To rearrange apps, touch & hold an app, then drag it.
  • • To remove an app, tap or unmark its checkbox.
  • ![image 1086](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1086.png)

  • • To add an app, tap it or mark its checkbox.
  • • Tap again to choose how apps open from the sidebar.
  • ![image 1087](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1087.png)

    Allow notifications to open apps in freeform

    In addition to the sidebar, you can set apps to open in freeform mode from your notifications.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures > Sidebar.
  • 2. Tap Settings > More settings.
  • 3. Turn Open notifications in freeform on ,
  • ![image 1088](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1088.png)

    About the Gametime sidebar

    If you use Gametime, it has its own sidebar menu that opens apps. You set up the apps for that menu separately.

    Use one-handed mode Want to use one thumb to navigate your phone? Turn on One-handed mode. This mode is only available if you're using Gesture navigation.

    Set it up

    Page 260

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures.
  • 2. Tap One-handed mode and turn it on .
  • ![image 1089](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1089.png)

  • 3. Choose what should happen when you swipe down:
  • • To move the top of the screen into reach of your thumb, select Pull screen into reach.
  • • To see your notifications and quick settings, touch Show notifications.
  • 4. To add , which you can touch instead of swiping down, turn One-handed mode shortcut on .
  • ![image 1090](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1090.png)

    ![image 1091](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1091.png)

    Use it

    Move top of screen down where your thumb can reach Swipe down near the bottom edge of the screen. Or tap if you turned on the shortcut.

    ![image 1092](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1092.png)

    ![image 1093](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1093.png)

    To exit this view:

  • • Swipe up from the bottom of the screen
  • • Tap anywhere above the app
  • • Tap
  • Page 261

    ![image 1094](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1094.png)

    See your notifications and quick settings To see notifications and quick settings, swipe down from the bottom edge of the phone once or tap once. To see all quick settings, swipe down from the bottom edge of the phone twice or tap twice.

    ![image 1095](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1095.png)

    ![image 1096](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1096.png)

    Turn it off or remove

    If you want to remove but still be able to swipe down near the bottom edge of the screen, go to Settings > Gestures > One-handed mode and turn One-handed mode shortcut off .

    ![image 1097](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1097.png)

    ![image 1098](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1098.png)

    To turn off the gesture and remove :

    ![image 1099](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1099.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures.
  • 2. Tap One-handed mode and turn it off .
  • ![image 1100](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1100.png)

    Adjust screenshot settings

    You can adjust settings for capturing screenshots at any time.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Gestures.
  • ![image 1101](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1101.png)

    Page 262

  • 2. Do any of the following:
  • ##### • Turn Use Three finger screenshot on or off .

    ![image 1102](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1102.png)

    ![image 1103](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1103.png)

    ###### • To prevent the three finger gesture from working in certain apps, tap Settings > and select the

    ![image 1104](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1104.png)

    apps.

    Customize Power button gesture

    You can customize the Power button, controlling what happens when you press it twice and when you press & hold it.

    Choose what happens when you press Power twice

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures.
  • 2. Tap Double press power key.
  • 3. Choose if you want to open the camera or if you don't want anything to happen (None). Choose what happens when you press & hold Power
  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures.
  • 2. Tap Press & hold power button.
  • 3. Choose what you want the gesture to do:
  • • To start a voice command, select Digital assistant.
  • • To see the Power menu for turning off or restarting the phone, or going into Lockdown mode or
  • Page 263

    Emergency mode, select Power menu.

    If you select a choice other than Power menu, then to see the Power menu for turning off and restarting, you'll need to press the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously.

  • 4. To adjust how long you need to press & hold to start the selected action, move Press & hold duration.
  • Double-tap back for shortcut

    You can double-tap the back of your phone to:

  • • Open an app of your choice
  • • Record your screen or take a screenshot
  • • Switch to your last app or return to the home screen
  • • Start and stop music
  • ##### Change what happens when you tap twice

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Gestures.
  • ![image 1105](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1105.png)

  • 2. Tap Quick Launch and make sure it's on .
  • ![image 1106](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1106.png)

  • 3. Tap
  • ![image 1107](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1107.png)

  • 4. Select what you want your phone to do when you tap the back twice.
  • Page 264

    Turn flashlight on and off

    To turn your flashlight on or off:

  • • Open quick settings and tap .
  • ![image 1108](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1108.png)

  • • Or, make a chopping motion. If the camera opens instead of turning on the flashlight, be sure to use a chop gesture, not a twist gesture. To control the chop gesture:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Gestures.
  • ![image 1109](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1109.png)

  • 2. Tap Fast flashlight and turn it on or off.
  • Twist phone to open camera Open your camera instantly from any screen, even your lock screen, with Quick capture. Twist your phone twice like this:

    ![image 1110](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1110.png)

    The Camera opens, and you’re ready to shoot. Twist twice again to switch to the front (selfie) camera. If you don’t want others to access your camera, you can turn Quick capture off. But if you use a screen lock, don’t worry--only your Camera app is accessible. To view existing photos or access any other features or apps, you must unlock your phone. To turn Quick capture on or off:

    ![image 1111](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1111.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Gestures. Or, open the Moto app and tap > Gestures.
  • ![image 1112](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1112.png)

  • 2. Turn Quick capture on or off .
  • ![image 1113](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1113.png)

    Page 265

    ![image 1114](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1114.png)

    Charge phone

    Some apps and features use more power than others. So, depending on what you use, the amount of time before you need to charge will vary.

    How to charge

    ##### Charge with USB

  • 1. Connect your phone to the charger that came with your phone, or to a charger that is compatible with your phone. Other chargers, including laptops, can charge more slowly.
  • 2. Insert the plug into an electrical outlet. Charge wirelessly
  • Charge your phone wirelessly using a Qi-certified wireless charger (sold separately). For the best charging performance, align the wireless charging area of your phone with the wireless charger, or place your phone in the location recommended by the charger manufacturer. For faster charging, use a wired charger.

    If you're using a portable wireless charger, center the back of the phone with the charger.

    ![image 1115](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1115.png)

    ##### See if your phone is charging

    When the phone is off and charging, you’ll see the outline of a battery and a percentage. If the battery is completely discharged, this will not appear until the phone has received the minimum voltage required to boot.

    When the phone is on and charging, you’ll see in the status bar.

    ![image 1116](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1116.png)

    Tips for charging phone

  • • You can use your phone while charging. To charge faster, don't use your phone while charging.
  • • If you can't turn the phone on while it's charging, wait until it receives enough voltage before turning it on.
  • • When the battery gets low, the phone sends a notification.
  • Page 266

  • • Use Battery saver mode when the battery is low.
  • • You can turn off charging sounds.
  • Extend battery life

    Choose settings that use less battery

    To get the most life from your battery:

  • • Connections: Turn off Bluetooth and GPS when you're not using them.
  • • Wi‑Fi: Turn on Wi‑Fi when the phone is in a location with Wi‑Fi coverage.
  • • Screen: Turn down screen brightness, change to Dark theme, and set a shorter screen timeout.
  • • Sync: If you don't need it, turn off automatic syncing for all accounts. This means you won't receive notifications when updates occur and you'll need to manually sync to get new emails.
  • Temporarily conserve battery power Use Battery saver mode to keep going on a low battery. Also, avoid these battery-intensive activities until you can charge:

  • • Recording or watching videos
  • • Listening to music
  • • Taking pictures
  • • Using Live (animated) wallpaper See what’s using your battery To see if a specific app or service is draining your battery:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Battery > Battery usage.
  • 2. Swipe up to view the list of apps and features using power since the last full charge.
  • 3. Tap the app or feature using a lot of power.
  • 4. Tap options for managing power usage.
  • Use optimized charging

    Page 267

    Optimized charging reduces stress on your battery and extends its overall life by limiting time spent charging it over 80%.

    If your phone has been plugged in for a few days, it limits charging.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Battery.
  • 2. Tap Optimized charging.
  • 3. Turn Use optimized charging on .
  • ![image 1117](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1117.png)

    Keep adaptive battery on

    When you keep adaptive battery on, infrequently used apps will run less when you're not using them. Your phone will learn how you use apps over time and adjust for best battery life.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Battery > Adaptive Battery.
  • 2. Turn Use Adaptive Battery on .
  • ![image 1118](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1118.png)

    Prevent overcharging

    Leaving your phone plugged into a charger can lead to overcharging, which over time shortens your battery’s life. Overcharge protection keeps your battery healthy by limiting its charge to 80% if it’s been plugged in for three days.

    When Overcharge protection is limiting your charge, you'll see in the status bar. To fully charge your phone from 80%, just disconnect it from the charger and plug it in again. To turn this feature on or off:

    ![image 1119](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1119.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Battery > Overcharge protection.
  • 2. Turn it on or off .
  • ![image 1120](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1120.png)

    Page 268

    ![image 1121](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1121.png)

    Use Battery saver

    Battery saver helps extend battery life until your next charge. Your phone can prompt you to activate it when the battery is low, or you can enable it anytime.

    When Battery saver is on When the phone is in Battery saver mode, you'll see in the status bar. To save power, your phone will:

    ![image 1122](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1122.png)

  • • Turn on Dark theme (You can turn it off, but that uses more battery.)
  • • Lower the refresh rate
  • • Turn off Live Caption
  • • Wait until you use an app to refresh its content, like email or news
  • • Stop apps from doing things in the background (like listening for you to say “Hey Google”)
  • • Stop using Location services when your screen is off
  • Turn Battery saver on/off

    Open quick settings and tap to manually turn Battery saver on/off.

    ![image 1123](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1123.png)

    Turn Battery saver on automatically To turn Battery saver on when your battery is below a specified level:

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • ![image 1124](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1124.png)

  • 2. Tap Set a schedule > Based on percentage.
  • 3. Move the slider to adjust the percentage when Battery saver switches on.
  • Page 269

    Tip: Battery saver turns off while your phone is charging. It turns back on when you unplug the phone.

    ##### Let it turn off when your phone is charged

    To prevent your phone from turning Battery saver on before you need it, you can set it to turn off when your phone is charged to 90% or above:

  • 1. Open quick settings, then touch & hold .
  • ![image 1125](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1125.png)

  • 2. Make sure Turn off when charged is on .
  • ![image 1126](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1126.png)

    Show battery percentage in status bar

    To show the percentage of battery power remaining in the status bar:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Battery.
  • 2. Turn Battery percentage on .
  • ![image 1127](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1127.png)

    About storage options

    Phone internal storage

    You can store photos, videos, music, and applications on your phone. Files you downloaded from the internet and attachments you save from email or text messages are stored there, too.

    You can free up space when needed.

    Page 270

    Cloud storage

    Clouds are great for storing files, like photos, videos, and music, you want to share and access from other devices.

    Benefits include:

  • • Access your files from any device with an internet connection
  • • File synchronization - no need to keep track of multiple versions in multiple storage locations
  • • Backups of photos and videos available if phone is lost or damaged
  • Cloud storage providers typically offer free storage that can be expanded with a paid subscription once you reach the free-storage limit. Or you can manage your free storage by removing files you no longer need to make space for new ones.

    Apps like Drive and Photos let you easily back up media to cloud storage.

    Manage phone storage

    Free up space by scanning

    To scan your phone for old and unused items to remove, like downloads and unused apps:

  • 1. Open the Files app.
  • 2. Tap > Clean. You’ll see suggestions for categories of items to check and free up space.
  • ![image 1128](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1128.png)

  • 3. Tap the suggestions and follow onscreen instructions to uninstall, move, or delete items. If you don't see suggestions to free up space, check that suggestions are on:
  • 1. Open the Files app.
  • 2. Tap > Settings.
  • ![image 1129](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1129.png)

    Page 271

  • 3. Tap Notifications and turn on ones you want to receive.
  • ![image 1130](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1130.png)

    Free up space manually

    To free up space:

  • 1. Open the Files app.
  • 2. Tap a category (apps, images, videos, etc.) to view that type of item.
  • 3. Do any of the following:
  • • To uninstall apps, tap the app's name, then tap Uninstall.
  • • To clear an app's cache, tap the app's name, then tap Storage & cache > Clear cache.
  • • To clear your data for an app, tap the app's name, then tap Storage & cache > Clear storage.
  • • To delete media or other files, touch & hold to select one or more items, then tap .
  • ![image 1131](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1131.png)

    Schedule automatic removal of photos and videos

    If you automatically back up your photos and videos, you can automatically remove copies from your phone's internal storage after 30, 60, or 90 days.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Storage.
  • 2. Tap Storage manager and turn it on .
  • ![image 1132](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1132.png)

  • 3. Tap Remove photos & videos and select a duration.
  • Page 272

    Find downloaded files

    You can download files and store them on your phone, including: • Photos, videos, and documents you save from emails or texts • Books, movies, or other content that you buy from Play Store and save for offline viewing

    • Other files or images you download from the web

    When the file has finished downloading, you'll see in the status bar. Tap the notification to open the file in the appropriate app.

    ![image 1133](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1133.png)

    To view, edit, or delete downloads:

  • 1. Open the Files app.
  • 2. Tap Downloads.
  • 3. Do any of the following:
  • • To open or play a file, tap it. You can only edit some types of files.
  • • To sort files by name, date modified, or size, > Sort by.
  • ![image 1134](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1134.png)

  • • To share a file, touch & hold it, then tap .
  • ![image 1135](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1135.png)

  • • To delete a file, touch & hold it, then tap .
  • ![image 1136](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1136.png)

    Tip: To access downloads from a computer, connect your phone with a USB cable. Then open the phone's internal storage, and look for files in the Downloads folder.

    Recover recently deleted files

    Page 273

    You can try to recover recently deleted photos, videos, or texts. But do so as soon as possible. The more you use the phone, the more likely the file will be overwritten with new data.

  • 1. Search for “file recovery” in Play Store and install one of the apps.
  • 2. Use the app to scan your phone.
  • 3. If you can't recover recently deleted items, try connecting your phone to your computer with a USB cable and using a desktop program for file recovery.
  • Tip: Back up your photos to the cloud so you won't lose them if you delete them from your phone.

    Upload music to cloud

    You can store songs from your library in the cloud, for free, with Google YT Music (not available in all countries). Then you can instantly listen to your tunes wherever you are.

    You can upload music from your:

  • • iTunes library
  • • Windows Media Player library
  • • My Music folder, or any folder on your computer To upload your music:
  • 1. On your computer, visit music.youtube.com
  • 2. Click on your profile picture > Upload music. To learn more, read Google's help.
  • After you’ve uploaded your music, you can listen to it: • On your computer by visiting music.youtube.com • On your phone with the YT Music app

    Upload photos and videos

    Back up automatically

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • ![image 1137](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1137.png)

    Page 274

  • 2. Touch your profile icon > Turn on backup. You can change back up settings any time.
  • ![image 1138](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1138.png)

    Adjust back up settings

    To adjust settings for your automatic backups:

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • ![image 1139](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1139.png)

  • 2. Touch your profile icon > Photos settings > Backup.
  • ![image 1140](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1140.png)

  • 3. Adjust settings as needed:
  • • To choose high quality or original size for uploads, touch Backup quality.
  • • To back up items in your Download, Screenshots, and third-party app folders, touch Back up device
  • ####### folders.

    • To back up items over your cellular network, touch Mobile data usage, then adjust options for

    photos, videos, and roaming.

    Back up manually

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • Page 275

    ![image 1141](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1141.png)

  • 2. Open the photo or video.
  • 3. On the photo or video, touch . (Swipe up if you don't see .)
  • ![image 1142](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1142.png)

    ![image 1143](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1143.png)

    View your backed up photos and videos From your phone, open the Photos app. From your computer, sign in to photos.google.com.

    ![image 1144](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1144.png)

    Manage your storage

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • ![image 1145](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1145.png)

  • 2. Touch your profile icon > Photos settings > Backup.
  • ![image 1146](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1146.png)

  • 3. Touch Manage storage.
  • 4. View how many GB of storage you have used and approximately how much time your remaining storage will last. If you're running low, follow onscreen instructions to get more storage.
  • To review and delete recommended photos: a. Under Review and delete, touch a category (such as large photos and videos, blurry photos,
  • screenshots). b. Touch & hold an item to delete, then touch others to include. c. Touch .

    ![image 1147](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1147.png)

    Page 276

    More help

    To learn more, read Google's help.

    Scan documents and make copies

    Scan document to Drive

    Use your phone to scan documents directly to Google Drive.

  • 1. Open the Drive app.
  • 2. Touch .
  • ![image 1148](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1148.png)

  • 3. Position the document in the camera frame and hold your phone steady until the scan completes.
  • 4. If desired, use the tools at the bottom of the screen to crop, rotate, filter, or clean the scan.
  • 5. Tap Done.
  • 6. If desired, change the document title, location, or file type, then tap Save. In Drive, open the file and tap to share or print the scan.
  • ![image 1149](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1149.png)

    Scan and save to folders from your home screen

    Add Drive Scan widgets to your home screen to scan and save to new or selected folders. Each widget saves to a single folder on Drive. So, add multiple widgets, one for each folder you need (receipts, billing statements, recipes, etc.).

    Use location services

    About location information

    You can let your phone use GPS, Wi‑Fi networks, mobile networks, and sensors to estimate your location. Apps that have your permission can use this information to deliver location-based services, such as the ability to check in, view traffic, find nearby restaurants, or tag your photos with the location where you took them.

    Page 277

    Turn location on or off

    To control what location information your phone can use:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Location.
  • 2. Turn Use location on or off to give or remove permission to use your location information.
  • ![image 1150](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1150.png)

    ![image 1151](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1151.png)

    When it's off, your phone can't find your precise location or share it with any apps. However, turning this off disables many useful features and apps.

    Tip: To add a Location tile to quick settings, open quick settings. Tap . Then drag the Location tile where you want it.

    ![image 1152](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1152.png)

    Review apps using your location

    To see which apps have recently accessed your location:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Location > App location permissions. You'll see apps listed by those allowed all the time, some of the time, and not allowed.
  • 2. To change permissions, tap the app name, then select the location access you want.
  • Review services using your location

  • 1. Go to Settings > Location > Location services.
  • 2. Tap a service to open its settings:
  • Page 278

  • • Earthquake alerts: Sends you an alert about nearby earthquakes of magnitude 4.5 or more. (Not available in all countries.)
  • • Emergency Location Service: Sends your location to emergency responders when you call or text an emergency number.
  • • Google Location Accuracy: Improves location accuracy for Maps and Find My Device.
  • • Google Location History: Clear saved location details and turn location history on or off.
  • • Google Location Sharing: View who’s sharing your location, change sharing duration, and stop sharing.
  • • Carrier Location Access: Improves carrier services and analytics.
  • • Wi‑Fi scanning: Allow or prevent apps and services from scanning for Wi-Fi networks at any time, even when Wi-Fi is off.
  • • Bluetooth scanning: Allow or prevent apps and services from scanning for nearby Bluetooth devices at any time, even when Bluetooth is off.
  • Fix an issue

    Issue: Location isn't working After each step, check to see if the issue is fixed.

  • 1. Turn location off and then on again.
  • 2. Turn airplane mode on, wait 15-20 seconds, then turn it off again.
  • 3. If you're using a case, remove it and check if GPS is working. The case might be obstructing the sensor.
  • 4. Check if Battery saver is on. To save power, when Battery saver is on, your phone disables location services.
  • 5. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 6. Check for updates to the Maps app. After updating the app, restart your phone.
  • 7. Clear the cache and data for the Maps app.
  • 8. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed.
  • If location works correctly in safe mode, a 3rd party app is probably causing the issue. A lot of apps use your phone's location. If these apps end up with corrupted files, it can affect your phone’s location too.

    ##### Issue: Location isn't accurate Turn accuracy on:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Location.
  • 2. Touch Location services > Google Location Accuracy.
  • 3. Turn Improve location accuracy on .
  • ![image 1153](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1153.png)

    Page 279

    When this setting is on, your phone uses GPS, Wi-Fi, mobile networks, and sensors to get the most accurate location.

    When it's off, your phone uses only GPS to find location, which can be slower and less accurate.

    Let your phone scan for nearby Wi-Fi networks or Bluetooth devices:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Location.
  • 2. Touch Location services.
  • 3. Turn Wi‑Fi scanning and Bluetooth scanning on .
  • ![image 1154](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1154.png)

    Visual assistance

    Adjust colors if you’re color blind Color correction is an experimental feature and might not work correctly everywhere on your phone. Turn it on

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Color and motion.
  • 2. Tap Color correction and turn Use color correction on .
  • ![image 1155](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1155.png)

  • 3. To replace all screen colors with gray tones, choose Grayscale. Or, correct colors based on your vision:
  • How you see colors Option to choose

    It’s difficult to tell violet from blue. Yellow and green appear redder.

    Red-green (Green weak, deuteranomaly)

    Colors aren’t bright. Red, orange, and yellow appear greener.

    Page 280

    Red-green (Red weak, protanomaly)

    It’s difficult to tell yellow and red from pink. Blue appears greener.

    Blue-yellow (Tritanomaly)

    If colors don't appear as you expect, troubleshoot the issue. Add a shortcut To use an accessibility shortcut for quickly turning Color correction on/off:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Color and motion > Color correction.
  • 2. Turn Color correction shortcut on .
  • ![image 1156](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1156.png)

  • 3. Tap Color correction shortcut and choose one or more shortcuts:
  • • For a shortcut on your home screen, select Tap accessibility button.
  • ![image 1157](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1157.png)

  • • To press & hold both Volume buttons simultaneously, select Hold volume keys.
  • Use color inversion

    Color inversion flips all colors on your screen, turning light screens dark and dark screens light. This affects everything on screen, including media and images. While it can make reading text easier (light text on a dark background), it can also make it harder to understand images and videos.

    If you're using Dark theme to reduce eye strain when reading, you might encounter specific apps that don’t support it and still have a light background. Turn Color inversion on to use those apps with a dark background. You can use quick settings or a shortcut to easily turn Color inversion on and off.

    ##### Turn it on

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Color and motion.
  • 2. Tap Color inversion.
  • 3. Turn Use color inversion on . is added to your quick settings so you can easily turn it off/on.
  • Page 281

    ![image 1158](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1158.png)

    ![image 1159](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1159.png)

    Add a shortcut To use an accessibility shortcut as an alternate to the quick setting:

    ![image 1160](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1160.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Color and motion > Color inversion.
  • 2. Turn Color inversion shortcut on .
  • ![image 1161](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1161.png)

  • 3. Tap Color inversion shortcut and choose one or more shortcuts:
  • • For a shortcut on your home screen, select Tap accessibility button.
  • ![image 1162](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1162.png)

  • • To press & hold both Volume buttons simultaneously, select Hold volume keys. Use it Open quick settings and tap to turn it on/off. Or, if you set up accessibility shortcuts, tap or press & hold both Volume buttons.
  • ![image 1163](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1163.png)

    ![image 1164](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1164.png)

    Make screen extra dim

    If the brightness slider in quick settings doesn't go low enough, you can set the screen to extra dim.

    ![image 1165](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1165.png)

    Page 282

    ##### Set it up

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Extra dim.
  • 2. Turn Make screen extra dim on . The first time you do this, Extra dim is added to quick settings.
  • ![image 1166](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1166.png)

    ![image 1167](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1167.png)

  • 3. Use the Intensity slider to dim the screen.
  • 4. Optional: After you restart the phone, Extra dim will be turned off. To prevent this, turn on Keep on after device restarts .
  • ![image 1168](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1168.png)

    Add a shortcut To use an accessibility shortcut as an alternate to the quick setting:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Extra dim.
  • 2. Tap Extra dim shortcut and select the shortcuts to use:
  • • For a shortcut on your home screen, select Tap accessibility button.
  • ![image 1169](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1169.png)

  • • To press & hold both Volume buttons simultaneously, select Hold volume keys.
  • Use it Open quick settings and tap to turn it on/off. Touch & hold to adjust intensity and other settings. Or, if you set up accessibility shortcuts, tap or press & hold both Volume buttons.

    ![image 1170](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1170.png)

    ![image 1171](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1171.png)

    Page 283

    ![image 1172](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1172.png)

    Bold all text

    To change all text on the screen to bold for easier reading:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Display size and text.
  • 2. Turn Bold text on .
  • ![image 1173](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1173.png)

    Magnify the screen

    You can magnify the screen by triple tapping it or by swiping up from the bottom of the screen with two fingers. If you're using 3-button navigation, you can add to magnify.

    ![image 1174](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1174.png)

    Turn it on To set up the way to start (zoom in) and stop (zoom out) magnification:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Magnification.
  • 2. Turn Magnification shortcut on . The shortcut is added to your screen.
  • ![image 1175](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1175.png)

    ![image 1176](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1176.png)

  • 3. You can magnify the entire screen or you can use a magnifier that you can move around to zoom in on parts of the screen. To switch between methods, leave Magnification type set as Switch between full and partial screen.
  • If you want to always magnify the entire screen, tap Magnification type and choose Magnify full screen.

    If you only want the magnifier box, tap Magnification type and choose Magnify part of screen.

    Page 284

    Add a shortcut To use gestures in addition to the shortcut:

    ![image 1177](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1177.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Magnification.
  • 2. Tap Magnification shortcut and:
  • • To press & hold both Volume buttons simultaneously, select Hold volume keys.
  • • To quickly tap the screen three times, select Triple-tap screen.
  • Turning this on might make your phone feel slower. After you turn on magnification, single taps take slightly longer. This short delay lets your phone find out if your tap is part of a triple tap.

    ##### Use magnification

  • 1. To start magnification, tap . You'll see an orange border around the screen.
  • ![image 1178](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1178.png)

  • 2. Tap the area of the screen to magnify, then:
  • • Drag two or more fingers to scroll.
  • • Pinch two or more fingers to adjust zoom.
  • • Tap to magnify a framed area instead of the full screen. Then use two fingers or to drag the frame around the screen.
  • ![image 1179](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1179.png)

    ![image 1180](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1180.png)

  • • Tap to switch to full screen magnification.
  • Page 285

    ![image 1181](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1181.png)

  • 3. To turn magnification off, tap . The orange border disappears.
  • ![image 1182](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1182.png)

    To zoom temporarily:

  • 1. Start magnification: swipe up from bottom of screen with two fingers, or tap .
  • ![image 1183](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1183.png)

  • 2. Touch & hold anywhere on the screen, then:
  • • Drag to move around the screen.
  • • Lift your finger to zoom out.
  • You can't zoom in on the keyboard or the buttons.

    ![image 1184](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1184.png)

    ![image 1185](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1185.png)

    ![image 1186](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1186.png)

    Fix an issue If you open or close an app when zoomed in, your phone automatically zooms out. To zoom in again, use

    .

    ![image 1187](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1187.png)

    Page 286

    Use TalkBack to read screens Hear descriptions of everything you touch. Set it up

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility.
  • 2. Tap TalkBack and turn Use TalkBack on .
  • ![image 1188](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1188.png)

  • 3. Tap Settings and set the options you want. Add a shortcut To add an accessibility shortcut for quickly turning TalkBack on/off:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > TalkBack.
  • 2. Turn TalkBack shortcut on .
  • ![image 1189](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1189.png)

  • 3. Tap TalkBack shortcut and choose one or more shortcuts:
  • • For a shortcut on your home screen, select Tap accessibility button.
  • ![image 1190](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1190.png)

  • • To press & hold both Volume buttons simultaneously, select Hold volume keys.
  • When TalkBack is on To hear descriptions:
  • • Tap an item. Your phone speaks the name.
  • • Start typing. Your phone speaks each number or letter.
  • • Drag status bar down. Your phone speaks all of the notifications.
  • • Open a message, file, or book. Your phone reads the text out loud. To change readout volume:
  • • Press a Volume button to open volume settings, then use the slider to adjust the level.
  • ![image 1191](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1191.png)

    Page 287

  • • Or, during voice readout, repeatedly press a Volume button.
  • Stop readout If you added the shortcut, tap or press & hold both Volume buttons. Or, turn TalkBack off:

    ![image 1192](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1192.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility.
  • 2. Tap TalkBack and turn Use TalkBack off .
  • ![image 1193](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1193.png)

    Hear audio description of movies and shows

    For movies and shows that support it, you can hear a description of what’s happening on screen.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility.
  • 2. Turn Audio description on or off .
  • ![image 1194](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1194.png)

    ![image 1195](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1195.png)

    More assistance

    You can also:

  • • Use voice commands
  • • Dictate text instead of typing
  • • Set your phone to make confirmation sounds after you touch or unlock the screen
  • • Assign a ringtone for notifications from specific apps
  • Page 288

    Hearing assistance

    Caption all speech Your phone can automatically caption videos, podcasts, audio messages, and recordings. Turn captions on/off

    Press a Volume button, then turn it on or off . (If you don't see this icon, change caption settings to add it.)

    ![image 1196](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1196.png)

    ![image 1197](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1197.png)

    Or, go to Settings > Accessibility > Live Caption and turn it on or off . Battery use: When your battery gets low and Battery saver is on, Live Caption automatically turns off. Use the caption box

    ![image 1198](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1198.png)

    ![image 1199](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1199.png)

  • • To move captions, drag the box.
  • • To expand or shrink captions, touch the box twice.
  • Change caption settings You can hide or show:

  • • Profanity
  • • Sound labels (laughter, applause, music)
  • • Caption icon ( ) in volume controls
  • ![image 1200](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1200.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Live Caption.
  • 2. Turn settings on or off .
  • Page 289

    ![image 1201](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1201.png)

    ![image 1202](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1202.png)

    Turn on video captions

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility.
  • 2. Tap Caption preferences and turn Show captions on .
  • ![image 1203](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1203.png)

  • 3. Specify options (language, text size, and style) for closed captioning.
  • Use hearing devices

    To get phone audio in your hearing device, pair it with your phone.

  • 1. Tap .
  • ![image 1204](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1204.png)

  • 2. Tap > Settings > Accessibility.
  • ![image 1205](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1205.png)

  • 3. Turn Hearing aids on . During a call, hold the phone to your ear, then rotate or move it to get the best position for speaking and listening.
  • ![image 1206](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1206.png)

    ![image 1207](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1207.png)

    Use real-time text (RTT) during calls

    Page 290

    Not all carriers support this feature.

    Real-time text (RTT) lets you use text to communicate during a phone call. Your phone sends text as you type and the recipient can read your message while you write.

    RTT:

  • • Uses call minutes, just like a voice call
  • • Doesn't require additional accessories
  • ##### Turn RTT on

  • 1. Tap .
  • ![image 1208](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1208.png)

  • 2. Tap > Settings > Accessibility.
  • ![image 1209](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1209.png)

  • 3. Tap the real-time text option and turn it on or select when you want it to appear. Make a call with RTT
  • 1. Tap .
  • ![image 1210](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1210.png)

  • 2. Call the number. While the phone rings, the other person's screen displays an RTT indicator.
  • 3. After the other person answers, enter a message in the text field. The text that you enter is visible to the other person as you type.
  • 4. During a call, you can tap to mute the call, turn on the speaker, return to the keypad, or add a call.
  • ![image 1211](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1211.png)

    Page 291

  • 5. To end the call, tap .
  • ![image 1212](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1212.png)

    Set up TTY device Not all carriers support this feature. For text-based communication, you can use text messaging and email. If you prefer to connect to a TTY device:

  • 1. Tap .
  • ![image 1213](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1213.png)

  • 2. Tap > Settings > Accessibility > TTY mode.
  • ![image 1214](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1214.png)

    ######## 3. Select a mode:

  • • TTY Full: Type and read text on your TTY device.
  • • TTY HCO: Type text on your TTY and listen to voice replies on your phone.
  • • TTY VCO: Speak into your phone and read text replies on your TTY.
  • ######## 4. Connect your phone and TTY with the audio cord that came with your TTY.

    Dexterity assistance

    Change timing controls

    If you need more time to respond to a notification or messages that are visible only temporarily, you can adjust the time before they disappear:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility.
  • 2. Tap Timing controls.
  • 3. Adjust settings:
  • Page 292

  • • You can adjust the amount of time before your touch/tap on the screen becomes touch & hold. If you find that you accidentally touch & hold when you intend to tap, choose a longer delay. Use Touch & hold delay to select short, medium, or long delay.
  • • If messages that ask you to take action are disappearing too quickly, tap Time to take action and choose a longer time. Not all apps support this setting.
  • • If you’re using a connected mouse, you can set the cursor to click automatically when the cursor stops moving for an amount of time. Tap Autoclick (dwell timing) and select the amount of time.
  • Use external switch or keyboard If you’re unable to use a touchscreen, Switch Access lets you control the phone using external switches or keyboard keys to select items, scroll, enter text, and more. To use Switch Access, you must have one of the following: • An external switch. USB or Bluetooth switch devices send keystroke signals to your phone.

    • An external keyboard. Standard USB or Bluetooth keyboards can work as switch devices by assigning

    one or more keys to actions. Set up Switch Access

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility.
  • 2. Tap Switch Access.
  • 3. Turn Use Switch Access on .
  • ![image 1215](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1215.png)

  • 4. Follow onscreen instructions to select:
  • • Number of switches
  • • Face gesture settings
  • • Scanning options
  • • Switch assignments To adjust options for Switch Access later, go to Settings > Accessibility > Switch Access > Settings. Use Switch Access
  • 1. Connect the external device to your phone by pairing with Bluetooth or using USB. See the manufacturer’s instructions for details.
  • ######## 2. Press the assigned switch or key to scan and highlight items on the screen or to select highlighteditems.

    Use accessibility shortcuts

    Page 293

    About accessibility shortcuts Shortcut: Essential controls for your phone The accessibility menu gives quick access to essential features on your phone. Shortcut: Accessibility features Easily turn accessibility features on/off from any screen. For each feature you're using, you can:

    ![image 1216](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1216.png)

  • • Add a button to the screen. The button fades when not in use.
  • If you set up multiple buttons, they display as a group; drag to reposition the group around the sides of the screen.

    If you're using gesture navigation, you can set up a gesture instead of buttons.

  • • Set your phone so that you press both Volume buttons to turn the feature on/off.
  • If you set this up for multiple accessibility features, you'll see a list of those features when you press both Volume buttons.

    Use accessibility menu of essential controls

    Open a large menu where you can:

  • • Call your assistant
  • • Open accessibility settings
  • • Lock or turn off the phone
  • • Adjust volume
  • • Adjust brightness
  • • See recent apps to return to one
  • • Take a screenshot
  • • Open quick settings
  • ##### Turn it on

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility.
  • 2. Tap Accessibility Menu.
  • Page 294

  • 3. Turn Accessibility Menu shortcut on .
  • ![image 1217](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1217.png)

  • 4. To increase the size of the buttons on this menu, tap Settings, then turn Large buttons on .
  • ![image 1218](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1218.png)

    Use it If you're using gesture navigation:

  • Use two fingers to swipe up from the bottom of the screen.
  • Choose an option from the menu. If you're using 3-button navigation:
  • 1. At the bottom of the screen, tap .
  • ![image 1219](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1219.png)

  • 2. Choose an option from the menu.
  • Manage accessibility buttons

    For each accessibility feature you're using, you can add a button to the screen to quickly turn the feature on/off.

    ##### Add buttons

    When you turn on an accessibility feature in Settings > Accessibility, if the feature supports shortcuts, you'll see a switch to turn on the shortcut. Tap the switch's name to see options for adding the button and assigning the feature to the Volume buttons.

    Change button size and transparency This setting applies to the shortcuts for all accessibility features.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Accessibility shortcuts.
  • 2. If you're using 3-button navigation, tap Accessibility button. If you're using gesture navigation, tap Accessibility button & gesture.
  • Page 295

  • 3. Adjust how the buttons look and work:
  • • Tap Size and choose Large or Small.
  • • To keep the buttons always visible, turn Fade when not in use off .
  • ![image 1220](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1220.png)

  • • To make the buttons more or less transparent, drag the Transparency when not in use slider.
  • ##### Gesture navigation: Choose between buttons and gesture

    If you’re using gesture navigation, you can choose between using a gesture or a button for accessibility shortcuts. This setting applies to the shortcuts for all accessibility features.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Accessibility > Accessibility shortcuts.
  • 2. Tap Accessibility button & gesture.
  • 3. Tap Use button or gesture and select which to use.
  • Press Volume buttons for accessibility features You can press & hold the Volume buttons to turn accessibility features on/off. Set it up

  • 1. When you turn on an accessibility feature in Settings > Accessibility, if the feature supports shortcuts, you'll see a switch to turn on the shortcut. Tap the switch's name to see the option for using the Volume button gesture as the shortcut.
  • 2. If you've assigned two or more accessibility features to the Volume buttons, you can add more shortcuts with the gesture. Press & hold both Volume buttons, then tap Edit shortcuts to select from a list of all accessibility features.
  • ###### Use the shortcut Press & hold the Volume Up and Down buttons at the same time for three seconds. If you assigned multiple accessibility features, you'll see a list. Tap a feature to it turn on/off.

    Find accessible apps and devices

    Motorola phones are tested with assistive technologies including TalkBack, Magnification, Voice Access, and Switch Access.

    Learn about accessibility features of various electronic devices, including mobile phones, tablets, smart TVs, and wearables at gari.info

    Page 296

    App listings in the Play Store app have tags in the “About this app” section that identify their accessibilty features. Tap a tag to explore apps with similar accessibilty features.

    Set or change default apps If you have multiple apps that do the same thing, you can pick which app to use by default. Pick when asked

    Sometimes, your phone asks which app to use. For example, your phone might ask which app to use to open a PDF file.

    To set a default when asked:

  • 1. Tap the app to use.
  • 2. Pick how often you want to use that app for this action: Always or Just once. If you select Always, you won’t be asked which app to use anymore. To have your phone ask you again, you can clear the default:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps.
  • 2. Tap Default apps > Opening links.
  • 3. Tap the app you selected as default.
  • 4. Turn Open supported links on .
  • ![image 1221](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1221.png)

    Pick any time You can change some default apps (such as browser or messaging) at any time:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps.
  • 2. Touch Default apps.
  • 3. Touch the default to change.
  • 4. Touch the app to use.
  • Adjust special app access

    In Settings > Apps > Special app access, you can adjust these settings:

    • Usage access: Control which apps have access to data about your app usage (what other apps you're

    Page 297

    using and how often, your carrier, language settings, and other details).

    • Unrestricted data: Allow certain apps to use background data even when Data Saver is on. Learn more.

    You can also control whether apps have access to features such as Picture-in-picture, Battery optimization, and Do Not Disturb. In general, you shouldn’t need to adjust these.

    Add or remove accounts

    Add accounts

    You can connect to your accounts, including your Google account, your Moto account, email, and social networking accounts.

    ##### Google account

    When you set up your phone, you were prompted to add a Google account. If you skipped it then, be sure to set one up now so you can download apps from Play Store, get a customized information feed, and take full advantage of the Calendar, Gmail, and other apps included with your Google account.

    To add a Google account:

  • 1. Go to Settings.
  • 2. Tap Passwords & accounts > Add account.
  • 3. Tap Google and follow the onscreen instructions to add an existing account or to create a new one.
  • 4. Once the account is added, Calendar, Contacts, and other account features and apps are updated with information from that account. You can review and change what syncs with your phone for that account.
  • Tip: Keep your apps up-to-date. To see if newer versions of the apps associated with your Google account are available, open the Play Store app and tap your profile icon > Manage apps & device.

    ![image 1222](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1222.png)

    Email or other app account Accounts are automatically added when you:

  • • Set up corporate email
  • • Set up personal email for non-Gmail addresses
  • • Install apps that require a username/password to log in, such as messaging, shopping, or streaming content
  • Page 298

    To review these accounts or add another:

  • 1. Go to Settings.
  • 2. Tap Passwords & accounts > Add account.
  • 3. Tap the type of account to add and follow the onscreen instructions.
  • If you don't see the type of account you want to add, install the related app from Play Store, then sign into your account through the app.

  • 4. Once the account is added, account-related features and apps are updated with information from that account. To review and change what syncs with your phone, tap the account type, then account name.
  • Remove accounts

    If you remove an account, information you synced will be removed from your phone, but it is not deleted from your account.

    To remove an account:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Passwords & accounts.
  • 2. Tap the account name.
  • 3. Tap Remove account.
  • Tip: If you have trouble removing a corporate account, go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings > Device admin apps and turn off the app for the account, then try to remove it again.

    Change name & info in your Google account

    You can update, add, and remove basic info for your Google account:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Google > Manage your Google Account.
  • 2. Touch Personal info.
  • 3. Update information as needed. Add or change your profile picture, edit your name and birthday. Learn
  • Page 299

    more. Forgot your Google password, or want to change it? Learn how to reset your password. Other questions about your account? Read Google's help.

    Sync apps with your Google account

    When your phone syncs, your Google apps refresh their data, and you get notifications about updates.

    See which apps auto-sync

    By default, apps made by Google sync automatically. You can turn auto-sync off and back on for individual apps.

    Whether other apps (not made by Google) can sync varies by app. See which Google apps auto-sync

  • 1. Go to Settings > Passwords & accounts.
  • 2. Tap the account name.
  • 3. Tap Account sync.
  • 4. Review the list of your Google apps and when they last synced. Check other apps To see if your other apps can auto-sync:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Passwords & accounts.
  • 2. Review the list of accounts:
  • • If the app isn’t listed, then it can’t auto-sync.
  • • If it is listed, tap its name to see any sync options you can adjust. Turn off auto-sync
  • Turning off auto-sync doesn’t remove the app or your data. It only stops the app from automatically refreshing your data.

    ##### Turn off for certain Google apps

  • 1. Go to Settings > Passwords & accounts.
  • 2. If you have multiple accounts on your phone, tap the one you want.
  • 3. Tap Account sync.
  • 4. Turn off the apps you don’t want to auto-sync.
  • Page 300

    For example, sync your Calendar and Gmail but don't sync Drive. Turn off for your Google account

  • 1. Go to Settings > Passwords & accounts.
  • 2. Turn Automatically sync app data off .
  • ![image 1223](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1223.png)

    To receive emails, calendar reminders, or other notifications from Google apps, you’ll need to sync manually.

    Tip: Turning off auto-sync can help save battery life. To resume auto-sync after your battery recharges, turn it back on again.

    ![image 1224](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1224.png)

    Sync manually

  • 1. Go to Settings > Passwords & accounts.
  • 2. Tap the account name.
  • 3. Tap Account sync > > Sync now.
  • ![image 1225](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1225.png)

    Fix an issue

    Select an issue to see troubleshooting steps:

  • • Account sync issues
  • • Forgot password for Google account
  • • Problems with Facebook, WhatsApp, other apps
  • Page 301

    Control what info Google collects

    Google collects information from you to provide personalized services and tailored content, as outlined in the Google Privacy Policy.

    You can review, delete, and control the information Google collects about you. Learn more from Google about:

  • • Viewing and controlling what information is collected (search, YouTube, recordings of your voice commands, location).
  • • Deleting your search history and other activity.
  • • Reviewing your location history.
  • • Any other questions about your account.
  • About security

    Screen lock options

    To keep your phone secure, use a screen lock when it goes to sleep:

  • • Set up a pattern, PIN, or password to unlock your phone.
  • • Set up facial recognition if you want to unlock with your face.
  • • Keep your phone unlocked when you’re at a defined place, connected to a defined Bluetooth device, or carrying the phone. When your phone is locked, you can:
  • • Access notifications and quick settings, start a call, and open the camera from the lock screen.
  • • Make emergency calls on a locked phone. A locked phone still rings; you don't need to unlock it to
  • answer. If you forgot your pattern, PIN, or password, follow these steps. You can customize the lock screen by adding your contact info. You can also control which notifications appear on your lock screen.

    Fingerprint sensor

    Quickly and easily verify your identity using the fingerprint sensor on your phone, instead of entering a password, PIN, or pattern to unlock the phone, make online and in-store purchases, and sign into banking and financial apps.

    You can add and remove fingerprints. Fingerprints:

    • Are created from features of your fingertip, converted to a mathematical representation, and then

    Page 302

    encrypted and stored only on the phone. No fingerprint images are ever stored.

  • • Are never shared with Google or Motorola.
  • • Are never shared with other apps. Your phone only shares the verification, not the fingerprint.
  • Note: A fingerprint screen lock may be less secure than a strong pattern or PIN lock. It is possible to unlock the phone using a physical copy of a matching fingerprint.

    Additional security options

  • • Protect your phone in case it’s lost or stolen. Use Find My Device.
  • • Connect to a virtual private network if you need to access files on a secure network.
  • • See when apps are using your microphone and camera and block them if needed.
  • • Add a SIM lock to prevent others from using your cellular plan and accessing account information if your phone is stolen.
  • • Prevent viruses and other attacks on your data and privacy with Google Play Protect.
  • Protect against harmful apps

    Scan phone for harmful apps

    Play Protect helps keep your phone secure by automatically scanning your apps, including sideloaded apps, to check for potentially harmful apps (malware).

    If Play Protect finds a potentially harmful app, it stops the app from running and warns you so that you can uninstall it.

    To see the results or to rescan:

  • 1. Open the Play Store app.
  • 2. Tap your profile icon > Play Protect.
  • ![image 1226](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1226.png)

  • 3. Review the results of the latest scan, or tap Scan. Play Protect is on by default. To learn more, read Google's help.
  • Page 303

    If your phone seems slow

    If you’ve scanned your phone to confirm there aren’t any potentially harmful apps but your phone seems slow, troubleshoot the issue.

    Make sure your phone can be found

    Make sure your phone can be found. Find My Device allows you to remotely locate, lock, and erase your phone.

    If you ever need to find your phone, your phone will need to:

  • • Be turned on
  • • Be signed in to a Google account
  • • Be connected to mobile data or Wi-Fi
  • • Have location services turned on. If location services are off, you can lock or erase the phone, but cannot locate it.
  • • Have Find My Device turned on To check that Find My Device is on for your phone:
  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • 2. Tap Find My Device and turn it on . To confirm that you can find your phone, go to android.com/find on your phone or from a computer. If you have lost your phone, consider calling your carrier to suspend your account. If your phone doesn't have a SIM lock and it's stolen, someone could use your SIM card.
  • ![image 1227](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1227.png)

    Set a screen lock

    You can set up a screen lock to secure your phone. Each time you turn on your phone or turn on the screen, you’ll be asked to unlock it.

    Set or change screen lock

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • 3. Tap Screen lock and select the type of lock you want.
  • Page 304

    Some lock options aren't available if you added a VPN or a work (corporate) email account to your phone.

    Tip: After you set up a pattern, PIN, or password, you can set up fingerprint security to unlock your phone with the fingerprint sensor.

    Screen lock types

    No lock:

  • • None: This gives no protection, but you can quickly access your home screen.
  • • Swipe: Swipe up. This prevents accidental dialing but doesn't secure the phone. Standard lock:
  • ![image 1228](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1228.png)

  • • Pattern: Draw a pattern on a grid.
  • • PIN: Enter a four to sixteen digit numeric code. Longer PINs are more secure.
  • • Password: Enter four to sixteen letters, digits, or symbols for the password. A long, strong password is the most secure option. Biometrics:
  • • Unlock with your face
  • • Unlock with your fingerprint You must set up one of the 3 standard locks in order to use biometrics.
  • Unlock or lock automatically

    If you're using a PIN, password, or pattern, you can:

  • • Prevent repetitive unlocking by keeping your phone unlocked when you’re at a defined place, connected to a defined Bluetooth device, or carrying the phone.
  • • Instantly lock your phone when you move out of range of a defined place, disconnect from a defined Bluetooth device, or disconnect from a defined Wi-Fi network. No need to remember to manually lock your screen or wait for the full time before locking.
  • Tip: Some of these options aren't available if you added a VPN or a work (corporate) email account to your phone.

    Remove screen lock

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • Page 305

  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • 3. Tap Screen lock.
  • 4. Enter your current PIN, password, or pattern to confirm your identity.
  • 5. Select None or Swipe.
  • Quickly tighten lock screen security

    Unlocking with the fingerprint sensor and setting up automatic unlocking make it easier to keep your phone secure and minimize when you need to enter your PIN, pattern, or password. But sometimes you need to trade convenience for more security. You can temporarily tighten locks and prevent lock screen notifications.

  • 1. Swipe down from the top of the screen twice, then touch > Power off. Or, press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then touch Power off.
  • ![image 1229](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1229.png)

  • 2. Touch Lockdown.
  • Your fingerprint sensor and automatic unlock settings are disabled and notifications won’t be displayed on your lock screen.

  • 3. To exit Lockdown, unlock your phone with your PIN, pattern, or password.
  • Set advanced lock options Use these options to control when your phone locks and whether your code is visible when you unlock. You can also control what content is included on your lock screen.

    Set time before locking Unless kept unlocked automatically, your phone locks the screen five seconds after the screen turns off. To increase or decrease the amount of time before automatically locking the screen:

  • 1. Open the Moto Secure app. Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • ![image 1230](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1230.png)

  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • 3. Next to Screen lock, tap .
  • ![image 1231](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1231.png)

    Page 306

  • 4. Tap Lock after screen timeout, then select a duration.
  • Stop Power button from instantly locking

    You can manually lock your phone by pressing the Power button. If you want the Power button to turn off the screen but not lock it:

  • 1. Open the Moto Secure app. Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • ![image 1232](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1232.png)

  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • 3. Next to Screen lock, tap .
  • ![image 1233](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1233.png)

  • 4. Tap Power button instantly locks off . After the screen turns off, your phone will still lock after the time set for the automatic lock.
  • ![image 1234](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1234.png)

    Control network and security functions

    When your screen locks, your network and security functions are also locked, making it easier to locate your phone and protect your data if your phone is lost or stolen.

    Anyone using these quick settings or Power menu options from the lock screen must unlock the screen to continue:

  • • Internet
  • • Airplane mode
  • • Battery saver
  • • Location
  • • Data Saver
  • • Power off
  • Page 307

  • • Reset options The screen also has to be unlocked before Google Assistant can do anything related to those features.
  • ####### 1. Open the Moto Secure app.Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy > Device lock and tap next to Screen lock.

    ![image 1235](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1235.png)

    ![image 1236](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1236.png)

    ####### 2. Tap Lock Network and security, then:

  • • For best protection if your phone is lost or stolen, turn it on .
  • ![image 1237](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1237.png)

  • • If you don't need higher security and want to access these features in quick settings without
  • unlocking, turn it off .

    ![image 1238](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1238.png)

    Hide your pattern or PIN

    You can hide your PIN or pattern to prevent others from viewing it when you unlock your screen. If you use a PIN, you can scramble the order of the numbers on the pad.

    If you're using a pattern screen lock, make it more secure by hiding finger traces on the screen when you draw:

  • 1. Open the Moto Secure app and tap Security & privacy. Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • ![image 1239](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1239.png)

  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • Page 308

  • 3. Next to Screen lock, tap .
  • ![image 1240](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1240.png)

  • 4. Tap Make pattern visible off . If you're using a PIN screen lock, make it harder for someone to see the PIN you enter by scrambling the order of the numbers on the PIN pad:
  • ![image 1241](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1241.png)

  • 1. Open the Moto Secure app and tap Security & privacy. Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • ![image 1242](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1242.png)

  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • 3. Next to Screen lock, tap .
  • ![image 1243](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1243.png)

  • 4. Turn PIN pad scramble on .
  • ![image 1244](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1244.png)

    Hide passwords

    To control whether characters briefly display when you enter a password to unlock your phone or log into websites and apps:

    ####### 1. Open the Moto Secure app and touch Privacy controls.Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy > Privacy > Privacy controls.

    ![image 1245](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1245.png)

    ####### 2. Turn Show passwords off .

    ![image 1246](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1246.png)

    Page 309

    Use fingerprint security

    Set up fingerprint security

    The fingerprint sensor is part of your screen and appears only when you need it. Use it to unlock your phone, make fast and secure online and in-store purchases, and sign into bank and finance apps.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • 3. Tap Fingerprint, then unlock your phone.
  • 4. Follow the onscreen instructions to scan your fingerprint. Fingerprints are stored securely on the phone.
  • ##### Add more fingerprints Keep in mind that:

    • If multiple users share the phone, users should add their fingerprints from within their user profile,

    instead of adding multiple fingerprints to your owner profile.

    • Anyone whose fingerprints are added to a user profile can unlock the phone and authorize purchases

    with the associated Google account or apps. Add a fingerprint for each finger you want to use with the sensor:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • 3. Tap Fingerprint and enter your pattern, PIN, or password to verify your identity.
  • 4. Tap Add fingerprint.
  • 5. Use the fingerprint sensor to scan another fingerprint.
  • 6. Rename each fingerprint. Tap the current name, type a name, and tap OK. Remove a fingerprint
  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • 3. Tap Fingerprint and enter your pattern, PIN, or password to verify your identity.
  • Page 310

  • 4. Tap next to the fingerprint.
  • ![image 1247](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1247.png)

    Change fingerprint animation You can adjust how the fingerprint icon animates in response to your touching the sensor:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • 2. Tap Device lock.
  • 3. Tap Fingerprint and enter your pattern, PIN, or password to verify your identity.
  • 4. Tap Animation styles and make a selection.
  • Use fingerprint to unlock phone

    To wake and unlock your screen, or any time you see on the screen, touch the sensor to verify your identity.

    ![image 1248](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1248.png)

    Tip: You can temporarily tighten security by turning off fingerprint unlocking and lock screen notifications with Lockdown mode.

    Use fingerprint to sign in to apps

    To use the fingerprint sensor with third-party apps:

  • • Be sure the app supports fingerprint recognition.
  • • Install the app and open its settings to adjust options, like enabling fingerprint unlock.
  • • Consult the app's help info for more instructions.
  • Why am I still asked for PIN/pattern?

    For maximum security, you still need to enter your pattern, PIN, or password:

  • • Every time you power up your phone
  • Page 311

  • • When more than 72 hours have passed since you last unlocked the phone
  • • When you go to Settings > Security & privacy > Device lock > Fingerprint
  • • When the sensor can’t read the fingerprint Fix an issue
  • Issue: Sometimes the sensor can’t read my fingerprints.

    Each finger has a unique print. If you’ve added only one fingerprint, add more for other fingers you want to use with the sensor.

    The sensor may have trouble reading fingerprints if your finger is:

  • • Wet
  • • Oily
  • • Dirty
  • • Injured
  • If a registered fingerprint isn't working as expected, remove and re-add the fingerprint. If your finger is injured, add fingerprints for your other fingers and use them until healed.

    ##### Issue: Fingerprint option disappeared from Security & privacy menu. After each troubleshooting step, check to see if your issue is fixed.

  • 1. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 2. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • ######## 3. Check for app updates.Open the Play Store app, then touch your profile icon > Manage apps & device.

    ![image 1249](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1249.png)

    ######## 4. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed.

    If the sensor works correctly in safe mode, a 3rd party app is probably causing the issue. These apps can cause issues: lock screen apps, app locks that use the fingerprint sensor, RAM boosters, and RAM cleaners.

    ######## 5. Reset the phone.

    Page 312

    Auto lock when you leave or disconnect

    Take the worry out of remembering to lock your phone when you’re in less secure circumstances. Auto lock will lock your phone immediately for you instead of waiting for the full time before locking when it detects that you’ve:

  • • Left a trusted place like home
  • • Disconnected from a trusted Bluetooth device like a car audio system or headphones, indicating you
  • may no longer be using it for a while

    • Disconnected from a trusted Wi-Fi network To set it up:

  • 1. Open the Moto Secure app. Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings.
  • ![image 1250](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1250.png)

  • 2. Tap Auto lock.
  • 3. Turn Use Auto lock on .
  • ![image 1251](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1251.png)

  • 4. Add a trusted place, Bluetooth device, or Wi-Fi network:
  • • Tap Trusted places > , adjust the Radius slider to the amount of area you want to include for the location, then tap Save location. Add a location name and tap OK.
  • ![image 1252](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1252.png)

  • • Tap Trusted devices > . If needed, tap Pair new device and add the device. Tap and mark the checkbox for the connected device, then tap Save.
  • ![image 1253](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1253.png)

    ![image 1254](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1254.png)

    Page 313

  • • Tap Trusted networks, then turn the Wi-Fi network on , or tap to connect to a new network you want to add as trusted.
  • ![image 1255](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1255.png)

    ![image 1256](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1256.png)

    Prevent repetitive unlocking

    If you find yourself unlocking over and over, use Google's Extend Unlock to bypass the screen timeout and keep your phone unlocked when you’re in more secure circumstances such as:

  • • At a trusted place like home, where you’re not concerned about others accessing your phone
  • • When you’re connected to a trusted Bluetooth device like a car audio system or headphones
  • • When you’re carrying the phone around with you To set it up:
  • 1. Go to Settings.
  • 2. Tap Security & privacy > More security settings > Extend Unlock. If you don't see Extend Unlock, try the following:
  • • Update Google Play services. In the Google Search widget on your home screen, search for “Google

    Play services”, then tap the app to open it.

    • Go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings > Trust agents and enable Extend

    Unlock.

  • 3. Unlock your phone.
  • 4. Adjust settings:
  • • To remain unlocked when you’re at a trusted place like home, tap Trusted places. Tap , drag the screen so the location pin is in the right place, then tap to select the location.
  • ![image 1257](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1257.png)

    Page 314

    ![image 1258](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1258.png)

  • • To remain unlocked when you’re connected to one of your Bluetooth devices, tap Trusted devices, then tap the name of the device. If you haven’t paired any devices yet, tap Pair new device.
  • • To remain unlocked when you’re carrying your phone around, tap On-body detection and turn it on .
  • ![image 1259](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1259.png)

    For more help with Extend Unlock, see Google’s help.

    Unlock with your face

    Before using face matching

    Keep in mind that:

  • • If your phone has been locked for more than 4 hours, face matching won't work until you first unlock with another method.
  • • Looking at your phone can unlock it, even when you don't intend to.
  • • Your phone can be unlocked by someone who looks a lot like you.
  • • Your phone can be unlocked by someone else if it’s held up to your face while your eyes are open. Keep your phone in a safe place. To prepare for unsafe situations, you can turn on lockdown.
  • Set up face matching

  • 1. Make sure you have set a screen lock on the phone.
  • 2. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > Device lock > Face Unlock.
  • 3. Unlock your phone.
  • 4. Follow the onscreen instructions. Be sure to frame your entire face with the outline. Face matching data is stored securely on the phone.
  • 5. Select face unlock options.
  • Whenever you turn on or wake the phone, it will search for your face and unlock the screen when it recognizes you.

    Page 315

    ![image 1260](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1260.png)

    Unlock your phone Show your face to the lock screen. If it doesn't recognize you, it stays locked and displays one of these icons.

    ####### Icon How to unlock

    ![image 1261](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1261.png)

    Use your password, PIN, or pattern

    ![image 1262](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1262.png)

    Use the fingerprint sensor

    Change unlock options

    ##### For direct access to your home screen or last used app

    Skip the Power button and just show the phone your face to unlock and go straight to your home screen or last used app. To set it up:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > Device lock > Face Unlock.
  • 2. Turn both Lift to unlock and Skip lock screen on .
  • ![image 1263](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1263.png)

    Turn off face matching

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > Device lock > Face Unlock.
  • 2. Unlock your phone.
  • 3. Tap Delete face data.
  • The phone will no longer recognize your face, and the data is deleted. To turn it on again, set up face matching again.

    Page 316

    Fix an issue

    If you're having trouble getting the phone to recognize your face:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > Device lock > Face Unlock.
  • 2. Unlock your phone, then tap Redo face scan.
  • 3. Be sure you are in a well lit environment. Avoid low light, strong light, and backlit environments to ensure the face image is clear.
  • 4. Follow the onscreen instructions.
  • Pin an app screen

    Turn on pinning

    Use pinning to keep the current app in view until you unpin it. For example, you can pin a game and your child cannot navigate anywhere else on your phone.

    You can set up a pattern, PIN, or password required to unpin.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings > App pinning.
  • 2. Turn pinning on.
  • 3. By default, you must always enter your pattern, PIN, or password when unpinning a screen. If you don't want this security before accessing your other phone screens, turn this option off.
  • Pin and unpin an app

    To pin a screen:

  • 1. Make sure you've turned on pinning and have recently opened the app you want to pin.
  • 2. Drag up from the bottom of the screen, hold, then release.
  • 3. In the recent app list, touch the app’s icon at the top of the preview to see . Be sure to touch the app’s icon instead of the preview, which opens the app.
  • ![image 1264](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1264.png)

    Page 317

  • 4. Touch . To unpin it:
  • ![image 1265](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1265.png)

  • 1. Drag up from the bottom of the screen and hold.
  • 2. If you required a pattern, PIN, or password when you turned on pinning, enter it to unlock the phone.
  • Protect apps in a secure folder

    Keep your information private by putting sensitive apps in a secure folder. You can lock apps in the folder, hide the folder, and limit what information gets shown in notifications from your secure apps.

    Set up the folder

  • 1. Open the Moto Secure app. Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings.
  • ![image 1266](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1266.png)

  • 2. Tap Secure folder, then unlock your phone.
  • 3. Choose a lock type for your secure folder and set up the lock:
  • • Pattern: Draw a pattern on a grid.
  • • PIN: Enter a four to sixteen digit numeric code. Longer PINs are more secure.
  • • Password: Enter four to sixteen letters, digits, or symbols. A long, strong password is the most
  • secure option.

  • 4. To add apps, tap . Learn more. You’ll now see Secure folder in your app tray or on your home screen.
  • ![image 1267](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1267.png)

    Page 318

    ![image 1268](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1268.png)

    Disguise or hide folder

    You can change the icon and app name to make the Secure folder more discreet. Or, you can hide it in the app tray or on home screen and access it only through Settings or Moto Secure.

    ![image 1269](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1269.png)

    ![image 1270](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1270.png)

    ##### Change your folder's icon and name

  • 1. Open Secure folder and unlock it.
  • ![image 1271](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1271.png)

  • 2. Tap > Disguised icons and turn Use disguised icons on .
  • ![image 1272](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1272.png)

    ![image 1273](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1273.png)

  • 3. Choose an alternative icon.
  • 4. Type a different app name.
  • 5. Tap .
  • ![image 1274](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1274.png)

    ##### Restore original icon

  • 1. Open the Moto Secure app. Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings.
  • ![image 1275](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1275.png)

    Page 319

  • 2. Tap Secure folder.
  • 3. Tap > Disguised icons and turn Use disguised icons off .
  • ![image 1276](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1276.png)

    ![image 1277](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1277.png)

    ##### Hide Secure folder

    To hide the Secure folder in the Moto Secure app and in on your app tray or home screen (if you don't use an app tray):

    ![image 1278](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1278.png)

  • 1. Open Secure folder and unlock it.
  • ![image 1279](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1279.png)

  • 2. Tap > Stealth mode.
  • ![image 1280](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1280.png)

  • 3. Turn Stealth mode on and select where you want it to be invisible: in the Moto Secure app, in your app tray, or both.
  • ![image 1281](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1281.png)

    ![image 1282](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1282.png)

    To access your hidden Secure folder:

  • • Open Moto Secure and tap Secure folder (if you're using Stealth mode only for your app tray).
  • Page 320

    ![image 1283](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1283.png)

  • • Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings > Secure folder.
  • ##### Unhide Secure folder

  • 1. Open the Moto Secure app. Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings.
  • ![image 1284](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1284.png)

  • 2. Tap Secure folder.
  • 3. Tap > Stealth mode.
  • ![image 1285](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1285.png)

  • 4. Turn off Stealth mode options. The Secure folder is visible again in your app tray or on your home screen.
  • Manage secure apps and notifications You can add and remove apps from your secure folder, and control notifications from the secure apps. Add apps

  • 1. Open Secure folder and unlock it.
  • ![image 1286](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1286.png)

  • 2. Tap , then:
  • ![image 1287](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1287.png)

  • • To add an installed app, search or swipe to the app name and mark its checkbox. Repeat for all apps you want to add, then tap .
  • ![image 1288](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1288.png)

    ![image 1289](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1289.png)

    Page 321

  • • To install an app into the secure folder, tap Add from Google Play and install it.
  • 3. If the app requires set up (username and password), open the app from your secure folder and log into the app.
  • Login information isn’t copied if you previously set up the app on your phone outside of the secure folder.

  • 4. If you only want to access the app through the secure folder and you didn’t install it directly into the secure folder, delete the app from the rest of your phone. In the app tray, touch & hold the app’s icon to delete the app
  • ##### Remove apps

  • 1. Open Secure folder and unlock it.
  • ![image 1290](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1290.png)

  • 2. Touch & hold the app icon, then tap Remove app. Control notification content from secure apps You can turn sensitive lock screen notifications on or off entirely for all apps on your phone. But when you add apps to Secure folder, you get more control over their sensitive notifications and can set them to:
  • • Show app icon, app name, and message content
  • • Show just the app icon and name
  • • Don’t show notifications To adjust notifications from secure apps:
  • 1. Open Secure folder and unlock it.
  • ![image 1291](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1291.png)

  • 2. Tap > More settings > Notification Manager.
  • ![image 1292](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1292.png)

  • 3. Choose how you want to handle notifications from your secure apps.
  • Page 322

    Change the folder's lock and timeout

    When you set up the folder, you created its lock. You can change the lock at any time. You can also change how long the folder stays unlocked.

    ##### Change the PIN/password/pattern

  • 1. Open Secure folder and unlock it.
  • ![image 1293](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1293.png)

  • 2. Tap and then Authentication settings > Change lock and unlock again.
  • ![image 1294](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1294.png)

  • 3. Choose a lock type and set it up.
  • • Pattern: Draw a pattern on a grid.
  • • PIN: Enter a four to sixteen digit numeric code. Longer PINs are more secure.
  • • Password: Enter four to sixteen letters, digits, or symbols. A long, strong password is the most
  • secure option.

    ##### Set amount of time folder stays unlocked

    Your secure folder automatically locks after a period of inactivity. You can increase or decrease the amount of time it can remain inactive before it locks.

  • 1. Open Secure folder and unlock it.
  • ![image 1295](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1295.png)

    Page 323

  • 2. Tap > More settings > Secure folder timeout.
  • ![image 1296](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1296.png)

  • 3. Select a duration.
  • Forgot your folder's PIN/password/pattern? If you don’t remember how to unlock your secure folder, you’ll need to delete the folder and set it up again.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings.
  • 2. Tap Secure folder.
  • 3. Tap Delete secure folder.
  • 4. Unlock your phone (use your fingerprint or the PIN/password/pattern for your phone).
  • 5. Confirm the deletion.
  • This deletes all apps from the folder. If the app was only in your secure folder, you’ll need to reinstall the app.

    Lock SIM card

    Set up SIM lock

    This feature is not available in all countries.

    Your SIM card came with a default PIN from your carrier. You can use it to set up an optional SIM card lock, which prevents others from using your cellular plan and accessing account information if your phone is stolen.

    If you add a SIM lock, you will be prompted to enter the PIN each time you swap SIM cards or restart the phone.

  • 1. Be sure you have the PIN your carrier provided with the SIM card. If you don’t have it, contact your carrier.
  • 2. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings.
  • 3. Tap SIM card lock.
  • 4. Turn Lock SIM card on .
  • ![image 1297](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1297.png)

    Page 324

  • 5. Enter your carrier-provided PIN and follow the onscreen instructions.
  • Unlock SIM card

    When prompted, enter the PIN used to set up the SIM lock.

    Caution: If you enter an incorrect PIN multiple times, the SIM will be disabled.

    If you accidentally disabled SIM

    If you enter an incorrect PIN multiple times, the SIM will be disabled. Contact your carrier for a PIN unlock key (PUK) to re-enable the SIM.

    Change SIM PIN

    To change the PIN code for your SIM card:

  • 1. Be sure you have the previous PIN. If you don't, contact your carrier for a PIN unlock key (PUK).
  • 2. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > More security settings.
  • 3. Tap SIM card lock.
  • 4. If Lock SIM card is off, turn it on .
  • ![image 1298](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1298.png)

  • 5. Tap Change SIM PIN.
  • 6. Enter the previous PIN and touch OK.
  • 7. Enter a new PIN and tap OK.
  • 8. Re-enter the new PIN and tap OK.
  • Review or change permissions

    ##### Review by feature

    Page 325

    The first time you use an app, and sometimes when you install or update it, you are asked to grant the app permission to access certain data and phone features. You can adjust these permissions any time.

    To adjust permissions by feature:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Security & privacy > Privacy.
  • 2. Tap Permission manager tab.
  • 3. Tap a feature to see which apps have permission to use it.
  • 4. Turn that permission on or off for each app as needed.
  • Review by app To adjust permissions by app:

  • 1. Touch & hold the app icon, then tap App info .
  • ![image 1299](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1299.png)

  • 2. Tap Permissions.
  • 3. Turn each permission on or off as needed.
  • Tip: To see how the app uses each permission, tap > All permissions.

    ![image 1300](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1300.png)

    Control access to your mic and camera

    Block mic or camera from app in use

    Any time an app uses your mic or camera, you’ll see the privacy indicator in the status bar.

    ![image 1301](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1301.png)

    When you see the privacy indicator:

    Page 326

  • 1. Swipe the status bar down and tap or to see which app is using it.
  • ![image 1302](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1302.png)

    ![image 1303](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1303.png)

  • 2. To block that app from using it: a. Tap and tap Manage permissions. b. Tap Microphone > Don't allow or Camera > Don't allow.
  • ![image 1304](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1304.png)

    Block/unblock for all apps

    To quickly block and unblock access to your mic or camera for all apps:

  • 1. Open quick settings and tap Mic access or Camera access.
  • ![image 1305](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1305.png)

    ![image 1306](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1306.png)

  • 2. Change it to Blocked. None of the apps on your phone can use it.
  • 3. When you're ready to use the microphone or camera again, change Mic access or Camera access in quick settings to Available.
  • ![image 1307](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1307.png)

    ![image 1308](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1308.png)

    Hide passwords

    To control whether characters briefly display when you enter a password to unlock your phone or log into websites and apps:

    Page 327

    ####### 1. Open the Moto Secure app and touch Privacy controls.Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy > Privacy > Privacy controls.

    ![image 1309](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1309.png)

    ####### 2. Turn Show passwords off .

    ![image 1310](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1310.png)

    #### Settings : Security & privacy 303

    Keep Wi-Fi and mobile networks secure

    Control warnings about and your connections to open networks (that require no password) and weakly secured Wi-Fi and mobile networks.

  • 1. Open the Moto Secure app. Or, go to Settings > Security & privacy.
  • ![image 1311](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1311.png)

  • 2. Tap Network protection.
  • 3. Turn options on or off :
  • ![image 1312](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1312.png)

    ![image 1313](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1313.png)

  • • To prevent network spoofing by blocking 2G cellular connections, turn Mobile data security on .
  • ![image 1314](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1314.png)

  • • To get warnings when your phone is connected to unsecured networks, turn Wi-Fi security on .
  • ![image 1315](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1315.png)

    Page 328

  • • To get warnings when your hotspot is using a weak protocol, turn Hotspot on . (Learn how to change security protocols.)
  • ![image 1316](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1316.png)

  • • To ensure that you don't use sensitive apps when your phone is connected to an open network, touch Wi-Fi blocklist and select the apps, then turn Wi-Fi blocklist on .
  • ![image 1317](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1317.png)

    Prepare for emergencies

    Set up emergency SOS

    In an emergency, you can press the Power button quickly five times or more to start a blaring sound and automatically call emergency responders. If you sign in to your Google account, you can set your phone to send SOS text messages with your current location to emergency contacts and to record emergency video.

    ##### Set it up

  • 1. Go to Settings > Safety & emergency > Emergency SOS.
  • 2. Sign in to your Google account to access all emergency features, then turn Emergency SOS on.
  • 3. Adjust settings:
  • • To play a loud warning sound when Emergency SOS is starting, touch and turn Play alarm sound on .
  • ![image 1318](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1318.png)

    ![image 1319](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1319.png)

  • • To change the default regional emergency number dialed for help, touch Call emergency services > Number to call for help, enter the number, and touch OK.
  • Note: Don't enter a non-emergency number. If you do, your phone must be unlocked to use Emergency SOS, and your call might not be answered.

  • 4. For additional SOS features, sign in to your Google account and then follow onscreen instructions. When you send an emergency SOS, you can have your phone text your location with your emergency contacts and record, backup, and share an emergency video. To learn more, read Google’s help.
  • Page 329

    Send an emergency SOS Press the Power button five times or more to start the countdown alarm and call for help.

    Disable emergency SOS Go to Settings > Safety & emergency > Emergency SOS, then turn Call emergency services off .

    ![image 1320](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1320.png)

    Set up emergency information

    You can set up emergency information for first responders or others to view from your lock screen, such as your emergency contact and medical information (blood type, allergies).

    ##### Add your emergency information

  • 1. Go to Settings > Safety & emergency.
  • 2. Set up your information.
  • Note: Anyone who picks up your phone can see your emergency info without unlocking your phone.

    View your emergency information Anyone who needs to view your information should:

  • From the lock screen:
  • • Swipe up and tap Emergency call below the keypad.
  • • Or, press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons, then tap Emergency.
  • Tap View emergency info.
  • Add message to lock screen

    To add your name or a short message to your lock screen for anyone who finds your phone:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Display > Lock screen.
  • Page 330

  • 2. Tap Text on lock screen.
  • 3. Type the text to display and tap Save.
  • Tip: Don't put your mobile number as contact info on your lock screen unless you can access your voicemail from another device.

    Send your location to emergency services

    Not all carriers and countries support this feature.

    If Android Emergency Location Service (ELS) works in your country and on your carrier's network and if you haven't turned off ELS, when you call or text an emergency number, ELS sends your location to authorized emergency responders to help them locate you.

    If ELS is off, your carrier might still send the phone’s location during an emergency call. For more information, check with your carrier.

    To turn ELS on or off:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Location > Location services.
  • 2. Touch Emergency Location Service.
  • 3. Turn it on or off . To learn more about ELS, read Google's help.
  • ![image 1321](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1321.png)

    ![image 1322](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1322.png)

    Turn emergency alerts off/on

    Your phone can receive free alerts to inform you of public safety messages, threats to life and property (like extreme weather), and other emergencies.

    When an emergency alert is sent out, appears in the status bar. Touch the notification to read the alert. You can turn most alerts off or on and adjust alert notification settings. Presidential alerts cannot be turned off.

    ![image 1323](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1323.png)

    Note: Because alerts are intended to save lives, please consider carefully before turning alerts off.

    Page 331

  • 1. Go to Settings.
  • 2. Touch Safety & emergency > Wireless emergency alerts.
  • 3. Adjust settings as needed.
  • Customize the keyboard To customize Gboard, just tap in top row of the keyboard. Or, go to Settings > System > Languages & input > On-screen keyboard > Gboard.

    ![image 1324](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1324.png)

    Resize keyboard to type more accurately

    Give yourself more space to type and reduce typos by adjusting the height of the keyboard. You can also reposition it for your best fit.

  • 1. On the top row of the keyboard, tap .
  • ![image 1325](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1325.png)

  • 2. Tap
  • ![image 1326](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1326.png)

  • 3. Adjust sizing:
  • • Drag the handles on the frame to increase or decrease the keyboard height.
  • • Touch & hold to drag the keyboard up or down.
  • ![image 1327](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1327.png)

  • 4. Tap to save changes or to reset to the original size and position.
  • ![image 1328](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1328.png)

    Page 332

    ![image 1329](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1329.png)

    Tip: Voice typing can also improve typing speed and accuracy.

    Change background appearance

  • 1. On the top row of the keyboard, tap .
  • ![image 1330](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1330.png)

  • 2. Tap Theme.
  • 3. Select a color or landscape to use as the background.
  • 4. Tap Apply.
  • Adjust keyboard sounds or vibration

    The onscreen keyboard vibrates when you tap a key. Turn off vibration feedback if you prefer not to use it or want to improve battery life.

    To adjust keyboard sounds or vibration:

  • 1. On the top row of the keyboard, tap .
  • ![image 1331](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1331.png)

  • 2. Tap Preferences.
  • 3. To adjust vibration:
  • • Turn Haptic feedback on keypress off or on.
  • • If on, tap Vibration strength on keypress and move the slider.
  • Page 333

  • 4. To adjust sounds:
  • • To hear sounds when you type, turn Sound on keypress on .
  • ![image 1332](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1332.png)

  • • To adjust how loud the sounds are, tap Volume on keypress. Disable glide typing
  • With glide typing, you drag your finger over the letters in a word. If you want to turn this off and only use multi-touch typing:

  • 1. On the top row of the keyboard, tap .
  • ![image 1333](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1333.png)

  • 2. Tap Glide typing.
  • 3. Turn Enable glide typing off .
  • ![image 1334](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1334.png)

    Limit or turn off suggestions

  • 1. On the top row of the keyboard, tap .
  • ![image 1335](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1335.png)

  • 2. Tap Text correction.
  • 3. Adjust settings:
  • • If you don’t want predictions based on your previous word, turn Next-word suggestions off .

    Page 334

    ![image 1336](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1336.png)

    You will only see suggestions for the current word you're typing.

  • • If you don’t want ANY suggestions, turn Show suggestion strip off .
  • ![image 1337](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1337.png)

  • • You can also turn off (or on) offensive word blocking and suggestions for emoji, stickers, and
  • information from Contacts.

    Turn off auto-correction

  • 1. On the top row of the keyboard, tap .
  • ![image 1338](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1338.png)

  • 2. Tap Text correction.
  • 3. If you don’t want words corrected while you type, turn Auto-correction off .
  • ![image 1339](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1339.png)

    Change keyboard apps

    Your phone comes with Gboard and Voice typing, which you can customize. You can also install different onscreen keyboard and voice typing apps from Play Store, then select the one you want to use in Settings.

    ![image 1340](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1340.png)

    ![image 1341](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1341.png)

    Download other keyboards

    Page 335

  • 1. Open Play Store and search for “keyboard”.
  • ![image 1342](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1342.png)

  • 2. Read reviews of apps before you install them. Some apps look enticing but are full of frustrating ads. You can always uninstall the app if you change your mind.
  • 3. When you find a keyboard app you want, download and install it.
  • Most apps walk you through setup screens for your keyboard, and they may also open Settings where you turn it on.

    Choose which keyboard to use In Settings, you choose which keyboard to use in all apps where you type with the onscreen keyboard. To change keyboards, turn on the one you want to use:

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Languages & input.
  • 2. Tap On-screen keyboard to see your list of installed keyboards.
  • 3. Adjust settings:
  • • Turn keyboards on or off . You can have multiple keyboards on . If multiple are on, you can switch between them when typing: simply tap at the bottom of the keyboard, then select a keyboard.
  • ![image 1343](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1343.png)

    ![image 1344](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1344.png)

    ![image 1345](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1345.png)

    ![image 1346](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1346.png)

  • • To change settings for a keyboard, tap its name.
  • Remove keyboards To remove a keyboard you downloaded, uninstall its app. You can’t uninstall Gboard and Voice typing, which came with your phone.

    Use multiple languages

    Page 336

    Change display language

    You selected the language for your phone during set up. To change it:

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Languages & input > Languages.
  • 2. Touch & hold the language you want and drag it to the first position in the list.
  • 3. If you don’t see the language you want, tap to add it, then drag it to the first position. All languages added to the list will appear on the keyboard's spacebar.
  • ![image 1347](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1347.png)

    To remove a language, go to Settings > System > Languages & input > Languages, then tap > Remove, select the language, and tap .

    ![image 1348](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1348.png)

    ![image 1349](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1349.png)

    Set language for an app

    For specific apps, you can select a language that's different than your phone's default language:

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Languages & input.
  • 2. Tap App Languages.
  • 3. Tap the app's name and select the language to use. Not all apps support changing languages.
  • Add language to keyboard

    If you want a keyboard for a language that isn't a display language:

  • 1. On the top row of the keyboard, tap .
  • ![image 1350](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1350.png)

    Page 337

  • 2. Tap Languages.
  • 3. Tap .
  • ![image 1351](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1351.png)

  • 4. Select the language.
  • 5. Tap Done. Then, switch between languages on the keyboard by tapping .
  • ![image 1352](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1352.png)

    Open apps faster

    With artificial intelligence (AI), your phone learns which apps you use most, then manages memory more efficiently so they open faster.

    To turn this feature on or off:

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Performance.
  • 2. Turn Smart app launch on or off .
  • ![image 1353](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1353.png)

    ![image 1354](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1354.png)

    Back up phone

    Back up to Google

    You can automatically back up the following items to your Google account:

  • • Apps and app data
  • • Call history
  • Page 338

  • • Contacts
  • • Phone settings (including Wi-Fi passwords and permissions)
  • • Photos and videos (synced to your Google Photos library, not to Google Drive)
  • • SMS text messages (if using Messages)
  • ![image 1355](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1355.png)

    Tip: Back up over Wi-Fi to prevent cellular data charges.

    Not all apps back up data automatically. Check with the app developer. To automatically back up to Google Drive:

  • 1. Go to Settings > System.
  • 2. Touch Backup.
  • 3. Check that Backup by Google One is on . If needed, turn it on.
  • ![image 1356](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1356.png)

  • 4. If you have multiple Google accounts, touch Account to select an account.
  • 5. Follow the onscreen instructions. To back up other files that aren't automatically backed up, like attachments or downloads:
  • 1. Open the Drive app.
  • ![image 1357](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1357.png)

  • 2. Touch .
  • ![image 1358](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1358.png)

  • 3. Touch Upload, then choose the files or folder to upload.
  • Manage your backup in Drive

    Page 339

    On your phone:

  • 1. Open the Drive app.
  • ![image 1359](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1359.png)

  • 2. Touch > Backups. To learn about managing phone backups from a computer, read Google's help.
  • ![image 1360](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1360.png)

    Restore backed up data

    When you add your Google account to a phone, photos, contacts, settings and app data that you previously backed up to that account are restored onto the phone.

    Share your phone

    Ways to share your phone

  • • Add users. If you share your phone with family, friends, or within a business, you can set up separate user spaces for each of them.
  • • Lend to people as guest. This is a more temporary space that you or the guest can delete when finished.
  • • Create a protected space with only apps your family members need to use, without being able to access features or settings that they should not use or change. To learn more, open the Family Space app and tap > Help.
  • ![image 1361](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1361.png)

  • • Pin the screen. This lets you keep one specific app or screen in view. For example, you can pin a game and your child cannot navigate anywhere else on your phone.
  • About owners, users, and guests

    The owner can:

  • • Determine whether users and guests can make phone calls and send text messages, which also allows them to see the phone's call history and text history.
  • Page 340

  • • Reset, update, and uninstall any apps.
  • • Delete user and guests, removing any associated accounts and data from the phone. Users and guests can:
  • • Set up Google accounts and other types of accounts.
  • • Set up a screen lock.
  • • Customize the home screen and settings for their spaces.
  • • Add and delete apps for their spaces, and update any apps they use, regardless of who installed them.
  • Important: To prevent others from switching to your owner profile and accessing your information, set a screen lock before you share your phone with users or guests.

    When sharing your phone with users and guests, some apps are only available to the owner, not to other users and guests.

    Switch users Only the owner can switch to the guest profile for loaning the phone and can switch between user profiles. To switch user profiles or see which is currently active, open quick settings. At the top of the screen, you'll see one of these icons after you've set up a user or added a guest.

    ####### Icon Meaning

    ![image 1362](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1362.png)

    Owner (If you set up your profile in Contacts and included a picture, you'll see it and your name instead.)

    ![image 1363](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1363.png)

    Guest

    ![image 1364](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1364.png)

    Added user

    Add, modify, remove users

    Add a user

    You must be the device owner to add users.

    Page 341

  • 1. To prevent others from switching to your owner profile and accessing your information, set a screen lock before you share your phone.
  • 2. Go to Settings > System > Multiple users. If needed, turn it on .
  • ![image 1365](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1365.png)

    Tip: To add users from quick settings on your lock screen without unlocking the phone, go to Settings > System > Multiple users and turn Add users from lock screen on .

    ![image 1366](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1366.png)

  • 3. Tap Add user > OK.
  • 4. Add the user's name.
  • 5. To allow the user to make calls and send messages, switch on Turn on phone calls & SMS.
  • 6. Switch to that user and tap Set up now.
  • 7. Give the phone to the new user to set up the profile.
  • Restrict calls and messages

    From your owner profile, you control whether users can call and send texts with your phone:

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Multiple users. Or from quick settings, tap > More settings.
  • ![image 1367](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1367.png)

  • 2. Tap the user's name.
  • 3. To prevent the user from making calls or sending messages, switch off Turn on phone calls & SMS.
  • Remove a user You can remove yourself as a user. You must be the device owner to remove other users. If you're a user who borrowed a phone:

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Multiple users. Or from quick settings, tap > More settings.
  • ![image 1368](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1368.png)

    Page 342

  • 2. Tap and delete your user account from the phone. If you're the owner:
  • ![image 1369](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1369.png)

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Multiple users. Or from quick settings, tap > More settings.
  • ![image 1370](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1370.png)

  • 2. Tap the user's name.
  • ######## 3. Tap .

    ![image 1371](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1371.png)

    Add or delete guest Create a temporary guest profile for sharing your phone with someone. If you need a space for someone to use on a regular basis, where apps and data can be saved, add a user instead of a guest session.

    Lend to guest

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Multiple users. If needed, turn it on .
  • ![image 1372](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1372.png)

  • 2. Tap Add guest.
  • 3. To allow the guest to make calls, switch on Turn on phone calls.
  • 4. Tap the option to switch to guest mode.
  • 5. If you’ve lent your phone to a guest previously, tap Start over to clear the last guest settings, or tap Yes, continue to keep last guest settings.
  • End guest session

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Multiple users. Or from quick settings, tap .
  • Page 343

    ![image 1373](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1373.png)

  • 2. Tap Remove guest > Remove. All data from and apps installed during this session are deleted.
  • Record your IMEI number

    An IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number is a unique code that identifies your phone. Phones with two SIM have two IMEI numbers, one for each SIM. This allows the phone to be identified separately on each network that the SIMs connect to.

    You’ll need your IMEI number if you contact support regarding a warranty, and it’s important to have if your phone is stolen. Service providers can use the IMEI to block a stolen phone from cellular networks, and many police departments keep a record of stolen phones using this number.

    You might never need your IMEI number, but it’s a good idea to record it, just in case. To find the IMEI number:

  • 1. Go to Settings > About phone.
  • 2. See IMEI for your SIM.
  • 3. Record and save the number where you can easily access it. You can also find your IMEI number by dialing *#06# in the Phone app. On some phones, the MEID HEX number is your IMEI number. If your phone doesn't turn on, check the box it came in or the receipt for the IMEI number.
  • Find legal and product information To view the electronic regulatory label for your phone, go to Settings > About phone > Regulatory labels. For safety, environmental, warranty, and other legal information, go to Settings > About phone > Legal information. Printed legal information may also be provided with your phone. To find your phone's model or serial number, go to Settings > About phone > Model > Model Number (SKU).

    Phone is slow or unstable If a certain app is slow, try these app-specific troubleshooting steps. If your phone is slow when viewing online content, it could be an issue with your connection. If you're on Wi-Fi, use a different Wi-Fi network, switch to mobile data, or contact your Internet Service Provider. If you're using a mobile connection, switch to Wi-Fi. If all apps are slow, it's probably an issue with your phone, not an app on your phone. Try these troubleshooting steps. After each step, check to see if the issue is fixed:

  • 1. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • • If your phone is frozen, reboot it by pressing and holding the Power button for 7-10 seconds.

  • 2. Check for system updates. Go to Settings > System updates.
  • 3. Check for app updates. Open the Play Store app and touch your profile icon > Manage apps & device.
  • ![image 1374](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1374.png)

  • 4. Check available storage and clear space if needed.
  • Page 344

    Phone feels warm or hot

    Overview It's normal for your phone to feel warm, or even hot, depending on how you're using it. If your phone gets hot, it will slow charging, reduce brightness, and limit other functions until it cools down, or automatically shut off if it gets too hot. If your phone is too hot to touch, use a different phone, tablet, or computer to contact Motorola support.

    Reasons your phone may get warm

  • • Playing graphics-intensive games in high performance mode for an extended period
  • • Using GPS navigation
  • • Tethering or using your phone as a Wi-Fi hotspot
  • • Using phone while it's charging
  • • Fast charging with a high-wattage or wireless charger
  • • Downloading or uploading large amounts of data, such as during initial setup when copying data from your old phone, backing up or restoring data, or downloading and updating multiple apps
  • • Taking multiple photos or recording high-resolution videos for an extended time
  • • Using your phone in areas with weak signals for an extended period Ways to keep your phone from heating up
  • • Pause resource-intensive features or apps until your phone cools down
  • • Use the charger that came with your phone, or a charger that is compatible with your phone
  • • Keep your phone away from direct heat sources like electric blankets, heaters, hot air vents, or excessive sunlight
  • • Don't charge or use your phone in enclosed or poorly ventilated places, such as on a pillow or blanket, where heat can quickly accumulate
  • • Lower your phone's display brightness
  • If you're not using or charging it

    Sometimes a process can get stuck in the background. If your phone is hot but you're not using or charging it, turn your phone off and on again. This will stop the previously stuck process and resolve the issue.

    Phone won't turn on

    If your phone isn't starting, has a black or blank screen, or turns on but immediately turns off, try these steps to fix the issue.

  • 1. Press & hold the Power button for 5-7 seconds, or up to 30 seconds. This restarts (reboots) your phone.
  • 2. Charge the phone.
  • If your phone has a sign-of-life indicator look for a white light near the top front of the phone. This indicates that the phone is charging but battery is too low to power the screen.

    Page 345

    If you're having problems charging, try these troubleshooting steps.

  • 3. If you don't see a battery icon after you, plug your phone in to charge, the issue could be with your screen. Check if your phone rings by calling it from another phone. If it rings, the issue is with your screen and you can try these troubleshooting steps.
  • 4. Perform an external reset of your phone. Learn how.
  • 5. If you have a Windows PC, download Software Fix to your PC and try reinstalling the phone's system software.
  • Phone restarts or crashes

    If your phone randomly reboots, restarts, or shuts down without restarting, try the following.

  • 1. Restart your phone: a. Hold down the Power button for about 30 seconds.
  • b. If this doesn't work, connect your phone to charge for at least 5 minutes. Then, while connected to the charger, restart again by holding down the Power button for 30 seconds.

  • 2. Troubleshoot your phone: a. Check if a software update is available for your phone. b. Check available storage and clear space if needed.
  • You may see issues if your phone's internal storage is almost full. To free up space, remove unnecessary files and clear cached data.

  • 3. Troubleshoot your apps: a. Check for app updates. b. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed.
  • If your problem doesn't go away in safe mode, restart your phone and continue to the next section.

  • 4. Reset to factory settings:
  • To remove any processes on your phone that may be causing the issue, you can reset your phone to factory settings.

    A factory data reset will remove all data from your phone.

  • 5. If you have a Windows PC, download Software Fix to your PC and try reinstalling the phone's system software.
  • Screen is frozen or won't respond

    Page 346

    Tip: If your screen goes black when the phone rings so you can't answer the call, clear data for the Phone app.

    If your screen lags or blurs motion between actions, raise your refresh rate. If your phone freezes, stops responding, or is stuck on a blank or white screen, try the following:

  • 1. Restart your phone. Hold down the Power button for about 30 seconds.
  • 2. If this doesn't work, charge your phone for at least 5 minutes. Then, while connected to the charger,
  • restart again by holding down the Power button for 30 seconds. If your phone freezes again, check for a larger issue:

  • 1. Restart your phone to unfreeze it.
  • 2. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 3. Check available storage and clear space if needed.
  • You may see issues if your phone's internal storage is almost full. To free up space, remove unnecessary files and clear cached data.

  • Check for app updates. If you can't unfreeze the phone, reset your phone to factory settings, to remove any processes that may be causing the issue. A factory data reset will remove all data from your phone.
  • Screen displays wrong colors

    Everything is grayscale, black and white

    Go to Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls > Bedtime mode > Customize > Screen options at bedtime and turn Grayscale off .

    ![image 1375](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1375.png)

    Everything is negative, reversed colors Go to Settings > Accessibility > Color and motion > Color inversion and turn it off . Learn more.

    ![image 1376](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1376.png)

    Tones, hues are different or missing

  • • If the screen shows warmer tones than usual, check quick settings. If Night Light is on, turn it off.
  • Page 347

    ![image 1377](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1377.png)

  • • If certain colors appear diminished or their hues are different, go to Settings > Accessibility > Color
  • and motion > Color correction and turn Use color correction off .

    ![image 1378](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1378.png)

    Background turned dark/light

    Go to Settings > Display and turn Dark theme off .

    ![image 1379](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1379.png)

    Screen brightness automatically too dim or bright

    Adaptive brightness uses the ambient light sensor and machine learning to adjust your display brightness automatically. When you change the brightness slider, your phone learns your preferred levels for various lighting environments. Ideally, you’ll need to use the slider less and less.

    If Adaptive brightness stops working as desired, you can reset it to retrain the system.

  • 1. Go to Settings > Apps > See all # apps.
  • 2. Tap > Show system apps.
  • ![image 1380](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1380.png)

  • 3. Search for “Device Health Services” then tap Device Health Services.
  • 4. Tap Storage & cache > Clear storage > Reset adaptive brightness. If you prefer to manually adjust brightness, go to Settings > Display > Adaptive brightness and turn Use adaptive brightness off . If Battery saver is on, the screen dims when the battery gets low.
  • Troubleshoot issues with calls

    Select the statement that best describes your issue:

    Page 348

  • • Can't make calls
  • • Can't answer calls
  • • Phone doesn’t ring
  • • People can’t hear me
  • • Can't hear calls
  • • Don’t get calls/texts
  • • Screen goes black
  • • Calls drop
  • Can't make calls

    After each troubleshooting step, check to see if your issue is fixed.

    Phone app icon is missing

    If disappeared from your home screen, you just need to add a shortcut for the Phone app.

    ![image 1381](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1381.png)

    SIM card not recognized

    If you see or in the status bar or a message that the SIM is not recognized:

    ![image 1382](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1382.png)

    ![image 1383](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1383.png)

  • 1. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • Press the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then touch Restart to establish a new connection with the network.

  • 2. Do one of the following:
  • Page 349

  • • If you're using a physical SIM card, turn your phone off, then remove and reinsert the SIM.
  • • If you're using an eSIM, reset the eSIM and then set it up again.
  • 3. Contact your carrier to make sure your account is set up properly.
  • 4. Ask your carrier to replace the SIM card.
  • 5. Perform an external phone reset.
  • No signal

  • 1. If you usually have a signal but the status bar shows in your current location, move to another
  • ![image 1384](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1384.png)

    ![image 1385](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1385.png)

    area where you can receive a signal, like outdoors. If you’re uncertain whether your carrier provides service in that location, check the coverage map on your carrier’s website.

  • 2. If airplane mode is on, turn it off.
  • 3. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 4. Check for app updates.
  • 5. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 6. Remove your SIM card and reinsert.
  • 7. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed.
  • 8. Reset the phone.
  • Have signal, but can’t make calls

  • 1. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • Press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then touch Restart to establish a new connection with the network.

    Page 350

  • 2. Clear the cache for the Phone app.
  • 3. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed.
  • 4. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 5. Reset the phone.
  • Consistent busy signal

    ####### Outbound calls

  • 1. If you hear a fast busy signal when you call a number, all cellular circuits may be in use, preventing the call from going through. Try calling again later.
  • 2. If you hear a fast busy signal every time you call the same number, your number may be blocked by an
  • app. Try calling from a different number. Incoming calls

    If you have a signal and can make calls, but callers tell you they consistently get a busy signal when calling you, check that you haven’t blocked their numbers.

    Can't answer or phone doesn't ring

    After each troubleshooting step, check to see if your issue is fixed.

    Phone doesn’t ring or ring loud enough

  • 1. Check your volume setting.
  • 2. Look for in your status bar. If you see it:
  • ![image 1386](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1386.png)

    • Open quick settings and touch to turn Do Not Disturb off. Your phone will ring for incoming

    Page 351

    ![image 1387](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1387.png)

    calls.

    • Make sure your phone is set to screen calls at the appropriate times.

  • 3. Check that your ringtone is not set to None.
  • 4. Is your phone connected with a Bluetooth device? If so, all audio is routed to the Bluetooth device.
  • 5. If you're using a ringtone that you installed, try using a ringtone that came with the phone.
  • 6. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed. Begin with application types like launchers, task killers, or anti-virus apps.
  • Can't answer ringing phone

  • Clear the data for the Phone app. Touch & hold , then touch > Storage & cache > Clear storage.
  • ![image 1388](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1388.png)

    ![image 1389](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1389.png)

    Consistent busy signal

    ####### Outbound calls

  • 1. If you hear a fast busy signal when you call a number, all cellular circuits may be in use, preventing the call from going through. Try calling again later.
  • 2. If you hear a fast busy signal every time you call the same number, your number may be blocked by an app. Try calling from a different number.
  • ####### Incoming calls

    If you have a signal and can make calls, but callers tell you they consistently get a busy signal when calling you, check that you haven’t blocked their numbers.

    Don’t get calls/texts

    Page 352

  • 1. If airplane mode is on, turn it off.
  • 2. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 3. Check for updates to your phone and messaging app.
  • 4. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • Calls go to voicemail

    Check your Do Not Disturb settings:

  • 1. Look for in your status bar. If you see it, then your phone is sending calls to voicemail so you’re not interrupted. To have your phone ring for incoming calls, open quick settings and touch to turn off Do Not Disturb.
  • ![image 1390](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1390.png)

    ![image 1391](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1391.png)

  • 2. Check your schedules for Do Not Disturb and delete any you don’t want.
  • 3. If you're using Bedtime mode but don't want to send calls to voicemail when you're sleeping, touch Settings > Digital Wellbeing & parental controls > Bedtime mode > Customize and turn Do not Disturb for Bedtime mode off .
  • ![image 1392](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1392.png)

  • 4. You can start Do Not Disturb by placing your phone face down on a surface. If you don't want to send calls to voicemail when your phone is face down, go to Settings > Sound & vibration > Flip for DND and turn it off .
  • ![image 1393](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1393.png)

    Issues during calls

    After each troubleshooting step, check to see if your issue is fixed.

    Screen goes black

  • 1. If you are using a case, cover or screen protector, remove it and see if it was causing the issue.
  • 2. Check your proximity sensor.
  • Page 353

    Dial a call and set the phone on a table (don't use speaker mode), then hold your hand over the proximity sensor to see if you can turn the screen off and on.

  • Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed.
  • Calls are dropping

  • 1. Check your signal strength:
  • • Weak signal from your cellular provider is a common cause of dropped calls. In the status bar, see how many bars your network connection has. If you see only one or two bars, change locations to improve your signal strength, particularly if you are indoors.

  • 2. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • Press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then touch Power off. Then turn it on to establish a new connection with the network.

  • 3. During a call, check that the proximity sensor works by covering it to confirm that it turns off your screen, preventing accidental touches during calls. You can also download an app to automatically lock your screen during calls; search for “call screen lock” on Play Store.
  • 4. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed.
  • 5. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 6. Reset the phone.
  • People can’t hear me

    ##### People can't hear me on calls

  • 1. Check that nothing is covering the microphone:
  • • If you are using a case, cover or screen protector, remove it and see if it was causing the issue.
  • • Check that the protective film that ships with the phone has been removed.
  • 2. Check to see if your phone is using Voice privacy. (This feature is not available on all models.) Turn it off to see if sound quality improves: a. Tap . b. Tap > Settings > Calls.
  • Page 354

    ![image 1394](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1394.png)

    ![image 1395](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1395.png)

  • 3. If the issue occurs while using the speakerphone or a Bluetooth headset, check your signal strength.
  • In the status bar, see how many bars your network connection has. If you see only one or two bars, change locations to improve your signal strength, particularly if you are indoors.

  • 4. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • Press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then tap Restart to establish a new connection with the network.

  • 5. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 6. Turn off Voice Match. a. Open the Google app. b. Tap your profile icon > Settings > Assistant > Hey Google & Voice Match. c. Turn Hey Google off .
  • ![image 1396](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1396.png)

    ![image 1397](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1397.png)

    Saying “OK, Google” won't work from all screens, but you can tap the search widget first, then say “OK, Google”.

  • 7. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed.
  • 8. Reset the phone.
  • ##### People can’t hear me on apps like Meet or WhatsApp

  • 1. Force stop the app. This completely shuts down the app, including any background services that may be causing your issue.
  • 2. Check for updates to the app.
  • 3. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 4. Clear the app's cache.
  • Page 355

    Poor sound quality on calls Start by checking your volume (Settings > Sound & vibration > Call volume). How are you listening to the call?

    ##### Wired headset

  • 1. Make sure the headset is inserted completely into the USB-C port.
  • 2. If you are using a case or cover, remove it and re-insert the headset to see if it was interfering.
  • 3. Try a different headset to determine if the issue is with the original headset. Earpiece
  • 1. Check that nothing is covering the microphone:
  • • If you are using a case, cover or screen protector, remove it and see if it was causing the issue.
  • • If the phone was shipped with a protective plastic film, remove the film.
  • 2. While in a call, try using the speakerphone or a wired headset to see if the sound quality improves. If it doesn’t, the issue is probably network signal strength instead of hardware.
  • 3. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • Press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then tap Restart to establish a new connection with the network.

  • 4. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed.
  • 5. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 6. Reset the phone.
  • ##### Connected Bluetooth device

    Check the battery level of Bluetooth device and phone, and charge if necessary. Paired Bluetooth devices may disconnect or create noise when the phone or Bluetooth battery are low.

    Charging issues

    Try these troubleshooting steps. After each step, check to see if your issue is fixed.

    Page 356

  • 1. Make sure the USB plug fits securely into the phone.
  • 2. If the battery is completely depleted, connect the charger and wait about 10 minutes until it has enough voltage to charge, then press the Power button.
  • 3. If you're using a Qi-compatible wireless charger, center the back of the phone with the charger.
  • ![image 1398](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1398.png)

  • 4. If you're charging by connecting to a wall outlet:
  • • If the outlet is controlled with a switch, check that it is turned on.
  • • Use the charger that came with the phone, or a charger that is compatible with your phone.
  • • Remove any case, to see if it's impeding the charger/port connection.
  • • Inspect the charger for damage to the wire or plug. If you see damage, try charging by connecting to your computer with a USB cable.
  • • Check the outlet for damage or loose parts. If you see damage, try another outlet.
  • 5. If you're charging by connecting to your computer, check the USB connection: a. Swipe the status bar down. b. On the USB notification, tap , then tap the notification. c. Tap No data transfer.
  • ![image 1399](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1399.png)

  • 6. Reboot the phone by holding the Power button for 7-10 seconds.
  • 7. Reset the phone.
  • Phone gets hot while charging

    The TurboPower charger, which provides efficient, rapid charging can cause the battery to heat up, which is normal. If the battery reaches 111 degrees (F), the charging rate slows down. Once the battery cools down, the charger begins rapid charging again.

    TurboPower charging not working

    When the battery is below 78%, the TurboPower charger charges rapidly. When the battery is at 78% or higher, it charges at regular speed.

    If your battery is below 78% and isn’t charging rapidly, disconnect your phone from the charger and plug it back in again.

    Page 357

    Charging stops at 80% Overcharge protection keeps your battery healthy by limiting its charge to 80% if it’s been plugged in for three days. If you see in the status bar, to fully charge your phone from 80% just disconnect it from the charger and plug it in again.

    ![image 1400](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1400.png)

    Battery drains too fast

    Battery life varies

    The way you use your phone can really affect how long you can go before recharging your battery. Navigating, playing games, browsing the web, making calls and texting all require energy. So, your battery life may vary day to day, depending on what you're doing.

    If your battery is draining faster than expected

    If your battery life seems shorter than usual, a quick and easy step is to reboot your phone, especially if you haven't turned it off in longer than a week.

  • 1. Press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously.
  • 2. Touch Restart.
  • 3. Plug your phone in and charge it normally.
  • ####### Tips:

  • • Adjust settings to extend your battery life
  • • Check your phone's battery health to determine if it's time to replace the battery
  • Bluetooth issues

    Bluetooth turning on automatically

    After each step, check to see if your issue is fixed:

  • 1. When Bluetooth is off, your phone can still scan and automatically connect to a previously paired device. To prevent this, turn off Bluetooth scanning.
  • 2. Some third-party apps that control Bluetooth devices (smart watches, fitness and vehicle monitors, etc.) automatically turn Bluetooth on. If they do, this can prevent you from turning Bluetooth off. To check if a third-party app you installed is automatically turning Bluetooth on, use safe mode to identify the problematic app, then uninstall it.
  • Page 358

    Can't pair

    After each step, check to see if your issue is fixed:

  • 1. First, check the basics.
  • 2. Make sure the phone and Bluetooth device are in discovery mode.
  • 3. Refresh the available devices list: a. Go to Settings > Connected devices. b. Touch Pair new device.
  • 4. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 5. If you’re having trouble pairing with your car, see the car manufacturer's instructions for your model.
  • 6. Reset the phone's connections, then power cycle the phone.
  • Can’t reconnect previously paired device

    Unpair the Bluetooth device, then pair it again:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Connected devices.
  • 2. Next to the paired device, tap > FORGET.
  • ![image 1401](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1401.png)

  • 3. Pair the device again.
  • Can't hear music

    After each step, check to see if your issue is fixed:

  • 1. First, check the basics.
  • 2. Check that the volume is up on your phone and car or Bluetooth device.
  • 3. Check that other devices paired with your phone aren't playing the music.
  • Page 359

  • 4. Check that Media audio is on: a. Go to Settings > Connected devices. b. Next to the paired device, touch . c. Make sure Media audio is checked.
  • ![image 1402](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1402.png)

  • 5. If the problem is with a car, check the car's instructions.
  • Can't make or hear on calls

    After each step, check to see if your issue is fixed:

  • 1. Check that other devices paired with your phone aren't getting your calls.
  • 2. Check that Phone audio is on: a. Go to Settings > Connected devices. b. Next to the paired device, touch . c. Make sure Phone audio is checked.
  • ![image 1403](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1403.png)

  • 3. If the problem is with a car, check the car's instructions.
  • Connection drops

    After each step, check to see if your issue is fixed:

  • 1. Check battery level on your phone and on the Bluetooth device and charge if needed. Bluetooth devices may disconnect or create noise when the phone or Bluetooth battery is low.
  • 2. Adjust positioning:
  • • Make sure you are wearing or positioning the device appropriately.
  • • Keep metal objects, such as keys or coins, away from the phone and device to avoid interference.
  • 3. Clear data for this system app: a. Go to Settings > Apps, then touch See all # apps. b. Touch > Show system apps. c. Touch Bluetooth > Storage & cache > Clear storage.
  • ![image 1404](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1404.png)

    Page 360

    Paired device can't see contacts

    Check that contact sharing is on:

  • 1. Go to Settings > Connected devices.
  • 2. Next to the paired device, touch .
  • ![image 1405](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1405.png)

  • 3. Make sure Contact sharing is on.
  • 4. Check and adjust sharing settings on the paired device or in the device’s app.
  • Fix it: Check the basics

    After each step, see if your issue is fixed:

  • 1. Check battery level on your phone and Bluetooth device, and charge if either is low.
  • 2. Keep the phone and Bluetooth device within 30 feet of each other, closer for better performance.
  • 3. On your phone, turn Bluetooth off and then on again.
  • 4. Turn off the Bluetooth device to disconnect it. Then turn it back on to automatically reconnect with the phone.
  • 5. Power cycle both your phone and the Bluetooth device. If that doesn't fix it, follow the steps for specific problems in the sections above.
  • Wi-Fi issues

    After each troubleshooting step, check to see if the issue is fixed.

    Can't connect to a network

  • 1. When you enter the password to connect:
  • • Get the password from the Wi-Fi router and make sure you enter it correctly on your phone.
  • Page 361

  • • If the Connect button is greyed out, the password you entered isn’t long enough. Confirm the
  • router’s password and re-enter it on your phone.

  • 2. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 3. Check that the Wi-Fi router firmware is up to date.
  • 4. Reset the phone’s network connections.
  • 5. Reset the phone.
  • Connection drops

    After each troubleshooting step, check to see if the issue is fixed.

  • 1. Turn off Wi-Fi scanning.
  • 2. Remove the network connection. Then set up the Wi-Fi connection again.
  • 3. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 4. Restart your wireless router by unplugging it from the power outlet for about 30 seconds and then plugging it back in. Once the wireless router is running again, try to reconnect.
  • 5. On a computer, log into your router and try adjusting one or more of these router settings:
  • • If the router has multiple bands, disable the lower band.
  • • Change the encryption/security setting of the SSID from WPA-password to WPA-PSK.
  • • Don't use automatic channel selection. Instead, assign a fixed channel, such as Channel 6.
  • 6. Reset the phone’s connections.
  • Hotspot problems

    If you can't turn your hotspot on, check that:

  • • Cellular data is on.
  • Page 362

  • • Data Saver is turned off. If you can't connect a computer or tablet to your phone's Wi-Fi hotspot:
  • 1. The cellular network for your phone may not be in range. Check the signal icon in your status bar to ensure you have strong connection. If not, try these troubleshooting steps.
  • 2. Re-enter the password on the device to match the hotspot password set up on your phone. Make sure that the encryption type and security settings match on the device and your phone.
  • 3. Disconnect and then reconnect:
  • a. Turn off the connection from your device.
  • b. Turn off the phone's hotspot.
  • c. Restart your device.
  • d. Wait for 1 minute, then turn on and enable the hotspot on your phone.
  • e. Reconnect the device.
  • If you've connected a computer or tablet but can't access certain web sites:

  • 1. Power cycle your computer or tablet.
  • 2. Make sure the browser version is up to date.
  • Can't transfer files or connect USB to computer

    If you're having problems using a USB connection to connect your phone to your computer, try these troubleshooting steps.

    Check your USB connection

  • • On your phone, check that your USB connection is set to File transfer mode.
  • • Try a different USB cable. Not all USB cables can transfer files.
  • • If your phone detected moisture in the USB port, which can occur in high humidity environments or if the phone came in contact with water, unplug the phone, wipe it dry, and gently shake it about 10 times with the USB port facing downward to remove moisture. Place it on a cloth to air dry, or use a fan to help dry it faster.
  • • To test the USB port on your phone, connect your phone to a different computer.
  • • To test the USB port on your computer, connect a different device to your computer.
  • Page 363

  • • To connect your phone to a car, projector, or other device, refer to the user manual that came with the device.
  • Check your computer

    ##### Windows PC

    ####### 1. On your PC, check that Settings > Advanced system settings > Hardware tab > Device installation

    settings is set to automatically detect and install drivers for new devices.

    ##### 2. Restart your PC. Mac computer

  • 1. Check that your computer is running Mac OS X 10.5 or later.
  • 2. Check that your computer has Android File Transfer installed and open.
  • 3. Restart your computer.
  • Check your phone

  • 1. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 2. Turn your phone off and then on again. Press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then tap Restart.
  • Forgot unlock code

    If you forgot your PIN, pattern, or password for unlocking your screen, you need to erase your phone, set it up again, and set a new screen lock.

  • 1. Make sure you know your Gmail address and password, which you'll need when setting up the phone. If you've forgotten them, use Google's website to retrieve them.
  • 2. Perform an external reset of your phone.
  • Can't sign in to Google

    Page 364

    If you’ve forgotten the Gmail address and password for your Google account:

  • 1. Visit Google’s website to reset the password.
  • 2. On a computer, log in to Gmail and confirm that the new password works.
  • 3. Wait 24 hours after changing your password before resetting your device. For security, you can't use an account to set up a phone after reset if that password changed within 24 hours.
  • Account sync issues If your account is having problems syncing, you may see a message or an icon. In most cases, these issues are temporary and your account will sync again after a few minutes. If you keep having sync issues, try the solutions below.

    ![image 1406](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1406.png)

    Sync account manually

  • 1. Go to Settings > Passwords & accounts.
  • 2. Touch the account to sync.
  • 3. Touch Account sync. If your phone syncs, your issue is fixed. If not, try the troubleshooting solutions below.
  • Basic troubleshooting

    After each troubleshooting step, try manually syncing to test if sync works.

  • 1. Check that auto-sync is on. a. Go to Settings > Passwords & accounts. b. Touch the account.
  • ![image 1407](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1407.png)

    by the account name means that some or all of the account's information is configured to autosync.

    ![image 1408](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1408.png)

    by the account name means that the account will not auto-sync.

  • 2. Make sure your Internet connection works.
  • Page 365

    For sync to work, you need an Internet connection. To test if your connection is working, open a browser and load a website. If the website doesn't load, get help connecting to Wi-Fi or to cellular data.

  • 3. Check if you have account issues.
  • For sync to work, you need to be able to sign in to your Google account. Make sure that you can sign in to your account in other ways and on another device. For example, try checking your Gmail with your computer's browser.

  • • If you can sign in, the issue is with your phone. You can move on to the next solution.
  • • If you can't sign in, your account may have an issue.
  • 4. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • Advanced troubleshooting

    After each troubleshooting step, try manually syncing to test if sync works.

  • 1. Remove and re-add your account.
  • 2. Clear cache and data for the Contacts app.
  • a. If you've saved any contacts since you last synced, back them up. Open the Contacts app, then tap Organize > Export. Then export to a VCF file and email the file to yourself.
  • ![image 1409](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1409.png)

    ![image 1410](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1410.png)

  • b. Clear the cache and data for the Contacts app.
  • c. Download the VCF file that you emailed to yourself, then import those contacts (Contacts app > Organize > Import).
  • ![image 1411](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1411.png)

    Page 366

    ![image 1412](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1412.png)

    App or widget issues

    App or widget missing from home screen

    If a widget disappeared from your home screen, then add the widget by touching & holding an empty spot on your home screen.

    If an app disappeared from your home screen, the shortcut for opening the app was removed and you just need to add a shortcut.

    If an app disappeared from your list of all apps, you need to reinstall it.

    App icons being replaced in favorites

    If the apps in your favorites tray are being replaced by apps you haven't selected and you don't want them to change, turn off app suggestions.

  • 1. Touch & hold a blank space on your home screen.
  • 2. Tap Home settings > Home screen style.
  • ![image 1413](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1413.png)

  • 3. Next to App tray, tap .
  • ![image 1414](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1414.png)

  • 4. Turn Suggestions on Home screen off .
  • ![image 1415](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1415.png)

    App crashes, won’t open, or isn’t working

    After each step, check to see if the issue is fixed:

    Page 367

  • 1. Turn your phone off and then on again. Press & hold the Power + Volume up buttons simultaneously, then tap Restart.
  • 2. Check that you have not disabled permissions for the app. If any permissions are turned off, turn them on and try using the app again.
  • 3. Update the app.
  • 4. Force stop the app. This completely shuts down the app, including any background services that may be causing your issue.
  • 5. Clear the app’s cache. This frees up space by removing temporary files.
  • 6. Clear the app’s data. This erases all data saved in this app.
  • 7. Contact the app’s developer. a. Open the Play Store app. b. Touch your profile icon > Manage apps & device. c. Touch the app and swipe down to see contact information.
  • ![image 1416](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1416.png)

  • 8. If all else fails, delete the app.
  • Tip: To figure out which third-party app is causing performance problems, use safe mode.

    App is slow to open

    If you experience a lag when opening an app, turn on performance settings.

    App disabled in safe mode If apps are disabled because you’re in safe mode, you can’t use them until you exit safe mode. To exit safe mode, turn your phone off and then on again.

    If you can't update apps

    If you see apps waiting to update that are stuck in “Pending” status, update the Chrome app first.

    ![image 1417](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1417.png)

  • 1. On the “Pending downloads” screen, cancel all downloads.
  • 2. Swipe to Chrome and tap Update.
  • ![image 1418](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1418.png)

  • 3. After Chrome has updated, touch Update all. Apps will now update normally.
  • Page 368

    Problems with app you installed

    After each step, check to see if the issue is fixed:

  • 1. Check for updates to the app.
  • 2. If you can open the app, touch or > Help and look for troubleshooting information.
  • ![image 1419](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1419.png)

    ![image 1420](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1420.png)

  • 3. Clear the app's cache.
  • 4. Go to the developer’s website for support. a. Open the Play Store app. b. Touch your profile icon > Manage apps & device. c. Touch the app and swipe down to see a link to the website.
  • ![image 1421](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1421.png)

    Camera issues

    Photo looks blurry Wipe the lens clean with a soft, dry cloth and retake the photo. If new photos still look blurry:

  • • Increase resolution (photo size) in the Camera app. A smaller photo size results in lower image quality.
  • • Avoid zooming when taking a photo. Pixelation always occurs when you zoom a digital photo. If you use
  • zoom during the shot itself, pixelation will be more evident.

    • If you're indoors and taking a panoramic photo, switch to regular mode. Panorama works best for outdoor shots; the algorithm that stitches the images together isn’t optimized for indoor, up-close shots.

    Accidentally deleted photos You can try to recover recently deleted photos. If recovered, be sure to back up your photos to the cloud.

    WhatsApp camera issues

    Page 369

    If you installed WhatsApp and have problems taking photos or videos with it:

  • 1. Check for updates to the app.
  • 2. Clear the app's cache.
  • 3. If the problem continues, open WhatsApp, touch > Settings > Help, and search for information about your issue.
  • ![image 1422](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1422.png)

    Error: Please restart Camera to continue

    After each troubleshooting step, check to see if the issue is fixed:

  • 1. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 2. Clear the cache for the Camera app.
  • 3. Check for updates to your Camera app.
  • 4. Use safe mode to see if apps you installed are causing the issue and uninstall as needed. If the camera works correctly in safe mode, a third-party app is probably causing the issue.
  • Error: Camera Busy

    This error can occur if you use the camera in one app and then switch to another app that requires permission to access the camera.

    After each troubleshooting step, check to see if the issue is fixed:

  • 1. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 2. Check which apps have permission to access the camera. Settings > Apps > Camera
  • Review the list of the apps on your phone that request camera access and remove access for apps that look suspicious or that you don’t use.

  • 3. Clear the cache and data for the Camera app.
  • Page 370

    Error: Trash is full

    If you’re getting messages about the trash being full:

  • 1. Open the Photos app.
  • 2. Touch Collections > Trash.
  • 3. Touch > Empty trash.
  • ![image 1423](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1423.png)

  • 4. Touch Delete permanently to confirm the deletion.
  • Messaging issues

    If you’re having issues sending or receiving messages, try the following:

  • 1. Check for updates to your messaging app.
  • 2. Check if a software update is available for your phone.
  • 3. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 4. If the issue persists, follow the steps below for specific issues. After each troubleshooting step, check to see if your issue is fixed.
  • Red ! on text message

    If you see , your text message was not sent.

    ![image 1424](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1424.png)

  • Check your signal strength.
  • Weak signal from your cellular provider is a common cause of unsent messages. In the status bar, see how many bars your network connection has. If you see only one or two bars, change locations to improve your signal strength, particularly if you are indoors.

  • Open the conversation and resend the message.
  • Can't hear notifications

  • 1. Check that message notifications are turned on.
  • 2. Look for in your status bar. If you see it:
  • ![image 1425](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1425.png)

  • • Open quick settings and touch to turn Do Not Disturb off.
  • ![image 1426](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1426.png)

  • • Make sure your phone is set to screen calls at the appropriate times.
  • 3. If you're using a 3rd party launcher, switch back to the Moto launcher. If this fixes the issue, then find an alternative launcher to use.
  • Can't send or receive messages

  • 1. Change your preferred network to Global. (Not all carriers support this feature.)
  • 2. If you recently switched from iPhone and are having trouble sending messages to or receiving them from an iPhone, your phone number may still be associated with iMessage. You need to deregister your account.
  • 3. Contact your carrier.
  • Can't send or receive pictures or videos

    Check that:

  • • Cellular data is turned on.
  • • Your data plan supports MMS (multimedia messages).
  • Messages app stopped

    ![image 1427](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1427.png)

  • 1. Check that you have not disabled permissions for the Messages app. If any permissions are turned off, turn them on and try using the app again.
  • 2. Force stop the app. This completely shuts down the app, including any background services that may be causing your issue.
  • 3. Uninstall any recent app updates. Touch & hold , then tap App info > > Uninstall updates.
  • ![image 1428](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1428.png)

    ![image 1429](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1429.png)

    ![image 1430](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1430.png)

  • 4. Clear the app’s cache. This frees up space by removing temporary files.
  • 5. Reset the phone.
  • Keyboard not working

    If your keyboard has problems, like a missing spacebar:

  • 1. Check for updates to your keyboard app.
  • 2. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 3. Clear the cache for the keyboard app.
  • Problems with Facebook, WhatsApp, other apps

    If you’re having problems with messaging apps that you installed:

  • 1. Check for updates to the app.
  • 2. If you can open the app, touch or > Help and look for troubleshooting information.
  • ![image 1431](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1431.png)

    ![image 1432](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1432.png)

  • 3. Turn your phone off and then on again.
  • 4. Clear the app's cache.
  • Gmail issues

    For help with Gmail, read Google's troubleshooting information.

    Play Store issues

    For help with Play Store, read Google's troubleshooting information.

    Update Android software

    For best performance, keep your phone updated with the latest available Android software.

    Check Android version number

    To check what version of Android your phone is running:

  • 1. Go to Settings > About phone > Android version.
  • 2. The number displayed is your phone's Android version.
  • Install Android software updates Your phone notifies you if an Android software update is available. To manually check for updates, go to Settings > System updates > Check for updates. If an upgrade is available, follow the onscreen instructions to install it.

    ####### Tips:

  • • To save data charges, use a Wi‑Fi connection to download software updates.
  • • For safety reasons, your phone may download security updates (not OS upgrades) automatically over your mobile network if Wi-Fi is not available within a few days after you receive a notification that a security update is available. In this case, data charges may apply depending on the carrier.
  • You can't downgrade to a previous software version after installing an update.

    Check if and when updates are available

    Types of updates:

    • Security updates contain fixes and improvements from Google for your current version of the Android

    operating system. Motorola provides these updates to most phones on a regular basis.

    • Android OS updates are new versions of the Android operating system. Motorola provides OS updates

    from Google to eligible phones as soon as possible.

    To see if an OS update will be available for your phone, or if your phone is still eligible for security updates, see the software update website for your country. Our support agents get their Android update information from here too. If the website doesn't have a update release date for your phone, then we don’t know the release date yet.

    For Android OS updates, with several phone models, regions, and distribution channels we may have hundreds of software versions to test before releasing an update to your phone. Because dependencies on carriers and other key partners for certifications, independent testing, and requests for changes take more time, all phone owners don't receive updates at the same time, even in the same region.

    Reset connections, settings, or apps

    Try these resets if you’re having issues with specific features on your phone. If the reset doesn’t resolve issues, you can take the larger step of resetting your phone.

    Reset eSIM Only some versions of this phone, sold in certain countries, support this feature. Use this reset if you're changing phones or changing SIMs.

    ##### What gets deleted/removed when you reset

    This removes the eSIM from your phone. It does not affect your mobile data account. To close an account, contact your carrier.

    ##### Reset

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Reset options.
  • 2. Tap Erase eSIMs.
  • Reset Wi-Fi, cellular data, and Bluetooth

    Use this reset if:

  • • Wi-Fi doesn't work. Wi-Fi network name doesn’t show on your phone.
  • • Cellular/mobile data: No signal and in the status bar. You can't make/receive calls, or calls frequently drop.
  • ![image 1433](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1433.png)

  • • Bluetooth doesn't work or disconnects automatically.
  • • VPN doesn't work as expected. What gets deleted/removed when you reset
  • • All Wi-Fi devices and passwords set up on your phone
  • • All cellular/mobile settings, like preferred cellular network
  • • All paired Bluetooth devices set to connect with your phone, like ear buds, car audio, speakers
  • • All VPN configurations set up on your phone You cannot choose individual connections to reset; they will all reset.
  • Reset If you're having problems with connections, review this information first:

  • • Wi-Fi
  • • Bluetooth
  • • Cellular data
  • • Hotspot (internet sharing) Then, if you’re still experiencing problems, try resetting all network settings:
  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Reset options.
  • 2. Tap Reset Wi-Fi, mobile & Bluetooth > Reset settings.
  • 3. Tap Reset settings.
  • 4. Try to reconnect to Wi-Fi, cellular data, and Bluetooth, or try to share your internet connection again.
  • Reset app preferences This reset doesn't allow you to choose individual apps; all apps will be reset. Before resetting all apps, if you're having trouble with one or two apps, reset the apps individually. If you still experience the following issues, then reset all apps:

  • • App crashes frequently or won't open
  • • App doesn't behave as expected
  • • App uses too much battery or data
  • • App sends error messages or notifications
  • • App causes phone to be slow or unresponsive What gets deleted/removed when you reset
  • • Selections you made for default apps to use for specific functions or to open specific file types; you’ll be asked to choose again.
  • • Apps you disabled manually to prevent them from showing in the app tray or on the home screen will reappear; you can disable them again.
  • • Preferences you set for app notifications, like hiding notification content from the lock screen; you can reset these.
  • • Changes in background data and app permissions.
  • Reset To reset all apps:

  • 1. Go to Settings > System > Reset options.
  • 2. Tap Reset app preferences.
  • 3. Tap Reset apps.
  • Reset phone

    What a reset does

    Resetting your phone erases all data and brings it back to out-of-the-box condition. This data will be erased from the phone:

  • • Google account
  • • Media (music, photos, videos)
  • • System settings and data
  • • App settings and data (including text messages)
  • • Downloaded apps Before you reset
  • 1. Back up your data. If your phone works and you can unlock it:
  • • If you aren't automatically saving your photos and videos to your Google Photos library, back them

    up now or copy them to a computer.

  • • Back up files and folders to Drive.
  • • Make sure that any changes you made to contacts or calendar are synced to an account.
  • 2. Make sure you have your security information:
  • • The username for a Google account on your phone. (Settings > Passwords & accounts)
  • • The password for that Google account. If you've forgotten the password, you can reset it. Wait 24
  • hours before resetting the phone if you reset your password.

    • If you set a screen lock, make sure you know the PIN, pattern, or password.

    To restore your data after resetting, you'll need to enter security information. This shows that you or someone you trust did the reset and helps prevent others from using your phone without permission.

  • 3. If you’re going to give your phone to someone else, disable Factory Reset Protection (FRP): a. Remove the screen lock. b. Remove your Google accounts from the phone.
  • FRP is security measure that keeps your data safe if your phone is lost or stolen, and that requires logging into the phone with the owner's account to reset the phone. Removing your account and screen lock before the reset lets the person you're giving it to set it up with their own information.

    Reset phone from Settings

    To erase all data and reset your phone:

  • 1. Go to Settings > System.
  • 2. Tap Reset options > Erase all data (factory reset).
  • Reset phone if you can't open Settings

    If you can’t open Settings, do an external reset.

  • 1. Charge your battery 30% or more.
  • 2. Turn off the phone.
  • 3. Press & hold the Volume Down button and the Power button at the same time until the phone turns on.
  • 4. Press the Volume Down button until you see Recovery mode.
  • 5. Press the Power button to restart in Recovery mode.
  • 6. If you see an Android robot with an exclamation mark, press & hold the Power button and, while holding it down, press & release the Volume up button.
  • 7. Use the Volume buttons to scroll to Wipe data/factory reset, then press the Power button to select it.
  • 8. Use Volume buttons to scroll to Factory data reset, then press the Power button to select it. Allow several seconds for the reset to complete.
  • 9. Use Volume buttons to scroll to Reboot system now, then press the Power button to select it.
  • Allow several minutes for the reboot to complete. If the phone doesn't finish rebooting, press & hold the Power button until the screen turns dark, then release it to power up normally.

  • 10. If you reset your phone because you suspect a third-party app is causing problems, when you set up the phone again, be sure you don't copy all apps. Restore one app at a time and use the phone for a while. If the phone has no issues, install the next app and retest.
  • Get more help

    ####### Issue Where to get help

    Billing or cellular network issues Contact your carrier.

    Learn to use an app Open the app and touch or > Help.

    ![image 1434](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1434.png)

    ![image 1435](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1435.png)

    Phone issue Visit mobilesupport.lenovo.com for solutions, user forums, live contact options.

    #### Fix issues 361

    Send feedback to Motorola

    If you have comments or suggestions about your phone, we want to hear them. Go to Settings > Rating & feedback.

    To send feedback frequently, including a screenshot of the previous screen, open quick settings and touch Share feedback. (You can add this to quick settings.)

    To send feedback about a Motorola app, in the app, touch or or > Feedback.

    ![image 1436](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1436.png)

    ![image 1437](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1437.png)

    ![image 1438](help-motorola-edge-40-13-global-en-us_images/imageFile1438.png)

    More from Motorola

    Similar Smartphones